Furuno Far3210Bb Operators Manual
FAR-3220-BB to the manual bd5cd713-3177-4399-a73c-cef74382846f
2015-08-11
: Furuno Furuno-Far3210Bb-Operators-Manual-800965 furuno-far3210bb-operators-manual-800965 furuno pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 463
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
OPERATOR'S MANUAL CHART RADAR Model FAR-3210 FAR-3220 FAR-3230S FAR-3230S-SSD FAR-3310 FAR-3320 FAR-3330S FAR-3330S-SSD FAR-3320W FAR-3330SW FAR-3210-BB FAR-3220-BB FAR-3230S-BB FAR-3230S-SSD-BB FAR-3220W-BB FAR-3230SW-BB (Product Name: MARINE RADAR) www.furuno.com The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free. ・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : APR . 2014 B2 : DEC . 15, 2014 Pub. No. OME-36160-B2 ( YOTA ) FAR-3000SERIES 0 0 0 1 7 8 0 2 7 1 1 IMPORTANT NOTICES General • This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users. • The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury. • Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO. • If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement. • The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice. • The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings. • Save this manual for future reference. • Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the warranty. • All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders. • “C-MAP” means “C-MAP by Jeppesen” in this manual. • Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation of the USA and other countries. How to discard this product Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal. How to discard a used battery Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit. In the European Union The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd In the USA The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws. Ni-Cd Pb In the other countries There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can increase when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future. i SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action WARNING Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy that can be harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table below. Magnetron radar Radar model FAR-3210/ FAR-3310/ FAR-3210-BB Transceiver RTR-105 FAR-3220/ FAR-3320/ FAR-3220-BB RTR-106 FAR-3320W/ FAR-3220W-BB RTR-108 FAR-3230S/ FAR-3330S/ FAR-3230S-BB 100W/m2 50W/m2 10W/m2 XN20CF 0.6 m 0.4 m 1.4 m 0.9 m 4.4 m 3.0 m XN24CF 0.3 m 0.6 m 2.5 m XN12CF 1.3 m 1.0 m 2.7 m 1.7 m 9.5 m 6.8 m Magnetron FNE1201 MG5436 Antenna XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF 0.7 m 1.3 m 5.5 m MG5436 XN20CF 0.5 m 1.2 m 5.5 m RTR-107 MG5223F XN24CF SN36CF 0.3 m N/A 0.9 m 0.5 m 4.0 m 4.6 m RTR-109 FAR-3330SW/ FAR-3230SW-BB MG5223F SN36CF N/A 0.26 m 2.3 m Solid state radar Radar model FAR-3230S-SSD/ FAR-3330S-SSD/ FAR-3230S-SSD-BB ii Transceiver RTR-111 Antenna SN36CF 100W/m2 50W/m2 10W/m2 N/A N/A 1.0 m SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING Do not open the equipment. The equipment uses high voltage that can cause electrical shock. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician. Before turning on the radar, be sure no one is near the antenna. Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna, which can result in serious injury or death. WARNING Do not operate the equipment with wet hands. Electrical shock can result. Keep objects away from the opentype antenna unit, so as not to impede rotation of the antenna. Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result. Use the proper fuse. If water leaks into the equipment or something is dropped into the equipment, immediately turn off the power at the switchboard. WARNING Fire or electrical shock can result. If the equipment is giving off smoke or fire, immediately turn off the power at the switchboard. Fire or electrical shock can result. If you feel the equipment is acting abnormally or giving off strange noises, immediately turn off the power at the switchboard and contact a FURUNO service technician. Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result. Make sure no rain or water splash leaks into the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if water leaks into the equipment. Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or damage the equipment. The TT function is a valuable aid to navigation. However, the navigator must check all aids available to avoid collision. - The TT automatically tracks an automatically or manually acquired radar target and calculates its course and speed, indicating them with a vector. Since the data generated by the TT depends on the selected radar targets, the radar must be optimally tuned for use with the TT, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unnecessary targets, like sea returns and noise, will not be acquired and tracked. - A target is not always a landmass, reef, ship, but can also be returns from the sea surface and from clutter. As the level of clutter changes with the environment, the operator must correctly adjust the sea and rain clutter controls and the gain control so that the target echoes do not disappear from the radar screen. Do not place liquid-filled containers on or near the equipment. Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid spills into the equipment. iii SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION CAUTIO The plotting accuracy and response of this TT meets IMO standards. Tracking accuracy is affected by the following: • • Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.) The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 seconds for the lower relative speed. The following factors can affect accuracy: - Echo intensity - Radar transmission pulse length - Radar bearing error - Gyrocompass error - Course change (own ship and targets) Handle the LCD carefully. The LCD is made of glass, which can cause injury if broken. The data presented by this equipment is intended as a source of navigation information. The prudent navigator never relies exclusively on any one source of navigation information, for safety of vessel and crew. iv Warning Label(s) Warning label(s) is(are) attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label(s). If a label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement. WARNING To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside. WARNING Radiation hazard. Only qualified personnel should work inside scanner. Confirm that TX has stopped before opening scanner. Name: Warning Label 1 Type: 86-003-1011-1 Code No.: 100-236-231 Name: Warning Sticker Type: 03-142-3201-0 Code No.: 100-266-890 TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD................................................................................................................ xvii SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS...................................................................................... xxi 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................1-1 1.1 Units of the System ....................................................................................................1-1 1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025..........................................................................1-1 1.1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 .....................................................................1-4 1.1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000.................................................................................1-5 1.2 How to Turn the System On/Off .................................................................................1-5 1.3 How to Select a Color Palette.....................................................................................1-6 1.4 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO monitor) ...........................................1-7 1.5 Operating Modes ........................................................................................................1-8 1.5.1 How to select an operating mode ...................................................................1-8 1.5.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode.................................................1-8 1.6 Display Screens..........................................................................................................1-9 1.6.1 Radar display .................................................................................................1-9 1.6.2 Chart radar display .......................................................................................1-11 1.6.3 Chart display ................................................................................................1-12 1.7 Status Bar.................................................................................................................1-13 1.7.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode .........................................................1-13 1.7.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar ...........................1-14 1.8 InstantAccess Bar.....................................................................................................1-15 1.8.1 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the InstantAccess bar ...............1-17 1.9 Sensor Information, Datum Box ...............................................................................1-18 1.10 Menu Overview.........................................................................................................1-19 1.10.1 Basic menu operation...................................................................................1-19 1.10.2 Menu history feature.....................................................................................1-20 1.10.3 How to enter numeric data ...........................................................................1-21 1.10.4 How to enter alphanumeric character data ..................................................1-21 1.11 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode ...........................................................1-22 1.11.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes .........................1-22 1.11.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and chart radar modes .................................................................................1-24 1.12 Cursor Position .........................................................................................................1-25 1.13 How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................1-25 1.14 How to Enter Ship Speed .........................................................................................1-26 1.15 How to Enter Heading ..............................................................................................1-28 1.16 How to Mark MOB Position ......................................................................................1-29 1.17 How to Offset Position ..............................................................................................1-29 1.18 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time ............................................................1-30 1.19 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display ................................................................1-30 1.20 The Settings Menu ...................................................................................................1-31 1.21 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar .......................................................................1-31 1.21.1 How to create a profile .................................................................................1-31 1.21.2 How to disable a profile ................................................................................1-31 1.21.3 How to activate a profile ...............................................................................1-31 1.21.4 How to restore a profile to the default settings .............................................1-32 1.21.5 How to change the settings on the current display to the recommended settings .......................................................................1-32 1.22 How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart System Information, and Operator's Manual .............................................................................................1-33 1.23 Tips (operational guidance) .....................................................................................1-34 v TABLE OF CONTENTS 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION................................................................2-1 2.1 How to Transmit ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver............................................................................... 2-1 2.2.1 Tuning for magnetron radar ........................................................................... 2-1 2.3 Pulse Length .............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.3.1 How to select a pulse length .......................................................................... 2-2 2.3.2 How to change the pulse length..................................................................... 2-3 2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity...................................................................................... 2-3 2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter..................................................................................... 2-3 2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-4 2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually ............................................................... 2-4 2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter.................................................................................... 2-5 2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-5 2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually............................................................... 2-6 2.7 Interference Rejector.................................................................................................. 2-7 2.8 Echo Stretch............................................................................................................... 2-7 2.9 Echo Averaging.......................................................................................................... 2-8 2.10 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function ........................................................... 2-9 2.10.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off ............. 2-9 2.10.2 How to adjust the gain in the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode...... 2-9 2.10.3 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) menu .................................................. 2-10 2.10.4 How to get the high sensitivity...................................................................... 2-10 2.10.5 How to suppress the false echoes ............................................................... 2-10 2.11 Noise Rejector.......................................................................................................... 2-11 2.12 Wiper........................................................................................................................ 2-12 2.13 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation Purpose ......................................... 2-12 2.13.1 How to select a customized echo................................................................. 2-14 2.13.2 How to edit a customized echo .................................................................... 2-14 2.13.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings..................... 2-15 2.13.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings........ 2-15 2.14 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes .................................................................. 2-16 2.15 Presentation Modes ................................................................................................. 2-16 2.15.1 How to select a presentation mode.............................................................. 2-17 2.15.2 Description of presentation modes............................................................... 2-18 2.16 How to Select the Range Scale ............................................................................... 2-20 2.17 How to Measure the Range to a Target ................................................................... 2-20 2.17.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM ................................................ 2-21 2.17.2 How to set VRM attributes ........................................................................... 2-22 2.18 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target ................................................................. 2-23 2.18.1 How to measure the bearing ........................................................................ 2-23 2.18.2 How to select bearing reference .................................................................. 2-24 2.19 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 2-24 2.19.1 How to assess risk of collision .................................................................... 2-24 2.19.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL ........................................... 2-25 2.20 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ............................. 2-26 2.21 How to Off-center the Display .................................................................................. 2-27 2.22 Target Trails ............................................................................................................. 2-28 2.22.1 Target trails-related indications .................................................................... 2-28 2.22.2 True or relative target trails .......................................................................... 2-28 2.22.3 Trail time ...................................................................................................... 2-29 2.22.4 How to reset target trails .............................................................................. 2-29 2.22.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display ........................ 2-29 2.22.6 Trail stabilization in true motion.................................................................... 2-29 2.22.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu .................................................... 2-30 2.23 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ........................................................................................... 2-30 2.23.1 How to display, erase a PI line..................................................................... 2-31 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40 2.41 2.23.2 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ..........................................2-31 2.23.3 How to select the number of PI lines to display............................................2-31 2.23.4 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line ......................................2-31 2.23.5 How to select the PI lines orientation ...........................................................2-32 2.23.6 How to reset PI lines ....................................................................................2-32 2.23.7 How to adjust PI line length ..........................................................................2-32 Zoom ........................................................................................................................2-33 Markers.....................................................................................................................2-34 2.25.1 Heading line .................................................................................................2-34 2.25.2 Stern marker.................................................................................................2-34 2.25.3 North marker ................................................................................................2-34 2.25.4 Own ship marker ..........................................................................................2-34 2.25.5 Vectors .........................................................................................................2-35 2.25.6 Barge marker................................................................................................2-35 2.25.7 Antenna marker............................................................................................2-36 2.25.8 Cursor...........................................................................................................2-36 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data...................................................................2-37 Watch Alert ...............................................................................................................2-38 Information Box ........................................................................................................2-39 2.28.1 Information box contents ..............................................................................2-39 2.28.2 How to show the information box .................................................................2-40 2.28.3 How to turn NAV data on/off.........................................................................2-41 Interswitch ................................................................................................................2-42 2.29.1 Displaying antenna information ....................................................................2-42 2.29.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations ........................................2-43 2.29.3 How to select an antenna .............................................................................2-44 Dual Radar (B-type only) ..........................................................................................2-45 2.30.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display ..........................................2-46 2.30.2 Operating considerations for the dual radar display .....................................2-46 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................2-48 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types) ....................................................................2-50 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point).........................................................2-51 Drop Mark.................................................................................................................2-53 2.34.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box ..........................................................2-53 2.34.2 How to inscribe a drop mark.........................................................................2-53 2.34.3 Drop mark bearing reference .......................................................................2-53 2.34.4 How to erase a drop mark ............................................................................2-54 Anchor Watch ...........................................................................................................2-54 SART ........................................................................................................................2-55 2.36.1 What is an SART? ........................................................................................2-55 2.36.2 How to receive an SART ..............................................................................2-55 Alert Box, Alert List ...................................................................................................2-56 2.37.1 Alert box .......................................................................................................2-56 2.37.2 Alert list.........................................................................................................2-57 2.37.3 Changing priority of primary alerts ...............................................................2-57 Echo Area.................................................................................................................2-58 Echo Color................................................................................................................2-58 Icing Prevention........................................................................................................2-59 Chart Radar Functions .............................................................................................2-60 2.41.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes ..................................2-60 2.41.2 How to show or hide chart objects ...............................................................2-60 2.41.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects .....................2-62 2.41.4 Chart database information ..........................................................................2-63 2.41.5 Chart scale indications .................................................................................2-63 2.41.6 Chart status ..................................................................................................2-63 2.41.7 Chart alert function .......................................................................................2-64 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.41.8 Notes details ................................................................................................ 2-64 2.42 Radar Observation ................................................................................................... 2-65 2.42.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2-65 2.42.2 False echoes................................................................................................ 2-66 2.42.3 RACON ........................................................................................................ 2-68 2.42.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ..................................................................... 2-68 2.42.5 Solid state radar ........................................................................................... 2-69 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) .....................................................................................3-1 3.1 About TT ....................................................................................................................3-1 3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display ............................................................................ 3-1 3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed ................................................................................ 3-2 3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input ......................................................................... 3-2 3.4 Automatic Acquisition................................................................................................. 3-3 3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition ...................................................................... 3-3 3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone...................................................... 3-4 3.5 Manual Acquisition ..................................................................................................... 3-5 3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions ...................................................... 3-5 3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target................................................................... 3-6 3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including reference targets)...................................... 3-6 3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets ..................................... 3-6 3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs .................................................................. 3-7 3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes ...................................................................... 3-7 3.7.1 TT symbols..................................................................................................... 3-7 3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance ....................................................................................... 3-8 3.7.3 Color for TT symbol........................................................................................ 3-8 3.8 How to Display TT Data ............................................................................................. 3-9 3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT ................................................... 3-9 3.8.2 TT pop-up information.................................................................................. 3-10 3.8.3 Target list ..................................................................................................... 3-10 3.9 Vector Modes ........................................................................................................... 3-11 3.9.1 Description of vectors................................................................................... 3-11 3.9.2 Vector motion and length ............................................................................. 3-13 3.10 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 3-13 3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference ...................................................................... 3-14 3.10.2 Past position points ...................................................................................... 3-14 3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift ....................................................................................... 3-14 3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm ............................................................................................... 3-16 3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits ........................................................... 3-16 3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm ........................................ 3-16 3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm............................................ 3-16 3.13 TT Lost Target Alert ................................................................................................. 3-17 3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert............................................. 3-17 3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................ 3-17 3.14 Trial Maneuver ......................................................................................................... 3-18 3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers.............................................................................. 3-18 3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver .......................................................................... 3-19 3.15 TT Simulation Mode ................................................................................................. 3-20 3.16 TT Alerts................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking ............................................................... 3-22 3.18 Factors Affecting Target Tracking ............................................................................ 3-24 4. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................4-1 4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function .......................................................................... 4-2 4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display ........................................................................... 4-3 viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 4.3 AIS Symbols ...............................................................................................................4-3 4.4 How to Filter Sleeping AIS Targets ............................................................................4-5 4.5 How to Activate Targets .............................................................................................4-5 4.5.1 How to activate specific target........................................................................4-5 4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets .............................................................4-6 4.6 How to Sleep Targets .................................................................................................4-6 4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target .............................................................4-6 4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets ............................................................4-7 4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data.................................................................................4-7 4.7.1 AIS pop-up information...................................................................................4-7 4.7.2 Basic AIS target data......................................................................................4-7 4.7.3 Expanded AIS data ........................................................................................4-9 4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm ..............................................................................................4-10 4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance ...............................................................................................4-10 4.10 AIS Symbol Color .....................................................................................................4-11 4.11 AIS Lost Targets.......................................................................................................4-11 4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alert ...........................................4-11 4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter ...............................................................4-12 4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions................................................................4-12 4.12.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference.......................................................................4-12 4.12.2 Past position points ......................................................................................4-13 4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors ......................................................4-13 4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets...........................................................................4-13 4.14.1 How to select association method ................................................................4-13 4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association .....................................................4-14 4.15 Voyage Data.............................................................................................................4-14 4.16 AIS Messages ..........................................................................................................4-15 4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message .........................................4-15 4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message ........................................................4-16 4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages .......................................................4-16 4.17 Other AIS Features...................................................................................................4-18 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK ...................................................................................5-1 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 What is a Radar Map?................................................................................................5-1 Presentation Modes....................................................................................................5-1 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display ...............................................................5-1 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines.................................................................5-2 How to Find Number of Map Points Used ..................................................................5-3 How to Select the Radar Map to Display....................................................................5-4 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find Comment for a Map ......................5-4 5.7.1 How to attach a comment to a radar map ......................................................5-4 5.7.2 How to find the comment for a map ...............................................................5-4 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines................................................................5-5 5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines.......................................5-5 5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area ...............................................5-5 5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file..............................5-6 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines.................................................................5-7 5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map mark and line to another map file .............5-7 5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to another map file ..5-7 5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to another map file 5-8 How to Export Radar Map ..........................................................................................5-9 How to Import Radar Map ........................................................................................5-10 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features .................................................................5-13 Track.........................................................................................................................5-13 5.13.1 How to set up ship's track.............................................................................5-13 ix TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.13.2 How to erase track ....................................................................................... 5-14 5.14 Route Display........................................................................................................... 5-14 5.15 User Chart Display ................................................................................................... 5-15 6. CHART OVERVIEW...............................................................................................6-1 6.1 Chart Screen Overview .............................................................................................. 6-1 6.1.1 Electronic chart area ...................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.2 Status bar....................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.3 InstantAccess bar........................................................................................... 6-5 6.1.4 Sensor information box .................................................................................. 6-8 6.1.5 Own ship functions box .................................................................................. 6-8 6.1.6 Route information box .................................................................................... 6-9 6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box................................................................................ 6-10 6.1.8 Alert box ....................................................................................................... 6-10 6.1.9 Permanent warning box ............................................................................... 6-10 6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes.......................................................................................... 6-10 6.1.11 Context-sensitive menus.............................................................................. 6-11 6.1.12 How to enter alphanumeric data .................................................................. 6-12 6.2 How to Select the Operating Mode .......................................................................... 6-13 6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode ................................................................ 6-13 6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale ................................................................................. 6-14 6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode...................................................................... 6-15 6.6 Cursor Position Box ................................................................................................. 6-16 6.7 The Standby Mode................................................................................................... 6-16 6.8 True Motion Reset.................................................................................................... 6-17 6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes ................................................................................... 6-18 6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL................................................................................. 6-19 6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM .................................................................. 6-19 6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing....................................................... 6-19 6.10.3 How to select bearing reference .................................................................. 6-19 6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu................... 6-20 6.11 Split Screen.............................................................................................................. 6-21 6.12 Datum....................................................................................................................... 6-21 6.12.1 General ........................................................................................................ 6-21 6.12.2 Paper charts................................................................................................. 6-21 6.12.3 Electronic sea charts.................................................................................... 6-21 6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum .................................................................... 6-21 6.12.5 Chart radar and datum ................................................................................. 6-21 6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings................................................................................. 6-22 6.14 How to Enter Ship Speed......................................................................................... 6-22 6.15 How to Enter Heading .............................................................................................. 6-24 6.16 Set up Before Departure .......................................................................................... 6-26 6.16.1 Updates before departure ............................................................................ 6-26 6.16.2 Create or update a route .............................................................................. 6-27 6.16.3 How to check and prepare route to monitor ................................................. 6-28 6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors .................................................. 6-30 6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter.......................................................... 6-31 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS ................................................................................7-1 7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts ................................................................ 7-1 7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts ......................................................................... 7-2 7.2.1 How to install an ENC license ........................................................................ 7-2 7.2.2 How to install ENC charts .............................................................................. 7-3 7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses..................................................................................... 7-5 7.4 How to Install C-MAP Charts ..................................................................................... 7-6 x TABLE OF CONTENTS 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 8. 7.4.1 How to register the eToken ............................................................................7-6 7.4.2 How to install the C-MAP database................................................................7-6 7.4.3 How to install C-MAP licenses .......................................................................7-8 7.4.4 How to generate and order an update file ......................................................7-9 7.4.5 How to apply the update file ...........................................................................7-9 How to Delete a C-MAP Database .............................................................................7-9 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts.............................................7-10 7.6.1 How to generate and order an update file ....................................................7-10 7.6.2 How to apply the update file .........................................................................7-10 7.6.3 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL ....................................................7-11 How to Export a List of Charts..................................................................................7-11 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses.................................................................7-12 How to Show the ENC Permit ..................................................................................7-12 How to Backup, Restore Licenses............................................................................7-12 How to View Permit Expiration Date.........................................................................7-13 How to Display Install/Update History ......................................................................7-14 Catalog of Chart Cells ..............................................................................................7-15 7.13.1 How to group chart cells ...............................................................................7-16 7.13.2 How to view status of chart cells ..................................................................7-18 How to Open Charts .................................................................................................7-18 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List....................................................................7-19 7.15.1 How to print the chart list ..............................................................................7-19 7.15.2 How to print the cell status list......................................................................7-20 How to Delete Charts ...............................................................................................7-20 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts.......................................................7-21 How to Find the Chart Type......................................................................................7-22 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually.........................................................7-22 7.19.1 How to insert update symbols ......................................................................7-23 7.19.2 How to delete update symbols .....................................................................7-24 7.19.3 How to modify existing update symbols .......................................................7-24 How to Synchronize Chart Data ...............................................................................7-25 7.20.1 How to select the units to synchronize .........................................................7-25 7.20.2 How to check synchronization status ...........................................................7-26 7.20.3 Manual updates and synchronization ...........................................................7-27 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts .........................................................................7-27 HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS .............................................................. 8-1 8.1 How to Browse Your Charts .......................................................................................8-1 8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects...................................................................8-1 8.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour ...........................................................................................8-1 8.2.2 Basic Setting menu ........................................................................................8-3 8.2.3 Chart Display menu ........................................................................................8-4 8.2.4 Display base ...................................................................................................8-5 8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features...........................................................8-5 8.3.1 General page..................................................................................................8-5 8.3.2 Tracking page.................................................................................................8-7 8.3.3 Route page .....................................................................................................8-8 8.3.4 Mariner page ..................................................................................................8-8 8.3.5 Targets page ..................................................................................................8-9 8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings ...................................................8-10 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS.......................................................................................9-1 9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts..........................................................................................9-1 9.1.1 Definitions of terms.........................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts ...........................................................................9-2 xi TABLE OF CONTENTS 9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts............................................................... 9-3 9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart ................................. 9-4 9.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2.2 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates .......................................... 9-4 9.2.3 How to set Display date and Approved until dates......................................... 9-5 9.2.4 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard................................. 9-5 9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts ................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features............................................ 9-6 9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart Objects .................................................... 9-7 9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) .......................................................................... 9-8 9.5.1 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-8 9.5.2 How to display the AIO................................................................................... 9-8 9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells ....................................................................................... 9-9 9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information........................................................ 9-9 9.5.5 How to select the information to display....................................................... 9-10 10. C-MAP CHARTS ..................................................................................................10-1 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 C-MAP Cartographic Service ................................................................................... 10-1 How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway....................................................... 10-1 How to Order Charts ................................................................................................ 10-1 How to Apply for Licenses........................................................................................ 10-1 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 10-2 Chart Subscription Services..................................................................................... 10-2 10.6.1 C-MAP services ........................................................................................... 10-2 10.6.2 What is ENC delivery? ................................................................................. 10-2 10.7 Chart Display............................................................................................................ 10-3 10.7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 10-3 10.8 Permanent Warnings ............................................................................................... 10-4 11. CHART ALERTS..................................................................................................11-1 11.1 Chart Alerts .............................................................................................................. 11-2 11.1.1 How to set safety contour............................................................................. 11-2 11.1.2 How to select objects used in chart alerts.................................................... 11-3 11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check ............................................................................ 11-4 11.3 Route Planning......................................................................................................... 11-5 11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning...................................................................... 11-5 11.4 Route Monitoring...................................................................................................... 11-7 12. ROUTES...............................................................................................................12-1 12.1 Route Planning Overview......................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning................................................................................. 12-2 12.3 How to Create a New Route .................................................................................... 12-2 12.3.1 How to use the Waypoints page .................................................................. 12-4 12.3.2 How to use the User Chart page.................................................................. 12-5 12.3.3 How to use the Optimize page ..................................................................... 12-6 12.3.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page ........................................................ 12-6 12.3.5 How to use the Check Results page ............................................................ 12-8 12.4 How to Modify an Existing Route ............................................................................. 12-8 12.4.1 How to change waypoint position................................................................. 12-8 12.4.2 How to change other waypoint data............................................................. 12-9 12.4.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route ........................................ 12-9 12.4.4 How to insert a waypoint .............................................................................. 12-9 12.4.5 How to delete a waypoint ............................................................................. 12-9 12.4.6 Geometry check of route............................................................................ 12-10 12.5 SAR Operations ..................................................................................................... 12-10 12.6 Route Bank ............................................................................................................ 12-13 xii TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.7 Route Optimization .................................................................................................12-14 12.7.1 Available route optimization strategies .......................................................12-14 12.7.2 How to optimize a route..............................................................................12-15 12.7.3 How to plan a speed profile ........................................................................12-16 12.8 How to Import Routes.............................................................................................12-17 12.8.1 How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data ......................12-17 12.8.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data ...........................................................12-17 12.8.3 How to import csv, ASCII format route data ...............................................12-18 12.9 How to Export Route Data......................................................................................12-18 12.9.1 How to export FAR-3xx0 route data ...........................................................12-18 12.9.2 How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format .........................12-19 12.10How to Delete Routes ............................................................................................12-19 12.11Reports ..................................................................................................................12-20 13. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................13-1 13.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................13-1 13.1.1 Objects of user charts ..................................................................................13-1 13.2 How to Create a User Chart .....................................................................................13-2 13.3 How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS FEA-2x07....................................13-6 13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart........................................................................13-7 13.4.1 How to edit objects on the chart area ...........................................................13-7 13.4.2 How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box .....................................13-7 13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart ................................................................13-7 13.6 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display .....................................................13-8 13.7 How to Delete User Charts.......................................................................................13-8 13.8 User Chart Reports...................................................................................................13-9 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES.............................................................................14-1 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 How to Start Route Monitoring .................................................................................14-1 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto) .........................................................14-3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display ......................................................14-3 How to View Waypoint Information...........................................................................14-4 How to View User Chart Information ........................................................................14-5 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route ................................................14-5 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route ................14-6 14.7.1 Safe off track mode ......................................................................................14-6 14.7.2 Back to track mode.......................................................................................14-7 14.7.3 Instant track messages ................................................................................14-8 14.7.4 Instant track details ......................................................................................14-9 14.7.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route ..............................14-10 14.7.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant track route (safe off track mode only) ...........................................................................14-11 14.7.7 Button label and equipment state ...............................................................14-12 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS .........................................................................................15-1 15.1 How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box ..................................15-1 15.2 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ...........................................................................................15-2 15.2.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines..............................................................15-2 15.2.2 PI line bearing reference ..............................................................................15-2 15.2.3 Number of PI lines to display........................................................................15-2 15.2.4 PI line mode .................................................................................................15-2 15.2.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ..........................................15-3 15.2.6 How to reset the PI lines ..............................................................................15-3 15.2.7 How to adjust PI line length ..........................................................................15-4 15.3 Check Area...............................................................................................................15-4 15.4 Ring ..........................................................................................................................15-5 xiii TABLE OF CONTENTS 15.5 Predictor................................................................................................................... 15-5 15.6 Anchor Watch........................................................................................................... 15-6 15.7 UKC (Under Keel Clearance)................................................................................... 15-7 15.7.1 UKC overview .............................................................................................. 15-7 15.7.2 How to set UKC............................................................................................ 15-7 15.7.3 UKC window................................................................................................. 15-8 15.8 Mini Conning Display ............................................................................................... 15-9 15.9 Divider .................................................................................................................... 15-10 15.9.1 How to use the divider................................................................................ 15-10 15.9.2 Usage characteristics, limitations............................................................... 15-11 15.9.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider .................................................... 15-11 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS.....................................................................................16-1 16.1 CCRS .......................................................................................................................16-1 16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors........................................................................... 16-2 16.2.1 Sensors menu description............................................................................ 16-2 16.3 Source of Position .................................................................................................... 16-6 16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship ....................................................... 16-7 16.5 Source of Navigation Data ....................................................................................... 16-8 16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication ........................................................................ 16-10 16.7 Filter Status ............................................................................................................ 16-10 16.8 Position Alignment ................................................................................................. 16-12 16.8.1 How to align position .................................................................................. 16-12 16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment............................................................... 16-13 16.9 Wind Sensor........................................................................................................... 16-13 16.10Depth Sensor......................................................................................................... 16-14 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES...................................................................17-1 17.1 AIS Safety Messages............................................................................................... 17-1 17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message ........................................................... 17-1 17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages.............................. 17-2 17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages ............................... 17-3 17.2 Navtex Messages..................................................................................................... 17-3 17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages................................................................ 17-3 17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages ................................................... 17-4 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS.......................................................................................18-1 18.1 TT Display ................................................................................................................ 18-1 18.1.1 TT symbols................................................................................................... 18-1 18.1.2 TT symbol color and size ............................................................................. 18-1 18.1.3 How to display tracked target data............................................................... 18-2 18.1.4 Past position point attributes ........................................................................ 18-3 18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................ 18-3 18.1.6 TT recording functions ................................................................................. 18-3 18.2 AIS Display............................................................................................................... 18-4 18.2.1 AIS symbols ................................................................................................. 18-4 18.2.2 Voyage data ................................................................................................. 18-4 18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets ............................................................................... 18-5 18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets............... 18-5 18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets ................................................................ 18-6 18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter............................................................... 18-6 18.2.7 How to display AIS target data..................................................................... 18-7 18.2.8 How to display own ship data....................................................................... 18-9 18.3 Association............................................................................................................... 18-9 18.3.1 How to select association method................................................................ 18-9 18.3.2 How to set the conditions for association................................................... 18-10 xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS .................................................................................19-1 19.1 How to Record User, Position Events ......................................................................19-1 19.1.1 User events ..................................................................................................19-1 19.1.2 Position events .............................................................................................19-2 19.2 Details Log................................................................................................................19-5 19.3 Voyage Log ..............................................................................................................19-6 19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging...................................................................19-8 19.4 Chart Usage Log ......................................................................................................19-8 19.5 Danger Targets Log................................................................................................19-10 19.5.1 How to set the conditions for logging danger targets .................................19-11 20. ALERTS ............................................................................................................... 20-1 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 What is an Alert? ......................................................................................................20-1 Alert Box ...................................................................................................................20-2 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Alarm or Warning ............................20-5 How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning ..............................................................20-5 Alert List....................................................................................................................20-6 Alert Log ...................................................................................................................20-7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors ................................................................20-8 List of Alerts..............................................................................................................20-8 21. PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................21-1 21.1 Ship and Route Parameters .....................................................................................21-1 21.2 Instant Track Parameters .........................................................................................21-2 21.3 Cost Parameters.......................................................................................................21-3 22. SETTINGS MENU................................................................................................22-1 22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu............................................................................22-1 22.2 File Export ................................................................................................................22-2 22.3 File Import.................................................................................................................22-3 22.4 File Maintenance ......................................................................................................22-4 22.5 Self Test ...................................................................................................................22-5 22.6 Data Sharing.............................................................................................................22-6 22.7 Customize.................................................................................................................22-7 22.8 Display Test..............................................................................................................22-8 22.9 Keyboard Test ..........................................................................................................22-9 22.10Screenshots ...........................................................................................................22-11 22.10.1How to export screenshots .........................................................................22-12 22.10.2How to delete screenshots .........................................................................22-12 22.11User Default ...........................................................................................................22-13 22.12CCRP.....................................................................................................................22-14 23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM......................................................................23-1 23.1 Installation of the System .........................................................................................23-1 23.2 Accuracy of the System............................................................................................23-1 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................24-1 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.6 24.7 24.8 Maintenance .............................................................................................................24-2 How to Replace the Fuses .......................................................................................24-3 Trackball Maintenance .............................................................................................24-4 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit...........................................................24-4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................24-5 Consumable Parts ....................................................................................................24-7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts..................................................................24-8 Fallback Arrangements.............................................................................................24-9 xv TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS ...........................................................AP-9 APPENDIX 3 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-22 SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................SP-1 INDEX.......................................................................................................................... IN-1 xvi FOREWORD Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-3xx0 Series Marine Radar. We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability. Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers. This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance. Features This radar series meets the requirements of IEC 62388 (Marine navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems - Shipborne radar - Performance requirements, method of testing and required test results) and IMO MSC.192(79), IMO Resolution A.817(19), and IEC 61174. This radar displays radar targets, electronic charts, nav lines, Tracked Target (TT) data, AIS targets and other navigation data on a display. The main features of this series are • The FAR-3xx0 series consists of the following models and configurations: Magnetron radar Model FAR-3210 FAR-3210-BB FAR-3310 FAR-3220 FAR-3220-BB FAR-3320 FAR-3320W FAR-3220W-BB FAR-3230S FAR-3230S-BB FAR-3330S FAR-3330SW FAR-3230SW-BB Frequency band X-band S-band Size of monitor unit* 19.0” Local supply 23.1” 19.0” Local supply 23.1” 23.1” Local supply 19.0” Local supply 23.1” 23.1” Local supply Output power 12 kW 12 kW 12 kW 25 kW 25 kW 25 kW 25 kW 25 kW 30 kW 30 kW 30 kW 30 kW 30 kW Transceiver location Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Transceiver unit Transceiver unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit Transceiver unit Transceiver unit Solid state radar Model Frequency band FAR-3230S-SSD FAR-3330S-SSD FAR-3230S-SSD-BB S-band Size of monitor unit* 19.0” 23.1” Local supply Output power 250 W 250 W 250 W Transceiver location Antenna unit Antenna unit Antenna unit *: Viewing distance: 1020 mm xvii FOREWORD • New HMI (Human Machine Interface) gives improved operability. • Accepts SXGA, UXGA video inputs. • SOLAS category 1 compatible display (23.1”), SOLAS category 2 compatible display (19.0”). • Radar, chart and chart radar modes. (The chart radar mode does not meet the criteria for navigation aid for Japanese flag vessels as defined by Japanese law.) • Many warning features to support safer and more efficient navigation. • Grounding warnings, safe depth contours. • Chart database loaded and updated using CD-ROMs. • Tracked Target (TT) data and AIS data to aid in collision avoidance. • AIS messaging. • Route created in chart mode can be displayed on the radar. • Route planning and route monitoring facilities in the chart mode. Signal Processing Functions This radar has the signal processing functions described in the table below. All signal processing functions are set with the picture preset feature. Signal processing function Interference rejector Echo stretch Echo averaging Automatic clutter elimination Noise rejector Description Section Suppress interference transmitted by other radars. Inter2.7 ference received simultaneously from many radars can be difficult to reduce. Enlarge target echoes, especially small echoes. Sup2.8 press interference, sea clutter and rain clutter before using echo stretch, to prevent the enlargement of unwanted echoes. 2.9 The radar samples echoes with each scan. Targets that show a large change with each scan are judged as clutter and are reduced to display only echoes from legitimate targets. Discriminate the clutter from the radar echo then reduce 2.10 the clutter automatically. 2.11 Reduce the white noise then improves the on-screen S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for the received echoes in the range direction. Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen or the range resolution may worsen. Standards Used in this Manual • Three types of Control Units are available: Radar Control Unit RCU-025 (radar controls with trackball module), ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 (alphabet keyboard, controls, trackball module) and Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (trackball module only). Unless noted otherwise, “Control Unit” refers to the RCU-025. • The system can be operated with the controls of the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit or a trackball module. The descriptions in this manual use the trackball module. • Unless noted otherwise, "click" means to push the left button on a trackball module. • The keys and controls of the Radar Control Unit are shown in bold face; for example, the ENTER key. xviii FOREWORD • The buttons on the InstantAccess bar, Status bar and menu items are shown in brackets; for example, the [TUNE] button. • Context-sensitive menus are available with many buttons, and boxes and objects. Right-click an item to display the related context-sensitive menu. • This radar is available in three types of specifications: IMO, A, or B. This manual provides the descriptions for the B type, of which some functions are not available with the IMO or A type. See the menu tree in Appendix 1 for function availability. • “C-MAP” means “C-MAP by Jeppesen”. • The display colors mentioned in this manual are those with the color palette setting “Day-Gray”. Program Number Please access the following URL if you need software information: http://www.furuno.com/en/business_product/merchant/product/chartradar/software.html System Program no. Antenna unit SPU 0359281 SPU 0359286 MTR-DRV 0359293 PM 0359296 RF-Converter 0359302 Power supply unit PSU-Control 0359299 Processor Unit: EC-3000 Main 0359266 Version no. 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx 01.xx Remarks For magnetron radar For solid state radar For solid state radar 01.xx 02.xx xx: Minor change Virus Prevention This equipment is not equipped with a virus checker. This equipment operates in real time; therefore, having a virus checker that periodically checks the equipment for viruses would increase the processing load, which can affect operation. However, you can avoid viruses by following the instructions in this section. When you update a chart The PC and medium (USB flash memory, etc.) used to download and store an update for an existing chart or a new chart may be infected with a virus. Check the PC and the medium for viruses with a commercial virus checker - BEFORE you connect them to the ECDIS. Be sure the virus checker contains the latest virus definition files. Network connection The ECDIS receives and displays information from various navigation equipment and radar via a LAN. A PC and other equipment connected to a network can carry viruses. To prevent the introduction of a virus to the LAN, DO NOT connect the ECDIS or HUB to an external network, including other shipboard LAN. Do not install 3rd party programs in the ECDIS Programs installed via an external network can carry viruses that can cause the ECDIS to malfunction. Do not install any Windows® software. xix FOREWORD Open Source Software This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), BSD, Apache, MIT and others. The program(s) is/are free software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GPL or LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation. Please access to the following URL if you need source codes: https://www.furuno.co.jp/cgi/cnt_oss_e01.cgi This product uses the software module that was developed by the Independent JPEG Group. Reverse engineering Reverse engineering (reverse assemble, reverse compiler) of the software of this equipment is prohibited. xx SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS NOTICE The radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors: Gyrocompass meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI). EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73). SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72). The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing units having approved LAN ports. Basic configuration is shown with solid line. FAR-3210/FAR-3220/FAR-3310/FAR-3320/FAR-3210-BB/FAR-3220-BB ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-32A) XN12CF-RSB-128 XN20CF-RSB-128 XN24CF-RSB-128 TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-105 (12 kW) RTR-106 (25 kW) Junction box*6 RJB-001 Sub display Junction box*6 RJB-001 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) PSU-014 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 100-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer RU-1803 LAN Serial Sensor Adapter*4 or Switching HUB HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Select one Serial 1, 2 IEC 61162-2 (Gyrocompass*1, AIS) Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Monitor Unit MU-190*3 MU-231*3 Digital In (ACK IN) VDR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Serial 3 - 7 IEC 61162-1 (EPFS*2 (Navigator), SDME (Speed Log), Echo Sounder, Wind, Alarm*5, Navtex, etc.) Digital Out 1 - 6*5 1: System Fail 2: Power Fail 3: Normal Close 1 4: Normal Close 2 5: Normal Open 1 6: Normal Open 2 *: See the notes on page xxvi. xxi SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS FAR-3320W/FAR-3220W-BB ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-32A) XN20CF-RSB-130 XN24CF-RSB-130 Waveguide TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-108 Sub display Antenna Cable 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) PSU-014 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 100-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer RU-1803 LAN Serial Sensor Adapter*4 or Switching HUB HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Select one Serial 1, 2 IEC 61162-2 (Gyrocompass*1, AIS) Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Monitor Unit MU-231*3 Digital In (ACK IN) VDR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Serial 3 - 7 IEC 61162-1 (EPFS*2 (Navigator), SDME (Speed Log), Echo Sounder, Wind, Alarm*5, Navtex, etc.) Digital Out 1 - 6*5 1: System Fail 2: Power Fail 3: Normal Close 1 4: Normal Close 2 5: Normal Open 1 6: Normal Open 2 *: See the notes on page xxvi. xxii SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS FAR-3230S/FAR-3330S/FAR-3230S-BB ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-52A) SN36CF-RSB-129 TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-107 Sub display Antenna Cable 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) PSU-014 or PSU-015 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 100-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer RU-1803 LAN Serial Sensor Adapter*4 or Switching HUB HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Select one Serial 1, 2 IEC 61162-2 (Gyrocompass*1, AIS) Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Monitor Unit MU-190*3 MU-231*3 Digital In (ACK IN) VDR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Serial 3 - 7 IEC 61162-1 (EPFS*2 (Navigator), SDME (Speed Log), Echo Sounder, Wind, Alarm*5, Navtex, etc.) Digital Out 1 - 6*5 1: System Fail 2: Power Fail 3: Normal Close 1 4: Normal Close 2 5: Normal Open 1 6: Normal Open 2 *: See the notes on page xxvi. xxiii SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS FAR-3330SW/FAR-3230SW-BB ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-52A) SN36CF-RSB-131 Coaxial cable TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-109 Sub display Antenna Cable 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) PSU-014 or PSU-015 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 100-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer RU-1803 LAN Serial Sensor Adapter*4 or Switching HUB HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Select one Serial 1, 2 IEC 61162-2 (Gyrocompass*1, AIS) Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Monitor Unit MU-231*3 Digital In (ACK IN) VDR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT Serial 3 - 7 IEC 61162-1 (EPFS*2 (Navigator), SDME (Speed Log), Echo Sounder, Wind, Alarm*5 Navtex, etc.) Digital Out 1 - 6*5 1: System Fail 2: Power Fail 3: Normal Close 1 4: Normal Close 2 5: Normal Open 1 6: Normal Open 2 *: See the notes on page xxvi. xxiv SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS FAR-3230S-SSD/FAR-3330S-SSD/FAR-3230S-SSD-BB ANTENNA UNIT (w/Performance Monitor PM-52B) SN36CF-RSB-133 TRANSCEIVER UNIT RTR-111 Sub display Antenna Cable 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz (for de-icer) PSU-016 or PSU-018 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 100-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz 440 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Transformer RU-1803 LAN Serial Sensor Adapter*4 or Switching HUB HUB-100 100-115/220-230 VAC 1ø, 50-60 Hz Select one Serial 1, 2 IEC 61162-2 (Gyrocompass*1, AIS) Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Select one ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 Monitor Unit MU-190*3 MU-231*3 Digital In (ACK IN) VDR Intelligent Hub HUB-3000 EC-3000 PROCESSOR UNIT 3 Serial 3 - 7 IEC 61162-1 (EPFS*2 (Navigator), SDME (Speed Log), Echo Sounder, Wind, Alarm*5, Navtex, etc.) Digital Out 1 - 6*5 1: System Fail 2: Power Fail 3: Normal Close 1 4: Normal Close 2 5: Normal Open 1 6: Normal Open 2 *: See the notes on page xxvi. xxv SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Category of units Antenna units: Exposed to the weather Other units: Protected from the weather Notes 1. The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/ or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update rate that is adequate for the ship’s rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz (HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel). 2. The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.96(72). 3. These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190 for CAT 2C and CAT 2HC, MU-231 for CAT 1C and CAT 1HC. If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its effective diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements: • CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher • CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see its manuals. For BB type, a monitor unit is prepared by user. 4. The sensor adapters are Control Serial MC-3000S, Analog IN MC-3010A, Digital IN MC-3020D and Digital OUT MC-3030D. 5. Characteristics of contact output for Alarm: • (Load current) 250 mA • (Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports • Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1. 6. Junction boxes are required for antenna cable length greater than 100 m. Max. cable length is 400 m. xxvi 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.1 Units of the System 1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 The Radar Control Unit RCU-025 consists of various controls and a trackball module (trackball, scrollwheel and left and right buttons). The trackball module functions like a PC mouse. The user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions. Navigation tool 3 Radar signal processing Display control Radar system 4 5 10 Navigation tool 2 28 37 1 11 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 31 20 21 22 23 32 33 24 25 26 27 29 34 35 Alert 7 6 Menu control Range Target 36 When you press the correct key, a single beep sounds to alert you to correct operation. For wrong operation, several beeps sound. You can select the loudness of the beep or deactivate the beep on the [Customize] menu. No. 1 Control 2 Status LED 3 4 Rotary control, EBL1, EBL2 Description Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on or off with this switch.) The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. Green, lighting: Normal operation status; no alerts generated. Green, flashing: The heater on the CPU board is on, because ambient temperature is not at least 0°C. The heater takes about two minutes to warm the equipment. The LED lights green after the heater goes off. Red, lighting: Acknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL. SYSTEM FAIL occurs when there is trouble in the Processor Unit or communication failure between the Processor Unit and a Control Unit. Each Control Unit detects trouble and its lamp flashes in red and the buzzer sounds. If this condition occurs at the No. 1 Control Unit, the SYSTEM FAIL signal is output. Red, flashing: Unacknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL. Rotary control: Adjusts the active EBL. EBL1, EBL2: Activates or deactivates the respective EBL. 1-1 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 5 Control ALARM ACK 6 7 InstantAccess knob ESC 8 BRILL 9 A/C RAIN 10 A/C SEA 11 12 GAIN HL OFF 13 EBL OFFSET 14 MODE 15 16 STBY/TX OFF CENTER 17 CU/TM RESET 18 INDEX LINE 19 20 MENU VECTOR TIME 21 VECTOR MODE 22 TARGET LIST 23 24 CANCEL TRAIL 1-2 Description • Acknowledges unacknowledged alert. • Silences the audio alarm. Selects the buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Goes back one step in current operating sequence on the InstantAccess bar. Rotate: Adjusts the brilliance of the display (FURUNO-supplied monitor only). Push: Selects a color palette. Rotate: Suppresses rain clutter. Push: Toggles between manual and automatic rain clutter adjustment. Rotate: Suppresses sea clutter. Push: Toggles between manual and automatic sea clutter adjustment. Adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver. • Temporarily erases everything except radar echoes when pressed and held down. • Enters the numeric 1. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Activates or deactivates the offset EBL. • Enters the numeric 2. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Selects a presentation mode. • Enters the numeric 3. • Selects like-numbered menu item. Toggles the radar between standby and TX. • Puts sweep origin at the cursor location. • Enters the numeric 4. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Course-up: Resets heading line to 000°. • True motion: Moves own ship position 75% of the radius in stern direction. • Enters the numeric 5. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Selects an index line (in the PI line box). • Long-press to activate or deactivate selected index line. • Enters the numeric 6. • Selects like-numbered menu item. Opens, closes the menu. • Sets the vector time (length) for TT and AIS targets. • Enters the numeric 7. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Sets the vector mode (relative, true) for TT and AIS targets. • Enters the numeric 8. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Displays AIS, TT data in the target list. • Enters the numeric 9. • Selects like-numbered menu item. Cancels the changes made on the currently selected menu. • Goes back one page in the menu. • Moves cursor leftward in text box. • Turns the echo trail display on or off. • Long-press to reset all trails. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 25 Control PANEL 26 MARK 27 28 29 30 31 ENTER Rotary control, VRM1, VRM2 UNDO VIEW/HIDE 32 RANGE 33 ACQ/ACT 34 TARGET DATA 35 TARGET CANCEL 36 Trackball module USB port 37 Description • Adjusts the backlighting of the keys. • Enters the numeric 0. • Selects like-numbered menu item. • Goes forward one page in the menu. • Moves cursor rightward in text box. • Inputs selected mark on the radar screen, at the position selected. Confirms selection on menu. Rotary control: Adjusts the diameter of the active VRM. VRM1, VRM2: Activates or deactivates the respective VRM. Undoes edit or text input when creating a radar map, route, user chart. Radar mode, chart radar mode: Shows or hides the AZ box, Drop mark boxes, Mark box, PI line box, Trial box. Chart mode: Shows or hides the EBLs, InstantAccess bar, [Overlay/NAV Tools] box, [Route information] box, VRMs. Selects radar range (radar and chart radar modes), chart scale (chart mode). • TT: Acquires cursor-selected target, for target tracking. • AIS: Activates cursor-selected sleeping AIS target. Displays the detailed data for selected TT, AIS target, in the TT/AIS information box. • TT: Stops tracking cursor-selected tracked target. • AIS: Sleeps cursor-selected activated AIS target. • Long-press to erase all displayed TT target data. The trackball module is the same as that used in the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026. See the description in the next section. For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PUDRV10) is for chart updates. 1-3 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 The Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 has a power switch, a trackball module (trackball, scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons), a status LED, and a USB port. The trackball module functions like a PC mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions. 1 3 4 2 7 5 6 No. Control Description 1 Power switch Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO monitor unit, the monitor is also turned on or off with this switch.) 2 Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. See the Status LED description on page 1-1. 3 Left button • Does the operation related to the object selected. • Confirms the operation done for the object selected. 4 Scrollwheel • Selects menu options. • Selects chart scale. • Sets numeric data. (The scrollwheel does not have a "push" function.) 5 Right button • Displays context-sensitive menu when the cursor is put in the display area. • Cancels operation done on the object selected. 6 Trackball • Moves the cursor. • Selects an object. 7 USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. 1-4 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000 The Processor Unit is the heart of the chart system, and is mainly responsible for the chart management, route planning and route navigation. The Processor Unit has two power switches. The Mains switch controls the power from the switchboard, and the Power switch controls the power to the chart radar system. DVD drive Mains switch Power switch Note 1: Do not operate the chart radar with a DVD or CD inserted in the DVD drive, to prevent damage to the drive and media. Remove media from the drive after usage. Insert media only to update charts. After completion of an update, remove the media from its drive and store it in its case. Store media out of direct sunlight, in a place where temperature and humidity are moderate and stable. Note 2: To keep the system stable, restart the unit at least once every two weeks. Note 3: Close the lid of the DVD drive when the drive is not in use. 1.2 How to Turn the System On/Off Normally, leave the power switches at the front of the Processor Unit on and control the power with the power switch on a Control Unit (RCU-025, RCU-026). The monitor unit is powered independently. How to power the system Push the mains switch on the Processor Unit for the "I" position. Turn on the power switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. The start-up display appears on the monitor. After the power is applied, the program starts up and about one minute later the bearing scale appears. The radar then goes into three minutes of warm-up time to warm the magnetron, which transmits radar pulses. The timer at the center of the screen counts the time remaining for warm-up. When the timer shows 0:00, the indication "ST-BY" appears at the screen center. The radar is now ready to transmit radar pulses. In the stand-by condition, no radar pulses are transmitted and TT nor AIS is active. The settings on the menus are stored in a non-volatile memory (hard disk) and are preserved when the power is turned off. Note 1: The solid state radar does not have a magnetron, therefore it has no warming period. 1-5 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Note 2: If the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) when the power is applied, nothing appears on the display and the Status LED on the Control Unit flashes. This is because the heater is warming the unit. The display appears in approx. two minutes. How to power off the system Press the power switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. Push the Mains switch for the "O" position. Note: Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron) still warm, you can put the radar in transmit state without three minutes of warm-up. If the Power switch was turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to restart the radar promptly, turn on the Power switch not later than 10 seconds after power-off. 1.3 How to Select a Color Palette This radar provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette), day, dusk and night, to match any ambient lighting condition. The default specifications of each palette are as shown in the table below. The panel dimmer setting is automatically changed, and the number of steps depends on the color palette selected. Palette Day-gray Day-blue Dusk-gray Dusk-blue Night-gray Night-blue Brilliance MU-190 MU-231 86 88 86 88 77 79 77 79 53 53 53 53 To select a palette, do the following: 1. Click the [Palette] button. [Palette] button 1-6 Panel dimmer (step) 15 15 7 7 3 3 Text color White White Light gray Light gray Orange Light gray Background color Gray Blue Dark gray Dark blue Dark gray Dark blue 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 2. Click [Day], [Dusk] or [Night] as appropriate. For example, select [Day] to show its options. 3. Click the palette (gray, blue) desired. Note: A palette can also be selected by pushing the BRILL control on the Control Unit. 1.4 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance (FURUNO monitor) The brilliance setting is defined according to the color palette setting (see section 1.3). However, manual adjustment of the brilliance is also possible. Note 1: The brilliance of the FURUNO monitor can only be adjusted from the Control Unit. Use a serial cable for brilliance adjustment to make the connection between the Processor Unit and the Control Unit. Note 2: Improper brilliance may affect the visibility of information, especially on the night display. How to adjust the brilliance manually with the BRILL control Operate the BRILL control to adjust brilliance. Turn it clockwise to increase the brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease the brilliance. Watch the brilliance level indication on the [BRILL] button (see the illustration below) to see the current brilliance level. How to adjust the brilliance manually with the InstantAccess knob 1. Push the InstantAccess knob. 2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the brilliance adjustment window. Current brilliance level [BRILL] button [CALIB] button 86 Calibration state CALIB: Default setting UNCALIB: Manual setting 3. Push the knob, rotate the knob to set the brilliance then push the knob to confirm the setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB". 4. To restore the default setting, rotate the knob to select the [CALIB] button then push the knob. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB". 1-7 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to adjust the brilliance manually using the trackball module 1. Click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the brilliance adjustment window. 2. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor on a location within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor on the end of the slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button. 3. Release the left button to confirm setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB". 4. To restore the default setting, click the [CALIB] button. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB". 1.5 Operating Modes This chart radar has the following operating modes: • [RADAR]: - The radar mode provides the traditional radar display. - The chart radar mode overlays the electronic chart on the radar image. • [CHART for RADAR]: The chart mode shows the electronic charts. 1.5.1 How to select an operating mode Click the [Operating Mode] button to select desired mode from the pull-down list. Select [RADAR] for the radar or chart radar mode or [CHART for RADAR] for the chart mode. [Operating Mode] button RADAR RADAR CHART for RADAR 1.5.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode The presentation mode for the chart radar mode can be course-up RM, north-up RM, or north-up TM. The presentation mode is automatically switched to north-up RM if the mode is head-up at the time the chart radar mode is selected. 1-8 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.6 Display Screens All display screens have operational buttons, boxes and indications, and display markers. Click a button or indication to execute the related operation. Context-sensitive menus are available with several boxes and objects. Right-click the appropriate box or object to show the related context-sensitive menu. Monitor viewing distance The optimal viewing distance for the FURUNO-supplied monitors is 1020 mm. 1.6.1 Radar display The illustration below shows the markers, data, etc. as they appear on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit. The layout for the 23-inch monitor unit is partially different - the button appears on the bottom of the InstantAccess bar. Indication area 1 6 * 2 22 21 23 20 19 24 3 25 28 26 ACE OFF NAV data Route 1 0 10 20 27 -30 29 30 40 50 -10 min m -20 N 35 W S Depth : 22.5 m Water TEMP : 10.5°C REL : Wind : E Route 2 4 006.3°R 12.1 m/s Current : 121.3°R 1.7 kn 18 32 30 31 33 17 10 16 15 11 5 34 12 6 7 14 9 13 *: For solid state radar, No. 1 Name Status bar • • • • TX CH 1 8 TX CH 2 Description Selects an antenna. Selects the operating mode. Adjusts the radar picture. Displays radar operational messages. See section 1.7. 1-9 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 2 Name Sensor information, datum box Description Shows your ship's heading, heading source, ship's speed, water tracking speed, speed source, course over ground, speed over ground, course and speed source, ship's position, position source, chart datum. Note: Position source shall meet the requirements of IMO MSC.112(73). 3 4 5 6 7 Menu Information box TT/AIS setting box Trail box Alert box 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Acquisition zone box VRM boxes Target list button Trial maneuver box Drop mark 2 box EBL boxes Mark box Drop mark1 box PI line box 17 Watch box 18 InstantAccess bar 19 20 21 Tuning bar Range/Presentation mode box REF point box 22 23 24 Heading line Bearing scale Cursor position box Drop-down menu with various radar and chart functions. Provides various navigation data and route information. Sets the parameters for TT and AIS targets. Sets the parameters for the target trails. Shows alert messages by alert name and alert number. • Unacknowledged or regenerated alerts flash in red (alarm) or yellow-orange (warning). • Acknowledged alerts are shown in normal video. Sets an acquisition zone for TT, AIS. Shows the range and TTG to the VRM1, VRM2. Displays the TT and AIS target list. Sets the parameters for the trial maneuver. Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 2. Shows the bearing to the EBL1, EBL2. Selects the mark to inscribe on the radar display. Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 1. • Adjusts the direction and width of the parallel index lines. • Activates or deactivates the parallel index lines. Counts down the time remaining until the buzzer sounds to alert the operator to view the radar picture. Quick access to often-used radar, chart radar and chart functions. For radar and chart radar functions, see section 1.8. For chart functions, see paragraph 6.1.3. Shows tuning status. (No function with solid state radar.) • Selects the radar range. • Selects the presentation mode. Selects the reference point (antenna or CCRP) for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (position, etc.) Indicates ship's heading. The bearing scale provides an estimate of the bearing to a target. This box shows • Latitude and longitude of the cursor position. • Range and bearing to the cursor position. • TTG to the cursor position. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 EBL1 EBL2 VRM1 VRM2 Drop mark 1 Drop mark 2 Antenna marker Own ship marker Stern marker North marker Range rings 1-10 Measures the bearing to a target. Measures the range to a target. Finds the range and bearing to drop mark position. A cross marks antenna position. An inverted “T” marks your ship’s position. Marks location of stern. Marks North. Provide an estimate of the range to a target. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW How to minimize, maximize the boxes at the bottom of the screen The boxes at the bottom of the screen that contain an arrow can be minimized. Click the arrow to minimize the box. To restore maximum size, click the minimized box. Click arrow to minimize. Click here to maximize. Example: Mark box Note: The respective VRM or EBL is erased from the screen when the corresponding VRM or EBL box is minimized. 1.6.2 Chart radar display The chart radar display overlays an electronic chart on the radar picture. To switch between the radar and chart radar displays, click the [Chart ON/OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar. ACE OFF Click to hide, show chart. 1-11 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.6.3 Chart display The chart display shows only the electronic chart. Click the [Operating Mode] button to select [CHART for RADAR] to activate this display. See chapter 6 for a description of the chart display. Select [CHART for RADAR]. CHART for RADAR 0.5NM 4min AUTO ACT FILT 1-12 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.7 Status Bar The Status bar is displayed at the top of screen in all modes. This bar provides, in the radar and chart radar modes, buttons for selection of the mode, antenna and chart database, and adjustment of the radar picture. For a description of the Status bar used in the chart mode, see paragraph 6.1.2. 1.7.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode 2 3 1 No. 1 2 3 4 5 Button name Operating Mode STBY TX Antenna Customize Echo Chart database 6 7 8 9 RAIN* SEA* GAIN 10 Date 11 12 Time 6 4 Settings Working Indicator 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 Description Selects a mode: RADAR or CHART for RADAR. Toggles the radar between stand-by and transmit. Selects an antenna. Presets the radar controls for specific navigation purpose; for example, congested waters. Selects the IMO chart database (base, primary, standard or all). Available in the chart radar mode. Reduces rain clutter. Reduces sea clutter. Adjusts the gain of the radar receiver. Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu. • Displays the date. • Selects the time to use, local or UTC. • Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time). Displays the time, local or UTC. Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. Picture freeze If the picture freezes, the picture is not updated. After the picture freezes, the buzzer sounds and the Status LED blinks in red. Reset the power to restore normal operation. *: The indication is grayed out when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is [ON]. 1-13 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.7.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar The Status bar has three types of controls: toggle button, drop-down list button and slider bar. You operate the buttons and bars with the trackball module. Control type Toggle button A toggle button alternately selects one of two functions assigned to a button. For example, the [STBY TX] button toggles the radar between stand-by and TX. The background color of the [STBY TX] button momentarily changes to lightblue when switching from stand-by to TX. Drop-down list button A drop-down list button provides a list from which to select an option related to the label on the button. A drop-down list button is identified by a triangle on the button’s bottom-right corner. The [Chart database] button, shown in the right figure, is an example of a drop-down list button. Slider bar The slider bars provide for adjustment of the radar picture. [RAIN], [SEA] and [GAIN] are slider bar buttons. To adjust the bar coarsely, put the cursor at any location within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button. Release the button to finish. 1-14 Example of control STBY TX Click button to show drop-down list. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.8 InstantAccess Bar The InstantAccess bar runs vertically along the left edge of the screen and is displayed always. This bar provides, in the radar and chart radar modes, buttons for adjustment of the radar picture and chart, AIS operations, display brilliance control (FURUNO monitor only), MOB, screenshot, etc. For a description of the InstantAccess bar used in the chart mode, see paragraph 6.1.3. *1: For solid state radar, [TX CH] icon is displayed instead of [TUNE]. *2: This button is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit. PULSE M3 PULSE M3 TUNE MAN TUNE MAN 3 IR OFF IR OFF 4 ES OFF ES OFF 5 EAV OFF EAV OFF 6 ACE OFF ACE OFF 7 HL OFF HL OFF 8 CU/TM reset CU/TM reset 9 MAP ON MAP OFF 10 Chart OFF Chart ON 1 2 *1 Chart Disp 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 * 2 11 Chart Disp OWN AIS OWN AIS AIS AIS Day Day 88 88 MOB MOB Radar mode, map ON Radar mode, chart ON 1-15 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. Button name Description 1 PULSE Selects the radar pulse length. 2 TUNE Selects the radar receiver tuning method, automatic or manual, and manually tunes the radar receiver. TX CH Selects the transmit frequency from [TX CH 1] or [TX CH 2]. 3 IR Activates or deactivates the interference rejector. 4 ES Activates or deactivates the echo stretch. 5 EAV Activates or deactivates the echo averaging when Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is off. 6 ACE Activates or deactivates the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function. Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) automatically sets the gain, rain and sea clutter controls according to the sea and rain clutter states. 7 HL OFF Temporarily erases everything but radar echoes. 8 CU/TM reset • Puts the ship’s heading at the top of the screen in course-up mode the moment this button is pressed. • Resets the ship's position to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center in true motion modes. 9 MAP ON/OFF Shows or hides the radar map marks on the radar display, in the radar mode. 10 CHART ON/OFF Shows or hides the electronic chart. 11 Chart Disp Shows or hides various chart objects. Shown in the chart radar mode. See paragraph 2.41.2. 12 OWN AIS Shows the [VOYAGE DATA] menu, to set your ship’s AIS data. 13 AIS message Displays screen for “received AIS messages”. 14 Palette Selects a color palette. 15 BRILL Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO monitor. 16 MOB Enters a MOB mark at the current position. 17 Capture Takes a screenshot. 18 UNDO Restores previous condition in radar map and text input. 1-16 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.8.1 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar has three types of controls: toggle button, drop-down list button and slider bar. (The MOB and Capture buttons are special buttons.) You operate the buttons and bars with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you how to use the InstantAccess knob. Toggle button Drop-down list button A drop-down list button provides a list from which to select an option related to the label on the button. A dropdown list button is identified by a triangle on the button’s bottom-right corner. Slider bar [Palette] button Palette list 1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar. 2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the button selected is light-blue. 3. Do one of the following depending on button type. 1) Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting. 2) Drop-down list button or slider bar: Push the knob then rotate the knob to select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection. Note: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating sequence. 1-17 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.9 Sensor Information, Datum Box Sensor information, datum box displays the sensor data and the name of the datum in use. The sensor indications and names are colored according to sensor state. See the table below. • HDG: Heading and its source. • SPD: Longitudinal speed and its source. The direction of transverse speed is indicated with arrows, , Starboard, , Port. • COG: Course over ground and its source. • SOG: Speed over ground and its source. • POSN: Latitude and longitude position of own ship and its source. Note: The position source shall meet • Datum: Chart datum (WGS84, WGS72, the requirements of IMO MSC.112(73). etc.) in use. No datum appears when there is no datum sentence. Color of nav data indications and sensor name The color of the nav data indications and sensor names changes according to the state of the sensor data. The table shown below provides basic indication and color meanings. For detailed information, see Appendix 3. When no sensor data is received, the sensor source indication is blank and the related indication shows asterisks. Nav data indication 12.5kn GPS1 286.0°T 13.1kn GPS1 0.3kn GPS1 1-18 Color of nav data indication Green Color of sensor name White Yellow White Validity of data is low or offset is applied. Yellow-orange Yellow-orange Data is invalid. Green, data shown with asterisks (***.*) No display Data is not being received. Yellow Yellow Data is input manually (manual heading, gyro correction, manual speed, dead reckoning). State Sensor is normal. 30°00.0000'N 020°00.0000'E 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.10 Menu Overview The menu consists of eight main menus and several sub menus. You can operate the menu with the Radar Control Unit or trackball module. The system closes open menus whenever there is no menu operation for 30 seconds. 1.10.1 Basic menu operation 1. Open the main menu. Control Unit: Press the MENU key. Trackball module: Click the menu title bar at the right side of the display. Menu title bar 2. Select a menu. Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. For example, press the 3 key to show the [NAV TOOL] menu. Trackball module: Click the menu desired. The current selection is highlighted in blue. Click [3 NAV TOOL] or press the 3 key. 3. Select a menu item. Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. Trackball module: Click the menu item desired. The current selection is highlighted in blue. 4. Select a menu option. Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. The current selection is highlighted in orange. Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel. The current selection is highlighted in orange. 5. Confirm your selection. Control Unit: Press the ENTER key. Trackball module: Push the left button. Note: Hereafter, "select" in a menu operating procedure means to press the applicable numeric key on the Control Unit or push the left button on the trackball module. 1-19 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Keys, buttons to use in menus Control Unit MENU key: Open main menu, or close menu. CANCEL key: Go back one layer in menu, or close menu when main menu is displayed. ←key: Return to main menu, in no. 2 layer or higher. Trackball module Right button: Go back one layer, or close menu when main menu is displayed. Left button: (1) Click menu title bar to go back one layer, or close menu when main menu is displayed, (2) Click the left arrow on the menu title bar to return to the main menu, in no.2 layer or higher. 1.10.2 Menu history feature This chart radar remembers the 10 last-used menus to help you go to recently used menus quickly. The memorized menus are cleared when the power is turned off. Installation- and service-related menus and menus where no operation occurred are not memorized. Menus accessed multiple times are counted as one menu. Click the memory history buttons on the menu title bar to navigate through the lastused menus. Menu history buttons History back button History forward button For example, the last two used menus are [NAV TOOL] and [AIS]. Click Click Memorized menu no. 1 Memorized menu no. 2 1-20 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.10.3 How to enter numeric data Select the numeric data, then do one of the following: Control Unit: Use the ten keys to enter data. Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel to set data then push the left button. 1.10.4 How to enter alphanumeric character data Some operations display a software keyboard to enter alphanumeric character data. Click to switch between letters and symbols. To enter characters, click applicable characters on the software keyboard. You can switch between letter input and symbol input by clicking the key circled in the illustration above. 1-21 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.11 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode Context-sensitive menus are available with many of the boxes and buttons surrounding the display area and objects within the display area. Right-click the boxes and buttons marked with numerals in the illustration below to show the related contextsensitive menus. If a menu is not operated within 30 seconds, it is automatically closed. For context-sensitive menus in the chart mode, see the chapter on chart overview. 1.11.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes 41 39 42 1 2 40 38 3 37 Context-sensitive menus on the radar echoes (see paragraph 1.11.2) 36 35 4 34 33 6 8 32 23 25 30 31 29 ° 3229 No. 1 28 240.8° 27 0.088 Box name Adjust Local Time Menu Adjust Local Time 5 Sensor Information, Datum Box Association 7 AIS Select Sensor, OS Info Menu Association OFF/ TT/AIS, Association Menu DISP OFF / FILT / ALL, AIS Menu, Symbol Menu 3 1-22 No. 2 26 Box name Cursor Position 4 AIS Info 6 TT 8 Vector 24 5 9 11 13 15 17 18 19 20 7 10 12 14 16 20 21 22 Menu Range-Bearing Position, X-Y Position, Cursor Menu Expanded AIS Data, AIS Message OFF / MAN / AUTO / MAN/AUTO,TT Menu, Symbol Menu OS Vector Menu, Target Vector Menu 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW No. 9 Box name Vector Time Menu Vector Time (30 s 60 min), OS Vector Menu, Target Vector Menu CPA Range (0.5 - 20 NM) Auto Activate Menu No. 10 Box name Vector Reference Menu True-G(S), REL, OS Vector Menu, Target Vector Menu 11 CPA Range 12 CPA time 14 Auto Activate Lost TGT TT Lost Filter Menu, AIS Lost Filter Menu 16 Lost TGT Filter 17 Past POSN Past POSN Menu 18 Past POSN time 19 Trail Trail All Clear, Trail Menu 20 Trail Time 21 Trail/Past POSN Reference 22 Alert List 23 Trial 24 AZ 25 Drop Mark 2 True-G(S), REL, Past POSN Menu, Trail Menu Trial Mode, Trial Maneuver Menu Drop2 Off CPA Time (1 - 60 min) OFF, AUTO ACT FILT, AUTO ACT ALL, Auto Activate Menu OFF, FILT, ALL, TT Lost Filter Menu, AIS Lost Filter Menu Past POSN Time (OFF, 30 s - 6 min), Past POSN Menu Trail Time (OFF, 15 s - 30 min, CONT), Trail Menu Alert List/Log Window 13 AIS CPA 15 26 VRM 2 27 VRM 1 28 EBL 2 29 EBL 1 30 Drop Mark 1 31 Mark 32 PI Line Number of PI Line, Reset PI Line, PI Menu 33 Watch 34 Brill Menu Brill Menu 35 Chart ON/OFF 36 MAP ON/OFF 37 ACE 38* TUNE 39 PULSE Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Menu Pulse Menu Radar Map Menu, Route Menu, Event Menu, User Chart Menu Tune Initialize 40 RANGE 41 Antenna Selection Dual Radar, ANT Select Menu 42 Customize Echo VRM1 Off, EBL•VRM Menu EBL1 Off, EBL•VRM Menu Mark Color (B-type only), Mark Position, MAP File, Edit Map Comment, Map•Mark Menu Watch Time (OFF, 6 - 20 min) Chart Display Menu Acquisition Zone Menu VRM2 Off, EBL•VRM Menu EBL2 Off, EBL•VRM Menu Drop1 Off Range Scales (0.125 - 96.0 NM) Customize Echo Menu *: For solid state radar, this menu is not displayed. 1-23 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.11.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and chart radar modes Right-click anywhere in the display area in the radar and chart radar modes to show the context-sensitive menu. Radar mode, map ON [Target Data/ACQ/ACT]: For cursor-selected TT or AIS target, display target data, acquire target for TT, or activate sleeping AIS target. [Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on selected tracked target (erase target), sleep activated AIS target. [Off Center]: Off center the display. [EBL Offset]: Offset EBL1, EBL2 (to measure range and bearing between two targets). [Zoom Set]: Select zoom area. [Area Select]: Specify the area where to delete, copy marks. [Mark Delete]: Delete cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off. [Mark Copy]: Copy cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off. [Own Ship Offset]: Apply an offset to own ship position. [REF Mark]: Make cursor-selected target a reference target (for use in TT). Grayed out unless TT is active. [Cursor Size]: Select cursor size, large or small. [Notes Detail]: Show details about cursor-selected Notes. [MOB Delete]: Delete selected MOB mark. Area selected This context-sensitive menu is available when an area is created to cancel tracking on specific targets, or delete or copy marks. [Area Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on targets within the area selected. [Area Mark Delete]: Delete all marks within the area selected. [Area Mark Copy]: Copy all marks within the area selected. [Area Cancel]: Cancel the area created. Radar mode, map OFF or chart ON Radar mode, map ON, area selected 1-24 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.12 Cursor Position Cursor data appears in the cursor position box at the top-right position on the display. The appearance of the box is slightly different between the 23-inch and 19-inch displays, although the content is the same. For the cursor position box that appears in the chart mode, see section 6.6. Cursor position (lat/lon) Time to go to cursor position Bearing and range to cursor position Click indication to switch between bearing and range and x and y coordinates. x and y coordinates of cursor position The indication below the cursor position can show the range and bearing to the cursor or x-y coordinates of the cursor position. Click that indication and select [Range-Bearing Position] or [X-Y Position] as appropriate. For the x-y coordinate display, the y-axis is the heading line, right/top is "plus" and left/lower is "minus". Note 1: The cursor bearing can be selected to true or relative with [1 CURSOR BEARING] in the [CURSOR] menu. Right-click the indication and select [Cursor Menu] to open the [CURSOR] menu. Note 2: The cursor position is shown as "---.-" when the cursor is not within the effective display area. 1.13 How to Select Sensor Settings This radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: System or Local. System shares sensor data among multiple radars in a network. Sensor priority is also commonly shared among the radars. Local selects a sensor outside the network. 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the contextsensitive menu. 2. Click [Select Sensor]. System Local [Setting] Select Sensor [OS Info Menu] System Local [Setting] 3. Click [System] or [Local]. Note: The sensor system can also be selected in the chart mode through this procedure and through the menu. Open the menu then select [7 OWN SHIP INFO] followed by [1 SENSOR]. 1-25 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.14 How to Enter Ship Speed The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and compass signal. The speed can be entered automatically from a speed log (STW, SOG) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu. Note that the FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-150 provides COG and SOG. 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the contextsensitive menu. 2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting]. System Local [Setting] Select Sensor [OS Info Menu] System Local [Setting] 3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [SPD] page. Arrow buttons Stablilization mode Sensor type selection Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list Check for manual speed input Select to use radar as source for speed and course Set speed and course of drift 4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step 5. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle on any line then select the sensor to set as the primary source of speed. All other sensors are then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary. If a speed sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another speed sensor was selected as prima- 1-26 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ry, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to secondary state. 3) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode] to set the stabilization method. Select [Bottom] for GPS or [Water] for a speed log. 4) Check [GPS] or [LOG] at [Sensor Type] to select the source of speed data. 5) Go to step 6. 5. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. Click the manual box to show the up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set speed. Note: For [Set Drift], see page 16-3. 6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the menu. Notes on speed input • IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT requires that a speed log to be interfaced with a TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed (forward speed). • A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the leeway direction. • When AIS is active, [Manual], [Reference SPD] and [Set Drift] are shown in gray to indicate that they are not available for selection. 1-27 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.15 How to Enter Heading Select manual or automatic heading input as follows: 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information, datum box to show the contextsensitive menu. 2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting]. 3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [HDG] page. Arrow buttons Check for automatic heading input Heading sensor list GY001 GY002 Analog gyro heading Manual heading input (not shown on IMO type) [Gyro Correction] is not shown ● when [SYSTEM] is selected in the [OWN SHIP INFO] - [SENSOR] menu. [Gyro Correction] is grayed out ● when manual heading is in use. Gyro Correction 4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step 5. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) Set the priority for the heading sensors. Click the triangle on any line then select the sensor to set as the primary source of heading. All other sensors are then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary. If a heading sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another heading sensor was selected as primary, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to secondary state. 3) Go to step 6. 5. For manual input, check the [Manual] box. Click the heading input box to show the up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set heading. 6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the menu. 1-28 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.16 How to Mark MOB Position Use the MOB (man overboard) feature to mark the position of man overboard on the display screen. Click the [MOB] button (in any mode) on the InstantAccess bar. [MOB] button The MOB mark instantly appears at the geographical position of your ship when the button is clicked. Up to 100 MOB marks can be saved. When the capacity for MOB marks is reached, the oldest mark is automatically erased to make room for the latest. To delete an MOB mark, right-click the mark to show the context-sensitive menu then select [MOB Delete]. Exercise caution when using this feature in strong tide or current. The person will not be at the MOB position for a very long time. 1.17 How to Offset Position The position shown in the Sensor information, datum box (section 1.9) may be different from the actual position. This error affects the positioning accuracy of radar echoes, radar map and TT and AIS symbols. If there is a difference, apply an offset to position as shown below to compensate for the error. 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Own Ship Offset] and push the left button. The color of the cursor becomes blue. Offset value (range, bearing) 3. Roll the trackball until the cursor is at the "correct position". 4. Push the left button to confirm. To cancel the offset, show the context-sensitive menu then select [Reset Own Ship Offset]. The indication [Offset] and the offset values are then erased from the display. 1-29 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.18 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time The GPS navigator feeds time and date data to the chart radar and they appear on the Status bar. Neither the time nor the date can be adjusted, however you can select between UTC time (default) and local time. You can switch between the local time and the UTC time by left-clicking the Current time format indication. Current time format Left click: Switch between local and UTC times Right click: Adjust local time Time To use the local time, enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC time as shown below. 1. Right-click the Current time format indication to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Adjust Local Time] to display the [Local Time Adjust] dialog box. + 0 0 2. Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC time, in hours and minutes. Use the button on the left to select the time offset direction. Select "+" if the local time is ahead of the UTC time, or "-" if it is behind the UTC time. 1.19 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display Click the [Capture] button on the InstantAccess bar to take a screenshot and save it to the SSD (Solid State Drive). You can save a maximum of 100 screenshots. When the capacity for screenshots is reached, the oldest screenshot is automatically deleted to make room for the latest. You cannot take a screenshot when a menu or a dialog box is opened. [Capture] button Screenshots can be copied to a USB flash memory. For how to process screenshots, see section 22.10. 1-30 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.20 The Settings Menu The [Settings] button gives you access to the user profiles and the [Settings] menu. The [Settings] menu has facilities for screenshot management, file management, diagnostic tests and customizing. See chapter 22. [Settings] button 1.21 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar The [Settings] button lets you store ten sets of custom settings and color settings (echoes, TT and AIS symbols and echo trails). This allows individual users to quickly set the system according to their preferences. 1.21.1 How to create a profile 1. Set the settings (echoes, TT and AIS symbols, echo trail, etc.) as desired. 2. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Profile]. 3. Select a profile number from the “Profile” dropdown list. Note: Profiles 06-10 are disabled in the default setting. To enable a disabled profile, select the profile to enable from the “Profile” drop-down list then uncheck [Disable this profile]. 4. Click [Save Current Settings]. 1.21.2 How to disable a profile Select the profile to disable from the “Profile” drop-down list then check [Disable this profile]. Profile 01 cannot be disabled. 1.21.3 How to activate a profile 1. Click [ ] on the Status bar. 2. Click the profile number to activate. The confirmation message "Attention: Settings will be changed to Profile XX. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Profiles (enabled) 3. Click [Yes]. 1-31 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW 1.21.4 How to restore a profile to the default settings 1. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Profile]. 2. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-down list. 3. Click [Restore Default Settings]. The confirmation message "Attention: This profile will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears. 4. Click [Yes]. Note: This setting for the default is available when selecting a profile to activate next time (see paragraph 1.21.3). 1.21.5 How to change the settings on the current display to the recommended settings 1. Click [ ] on the Status bar. 2. Click [Default Settings]. The confirmation message "Attention: Settings will be changed to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears. 3. Click [Yes]. The settings on the following table are changed to the recommended settings. Note: This function is not available when using the interswitch function (see section 2.29). Items RAIN, SEA GAIN, EAV Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) TUNE (other than solid state radar) TX CH (for solid state radar) RANGE VRM1 VRM2 EBL1 EBL2 Presentation mode 1-32 Settings AUTO No change OFF TUNE AUTO No change 6 NM, 6 SM, 6 km, 6 kyd 0.25 NM, 0.25 SM, 0.25 km, 0.25 kyd OFF (No change) ON (No change) OFF (No change) North-up TM Note: Head-up RM with no heading or position data. Off Center Trail Past POSN Lost TGT TT ACQ The ship’s position is put beyond 75% of the range scale. Trail time: 6 min, Trail mode: True-G OFF OFF No change Note: TT OFF with no heading data. Vector AZ1, AZ2 (acquisition zone) AIS Vector time: 6 min, Vector reference: REL OFF Association CPA/TCPA TT (>) CPA: 2 NM, TCPA: 12 min DISP ALL Note: FUNC OFF with no heading or position data. 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW Items AIS CPA Operating mode MAP (Radar map) Route Alert Antenna connection status RANGE RING PI LINE SPD (Own Ship Sensor Setting) 1.22 Settings AUTO ACT ALL RADAR No change No change AZ1/AZ2: OFF, Lost TGT: OFF No change OFF PI1 to PI6: OFF Number of PI line, mode, bearing range truncate: No change Stabilization Mode: Bottom* Sensor Type: GPS* Sensor Setting: No change (System or Local) *: These settings can not be applied, the settings are changed according to the priority order of SPD. How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart System Information, and Operator's Manual You can show chart program no., chart system information, and the operator's manual as follows: 1. Click the [Operating Mode] button at the left end of the Status bar to select [Chart for Radar]. 2. Click the [?] button on the Status bar. [?] button 3. Select [Manual] to show the operator's manual, or [About] to show chart and system information. On the [About] screen, click the [Version] tab to show the chart software version no., conning software version no., S52 presentation library version, ENC user permit no., and C-MAP SDK software version no. Click the [System 1] tab to show system information: CPU type, RAM capacity, SSD free/SSD capacity, Equipment ID and dongle information. [Function] shows the system’s capabilities. Click the [System 2] tab to show the startup time for this equipment. 1-33 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW The information shown in the following illustration may be different from those on your system. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [Version] tab Startup Time : 06 Jan 2014 09:23:20 Equipment ID : ecdis,radar Function : [System 1] tab 1.23 [System 2] tab Tips (operational guidance) This chart radar provides operational tips for the display area, InstantAccess bar and Mark box. To get a tip, simply put the cursor on the object. For example, put the cursor on the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar. The tip "Adjust brilliance" appears. Tip If you do not need the tips, you can turn them off with [TIPS GUIDANCE] in the [INITIAL SETTING] menu. 1-34 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.1 How to Transmit After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed*, "ST-BY" appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is ready to transmit radar pulses. You can transmit by pushing the STBY/TX key on the Control Unit, or clicking the [STBY TX] button on the Status bar. [STBY TX] button *: The solid state radar does not have a magnetron, therefore it has no warming period. The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other settings such as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are also set to previous settings. The STBY/TX key (or [STBY TX] button) toggles the radar between STBY and TRANSMIT state. The antenna is stopped in stand-by and rotates in transmit. Set the radar in standby when its use is not required, to conserve the life of the magnetron. 2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver After the radar is transmitting, adjust the receiver to the exact frequency of the transmitter. 2.2.1 Tuning for magnetron radar [TUNE] button TUNE MAN: Manual tuning TUNE AUTO: Automatic tuning Tuning bar How to initialize tuning Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that automatic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing the tuning. Right-click the [TUNE] button then select [Tune Initialize] to start the initialization. The indication [Tune INI] appears during initialization. Automatic tuning Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar to display [TUNE AUTO]. 2-1 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Manual tuning To tune the radar, start by setting the brilliance to a comfortable level, adjusting the gain until the background speckle just disappears, and selecting the 48 NM range. Then, do the following: 1. Select a weak contact somewhere near the edge of the screen and concentrate on that, while adjusting the gain control in small steps - allowing at least two seconds between each step - until the chosen contact is as big, bright and consistent as possible. 2. Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar to display [TUNE MAN]. 3. Put the cursor on the tuning bar. 4. Spin the scrollwheel to tune. The best tuning point is where the bar swings maximum. The arrow below the bar shows the tuning control position; not the tuning condition. 2.3 Pulse Length The pulse length in use is displayed at the top-left position on the screen, using the indications shown in the table below. Pulse length indication S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L Pulse length (μs) Magnetron radar Solid state radar (P0N/Q0N) 0.07 0.07/5.0 0.15 0.18/7.5 0.3 0.3/12.5 0.5 0.5/17.5 0.7 0.7/18.3 1.2 1.2/18.3 Appropriate pulse lengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If you are not satisfied with the current pulse length settings, you can change them as shown below. 2.3.1 How to select a pulse length You can select the pulse length for the 0.5 to 24 NM range scales as shown below. 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO], [1 CUSTOMIZE ECHO] and [8 PULSE] menus to show the [PULSE] menu. 2. Do one of the following: Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key to select corresponding item number. Trackball module: Click appropriate item. 3. Select desired option by pressing the numeric key pressed at step 2 or spinning the scrollwheel. 4. To confirm selection, press the ENTER key on the Control Unit, or push the left button. 2-2 MENU ECHO CUSTOMIZE ECHO ← PULSE 1 0.5NM S1 / S2 2 0.75NM S1 / S2 / M1 3 1.5NM S1 / S2 / M1 / M2 4 3NM S2 / M1 / M2 / M3 5 6NM M1 / M2 / M3 / L 6 12NM M1 / M2 / M3 / L 7 24NM M2 / M3 / L 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.3.2 How to change the pulse length 1. Click the [Pulse] button at the top of the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click a pulse length. 2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity The GAIN control (or [Gain] button) adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver. The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the screen. Adjust the gain so background noise is just visible on the screen. Note: For adjustment of gain when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is ON, see paragraph 2.10.2. To adjust the sensitivity, do one of the following: Control Unit: While monitoring the radar image and the gain slider bar, operate the GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity. Trackball module: For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish. Put cursor on slider bar and push and hold left button. Drag cursor to new location then release left button. 2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the picture, suppress it with the A/C SEA control (or [SEA] on the Status bar), either manually or automatically. When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully. The echo average (see section 2.9) is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary ones when the echo average is active. 2-3 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically Auto A/C SEA allows for fine-tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB. Lower the auto A/C SEA level because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no see surface reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can observe the size of echoes because the STC curve is different depending size of echoes. To get automatic adjustment of sea clutter, do one of the following: Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display [AUTO] on the SEA mode indication on the Status bar. SEA mode indication Trackball module: Click the SEA mode indication on the Status bar to display [AUTO]. 2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually The A/C SEA control reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter. Sea clutter at screen center A/C SEA adjusted; sea clutter suppressed The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible windward. Be careful not to remove all sea clutter, because you may erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C SEA and A/C RAIN to reduce clutter. To reduce sea clutter manually, do one of the following: Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display [MAN] on the SEA mode indication on the Status bar. Rotate the A/C SEA control to adjust the sea clutter. Trackball module: Click the SEA mode indication on the Status bar to display [MAN]. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish. 2-4 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter (rain, snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets. The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting, the greater the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier. Be careful not to remove all rain clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C SEA to reduce clutter. When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully. The echo average (see section 2.9) is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary ones when the echo average is active. 2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [AUTO] on the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar. RAIN mode indication Trackball module: Click the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar to display [AUTO]. 2-5 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [MAN] on the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar. While watching the radar picture, adjust the A/C RAIN control to reduce the clutter. Trackball module: Click the RAIN mode indication on the Status bar to show [MAN]. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish. Note: The detection range is reduced when the RAIN is used to show targets in rain. Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in determining how the detection range is affected. The figures shown below illustrate this occurrence. How to interpret the graph Using the X-band graph as an example, a radar target originally detected on the 8 NM range can only be detected in rain at ranges shown below: 4 mm/h rain (short pulse) Reduction Range First Detection(NM) (NM) Reduction of of range ofoffirst detection 16 16 mm/h rain - short pulse 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain - long pulse 14 16 mm/h rain (short pulse) 12 4 mm/h rain (long pulse) 10 16 mm/h rain (long pulse) 16 mm/h rain - short pulse 48mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 46mm/h rain - long pulse 4 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Original range of first detection (NM) Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM) 16 16 mm/h rain - short pulse 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain - long pulse 14 4 mm/h rain (short pulse) 12 4 mm/h rain (long pulse) 10 16 mm/h rain (short pulse) 8 6 4 16 mm/h rain (long pulse) 2 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Original range of first detection (NM) Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to reproduce Information from its Interantional Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further information on the IEC is available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts and contents are reproduced by the author, or is IC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein. Accordingly the short pulse may be preferable in rain on ranges < 10NM. 2-6 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.7 Interference Rejector Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture. Activating the interference rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference. The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It compares the received signals over successive transmissions and reduces randomly occurring signals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of transmissions that are correlated. Click the [IR] button on the InstantAccess bar then click desired rejection level. The higher the number the greater the degree of interference rejection. [IR] button For solid state radar: When there are a lot of interference, switch the [TX CH]. Click the [TX CH] button on the InstantAccess bar then click [1] or [2]. [TX CH] button ([TX CH 1] or [TX CH 2]) 2.8 TX CH 1 Echo Stretch The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three levels of echo stretch, 1, 2 and 3. The higher the number the greater the amount of stretching. The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns from the sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason, suppress those types of interference before activating the echo stretch. Click the [ES] button on the InstantAccess bar then click desired echo stretch level. [ES] button 2-7 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.9 Echo Averaging The echo averaging feature, which requires heading, position and speed data, effectively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions. To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter. Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. True echo averaging is not however effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the ground. Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than stationary ones. Note 2: Do not use echo averaging under heavy pitching and rolling; loss of targets can result. Note 3: When the heading sensor signal is lost, [EAV] is turned OFF and the indication is grayed out. Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control. Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets. Then, do as follows: Click the [EAV] button on the InstantAccess bar then click desired setting. [EAV] button OFF: Echo averaging is OFF. 1, 2: Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. "2" is more effective than "1" in detecting targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, "1" is more effective than "2" in displaying high-speed targets. Select the setting best suited to your objective. 3: Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft from sea clutter. When the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is ON (see section 2.10), the indication for the EAV button is grayed out. Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 2.31) or [SART] (see section 2.36) is ON, [EAV] is OFF and the indication is grayed out. 2-8 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.10 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function This radar has the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function. This function detects sea and rain clutter from received echoes’ range and bearing trend and automatically reduces sea and rain clutter according to the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) threshold setting. Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen. 2.10.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off Click the [ACE] button on the InstantAccess bar to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on or off. When the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is [ON], the indications for [RAIN] and [SEA] on the Status bar are grayed out. ACE ON ACE OFF Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 2.31) or [SART] (see section 2.36) is ON, [ACE] is OFF and the indication is grayed out. 2.10.2 How to adjust the gain in the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode Control Unit: Rotate the GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity. Trackball module: For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area on the Status bar then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish. Put cursor on slider bar and push and hold left button. Drag cursor to new location then release left button. 2-9 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.10.3 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) menu Open the menu then select the [ECHO] and [ACE] menus to show the [ACE] menu. • [ADJUST]: No use. • [SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT]: Set the level for the high sensitivity mode (see paragraph 2.10.4). • [SUPPRESS SECTOR]: Set the angular range for suppression of false echoes (see paragraph 2.10.5). MENU ECHO ← ACE 1 ADJUST OFF / ON 2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT 2 3 SUPPRESS SECTOR 2.10.4 START 0° ANGLE 0° How to get the high sensitivity When Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function is [ON], the high sensitivity mode operates while pushing the GAIN control. You can select the level for the high sensitivity mode as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO]. 2. Select [0 ACE] (B type) or [9 ACE] (IMO and A types), and [2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT]. 3. Select the level from [1], [2] or [3]. 4. Close the menu. 2.10.5 How to suppress the false echoes The echo signals can appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear when there are targets (see paragraph 2.42.2). You can suppress the false echoes. 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO]. 2. Select [0 ACE] (B type) or [9 ACE] (IMO and A types), and [3 SUPPRESS SECTOR]. 3. Select [START] then set the start angle from which you can suppress the false echoes. 4. Select [ANGLE] then set the angle range to which you can suppress the false echoes. 5. Close the menu. 2-10 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.11 Noise Rejector White noise may show itself on the screen as random "speckles" spread over the entire radar image. This equipment reduces the white noise then improves the on-screen S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for the received echoes in the range direction. Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the screen or the range resolution may worsen. You can remove this noise as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO]. 2. Select [1 CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menus to show the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menu. 3. Select [4 NOISE REJECT]. 4. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate. 5. Close the menu. The status of the noise rejector is indicated at the top-left position, [NR: ON] or [NR: OFF]. Noise Rejector ON Noise Rejector OFF 2-11 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.12 Wiper The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such as noise, sea clutter and rain clutter, to clear the picture. There are two wiper settings, 1 and 2. The difference between 1 and 2 is that the brilliance is lowered more slowly in 2. To use the wiper feature, do the following: 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO]. 2. Select [8 WIPER] (B type) or [7 WIPER] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [OFF], [1] or [2] as appropriate. 4. Close the menu. 2.13 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation Purpose Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for oftenencountered situations. The radar's internal computer offers several picture preset options to be assigned to each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the presets is labelled [HARD RAIN], and is designed to be used in heavy rain. Two user-programmable presets are also provided (labeled [CUSTOM1], [CUSTOM2]), so that you can have the radar automatically adjusted to those conditions that are not covered by the provided setup options. Below are the preset options provided with this radar. Label OCEAN CANAL BERTHING CONGESTION Description Optimum setting for long range detection, on a range scale of 6 NM or larger. Optimum setting for operating in a canal. Optimum setting when berthing. Optimum setting for short range navigation (for example, a harbor) using a range scale of 1.5 NM or less. Label ROUGH SEA Description Optimum setting for operation in rough seas. HARD RAIN Optimum setting for rough weather or heavy rain. User-defined custom settings. User-defined custom settings. CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 Each picture option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving optimum setup for a particular navigating situation. These include interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutters, video contrast, pulse length and sea and radar conditions. Adjusting these features from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menu changes the original function key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular customize option, it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended that you 2-12 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION use the user-programmable presets ([CUSTOM1] or [CUSTOM2]) when frequent adjustment of the radar image is necessary. OCEAN CANAL BERTHING CONGESTION ROUGH SEA HARD RAIN CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 INT REJECT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ECHO STRETCH 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 ECHO AVERAGE 3 OFF OFF 2 2 OFF OFF 1 NOISE REJECT ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF AUTO SEA OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* 0.75 NM M1* S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S2 S2 1.5 NM M1 M1 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 M1 3 NM M3 M2 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M2 6 NM L M3 M3 M2 M2 M2 M1 M3 AUTO RAIN OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* OFF* ON OFF* OFF* VIDEO CONTRAST 3-B 2-B 2-B 1-B 2-A 2-A 1-B 2-B *: Manual PULSE LENGTH OCEAN CANAL BERTHING CONGESTION ROUGH SEA HARD RAIN CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 0.5 NM S2 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S2 12, 24 NM L L L L M3 L L L *: S2 for solid state radar. CONDITION OCEAN CANAL BERTHING CONGESTION ROUGH SEA HARD RAIN CUSTOM1 CUSTOM2 STC ANT HEIGHT Set at installation LOW LEVEL ECHO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GAIN 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 SEA MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-30 MAN-60 MAN-60 MAN-30 MAN-30 RAIN MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 MAN-0 ACE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-13 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.13.1 How to select a customized echo Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select a customize echo option from the drop-down list. [Customize Echo] button Click to show drop-down list. 2.13.2 How to edit a customized echo You can edit a customized echo as below. 1. Select a customize echo option to edit (see paragraph 2.13.1). 2. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click [Customize Echo Menu]. 3. Set the items below referring to the sections shown. [INT REJECT]: section 2.7 [ECHO STRETCH]: section 2.8 [ECHO AVERAGE]: section 2.9 [NOISE REJECT]: section 2.11 [AUTO SEA]: section 2.5 [AUTO RAIN]: section 2.6 [PULSE]: section 2.3 [ACE]: section 2.10 4. Click [7 VIDEO CONTRAST]. 2-14 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 5. Spin the scrollwheel to select 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as appropriate then push the left button. Refer to the description and illustration below. CONTRAST C B A CONTRAST 4 3 2 1 1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the narrowest dynamic range. A: The mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for suppressing rain clutter. B: Curve between A and C. C: The mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting distant targets. 6. Click [9 CONDITION]. 7. Click [1 STC ANT HEIGHT]. 8. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate radar antenna height (above the waterline) then push the left button. 9. If necessary, select [2 LOW LEVEL ECHO] to reject low level echoes. The setting range is 0-8. The higher the figure, the stronger the low level echo that is erased. 10. To save the custom settings, select [SAVE] from [0 DEFAULT]. 2.13.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a user customized echo, you can easily restore the settings for that user customized echo saved at paragraph 2.13.2). 1. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click [Customize Echo Menu]. 2. Click [0 DEFAULT]. 3. Select [USER]. 2.13.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings You can erase a customized echo options to restore its factory default options (see the tables on pages 2-12 and 2-13). 1. Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select [CUSTOM1] or [CUSTOM2] for which you want to restore its factory default settings. 2. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click [Customize Echo Menu]. 3. Click [0 DEFAULT]. 4. Select [FACTORY]. 2-15 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.14 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes In certain situations, echoes from very far distance targets may appear as false echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted. Pulse interval Actual ranges Second-trace echo Measured ranges This equipment lengthens the pulse repetition period to reject the false echoes. Note: This function decreases the number of echoes hits. Carefully use this function so that the possibility of detecting small targets and high-speed craft does not lessen. To reject second-trace echoes, open the [1 ECHO] menu then set [5 2ND ECHO REJ] (B type) or [4 2ND ECHO REJ] (IMO and A types) to [ON] then close the menu. 2.15 Presentation Modes This radar has the following presentation modes in the radar mode: Relative Motion (RM) Head-up: Unstabilized. STAB Head-up: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing) where the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading. Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship's orientation at the time of selecting course-up. North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to North. Stern-up: Unstabilized. True Motion (TM) North-up: Ground- or sea-stabilized with compass and speed inputs. 2-16 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Mode availability Presentation mode Course-up RM Head-up RM STAB Head-up RM North-up RM North-up TM Stern-up RM* Availability Radar Chart radar Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No *: Not available with IMO or A type. 2.15.1 How to select a presentation mode How to select a presentation mode from the Control Unit Push the MODE key consecutively to select radar presentation mode desired. The Range/Presentation mode box shows the current presentation mode. How to select a presentation mode from the Range/Presentation mode box Selection method 2 Click to show drop-down list. Click desired mode on list. 6 STAB H UP RM Selection method 1 Click indication to select mode. IMPORTANT Loss of gyrocompass signal When the gyrocompass signal is lost, the Alert “Gyro xxx COM1 Error” (xxx=a number between 250 and 259 according to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box. After all signals are lost, the Alert 450 “Heading Sensor Not Available” appears, the presentation mode becomes head-up and all TT and AIS are erased. Check the gyrocompass and select the presentation mode with the MODE key or the Range/Presentation mode box. 2-17 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.15.2 Description of presentation modes Head-up mode The head-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top of the display indicates own ship's heading. North marker Heading line The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship's heading. The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker, which indicates heading sensor north. A failure of all the heading sensor inputs will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro xxx COM1 Error" (a number between 250-259 according to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box. Course-up mode The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting the center with the top of the display indicates own ship's intended course (namely, own ship's previous heading just before this mode has been selected). North marker Heading line Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to the intended course, which is maintained at the 0degree position. The heading line moves in accordance with ship's yawing and course change. This mode is useful for avoiding smearing of the picture during course change. STAB Head-up mode Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The difference from the normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale. The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in accordance with the heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship's heading at a glance. This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyro heading sensor. If the gyro heading sensor fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up mode. North-up mode The north-up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their true (heading sensor) directions from own ship, north bearing maintained at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ship's heading. Requires heading signal. If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to head-up and the north marker disappears. A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 "Heading 2-18 North marker Heading line 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1 Error" (a number between 250-259 according to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box. Stern-up mode The stern-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top of the display indicates own ship's stern. Heading line The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship's stern. The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker, which indicates stern sensor north. North marker True motion mode Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance with their true courses and speed. In ground stabilized TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses, appear as stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set and drift inputs, the landmass can move on the screen. Note that true motion is not available on the 96 NM or higher range scale range scale. If COG and SOG (both over the ground) are not available on the TM mode, enter the set (tide direction) and drift (tide speed) manually referring to a Tide Table. North marker Heading line If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguishable, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail. A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1 Error" (a number between 250-259 according to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box. When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50% of the radius of the display, own ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center. You can also reset the own ship symbol manually by pushing the CU/TM RESET key, or click the [CU/TM reset] button on the InstantAccess bar. North marker Heading line (a) True motion is selected (b) Own ship has reached a point 50% of display radius (c) Own ship is automatically reset to 75% of display radius 2-19 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.16 How to Select the Range Scale The selected range scale and range ring interval are shown at the top-left position on the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius. Range ring interval Range scale 6 Range selection buttons Note: The IMO- and A-type radars do not have the 1 NM, 2 NM, 4 NM, 8 NM, 16 NM, 32 NM and 120 NM ranges. How to select a range scale from the Control Unit Use the RANGE key to select range desired. Hit the "+" part of the key to raise the range; the "-" part to lower the range. How to select a range scale from the Range/Presentation mode box Method 1: Click the range scale indication. Method 2: Click the range selection buttons. Click the "+" button to raise the range; the "-" button to lower the range. Method 3: Right-click the range scale indication to show a drop-down list of available ranges then click a range. 2.17 How to Measure the Range to a Target The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with the cursor, or with the VRM. Use the range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target. They are the concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The number of rings is automatically determined by the selected range scale and their interval is displayed in the Range/Presentation mode box at the top-left position on the screen. Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring. The range rings can be turned on/off with [RANGE RING] on the [NAV TOOL] menu. 2-20 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.17.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 VRM are longer. 340 350 000 010 020 330 VRM 1 030 320 Target 040 310 050 060 300 070 290 280 080 270 090 260 100 250 110 240 VRM 2 120 230 130 140 220 210 150 200 190 180 170 160 VRM 1 VRM 2 TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59 0.660 NM 1.180 NM How to measure the range from the Control Unit 1. Press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to display desired VRM. 2. Rotate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the bottom-right position on the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the range control. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale. To erase a VRM, press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to erase corresponding VRM. How to measure the range from the trackball module 1. Click the title bar on a VRM box to activate the corresponding VRM. 2. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the bottomright position on the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the range control. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale set the outer edge of the VRM on the inner edge of the target. 3. To anchor the VRM, push the left button. To turn off a VRM, click the arrow in the applicable VRM box. The VRM disappears and the VRM box is minimized. 2-21 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.17.2 How to set VRM attributes You can customize the VRMs to suit your needs. 1. Open the menu then select [3 NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) to display the [EBL•VRM] menu ([EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu for the IMO and A types). IMO- and A-type radars 2. For the B-type radar, select [3 VRM1] or [4 VRM2] as appropriate. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired unit then push the left button. B-type radar 3. Select [6 VRM TTG] (B type) or [2 VRM TTG] (IMO and A types) and then select the VRM(s) that are to show/hide the TTG indication. [OFF] shows no TTG indication. 4. The [LINK EBL] option for [7 VRM OFFSET] automatically activates the corresponding VRM when the offset EBL is enabled. 340 350 000 010 020 330 030 320 040 VRM 310 050 060 300 070 290 5. Close the menu. 280 080 270 250 240 100 110 120 230 130 140 220 210 150 200 2-22 090 Offset EBL 260 190 180 170 160 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.18 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The two EBLs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 EBL are longer. Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles. Its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM control. To operate this marker, rotate the VRM rotary control on the Control Unit, or put the cursor in the applicable VRM box and roll the scrollwheel. EBL 2 340 350 000 010 Target 020 330 030 320 040 310 050 060 300 070 290 280 080 270 090 260 100 Range marker 250 240 120 230 130 140 220 210 150 200 EBL 1 EBL bearing EBL 1 110 190 180 170 160 EBL 2 128.0° R 100.8° R EBL reference 2.18.1 How to measure the bearing How to measure the bearing from the Control Unit 1. Press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to display desired EBL. 2. Rotate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target with the EBL. Read the bearing to the target at the appropriate EBL box. To erase an EBL, press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to erase corresponding EBL. How to measure the bearing from the trackball module 1. Click the title bar on a EBL box to activate the corresponding EBL. 2. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the target with the EBL. 3. To anchor the EBL, push the left button. To turn off an EBL, click the arrow in applicable EBL box. The EBL disappears and the EBL box is minimized. 2-23 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.18.2 How to select bearing reference An EBL box has an "R" (relative) if the EBL bearing is relative to own ship's heading; "T" (true) if it is referenced to the north. True or relative indication is available regardless of presentation mode. To change the bearing reference, click the EBL reference indication to display R or T as appropriate. The bearing reference can also be selected on the [EBL•VRM] menu ([EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu with the IMO- and A-type radars). Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication change as follows: Course-up, relative: Course-up, true: Head-up, relative: Head-up, true: North-up, relative: North-up, true: 2.19 EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves. EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged. EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged. EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves. EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves. EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged. Collision Assessment by Offset EBL The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measurement of range and bearing between two targets. This function is also useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA (Closest Point of Approach) by using a VRM as shown in Figure (a) on the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in Figure (b), the target ship is on a collision course. 2.19.1 How to assess risk of collision How to assess risk of collision from the Control Unit 1. Press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to activate an EBL. 2. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threatening target (A in the figure on the next page). 3. Press the EBL OFFSET key to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location. 4. Wait approx. three minutes. Operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target at the new position (A'). The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting. 5. If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in the left figure on the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right figure on the next page, the target ship is on a collision course. To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, press the EBL OFFSET key. 2-24 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION How to assess risk of collision from the context-sensitive menu 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [EBL Offset] and then [EBL 1] or [EBL 2]. 3. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threat (A in the figure below). 4. Push the left button to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location. 5. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the target at the new position (A'). The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting. 6. It is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in left-hand figure below. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the righthand figure below, the target ship is on a collision course. To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, put the cursor on the EBL origin then right-click. 340 350 000 010 340 020 330 320 A 080 A’ 090 270 260 100 260 110 130 140 220 210 150 200 EBL 1 150.3° T 2.19.2 190 180 170 160 VRM 1 TTG 10:00 0.850 NM (a) 060 070 080 A’ 100 110 240 120 230 EBL1 VRM1 090 250 120 230 050 280 270 250 040 A 290 070 240 030 300 060 290 EBL1 020 310 050 280 010 320 040 310 300 350 000 330 030 130 140 220 210 150 200 EBL 1 138.2° T 190 180 170 160 (b) VRM 1 TTG 10:00 0.850 NM Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north stabilized (true) or referenced to your ship's heading (relative). 1. Open the menu then select the [3 NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menus to display the [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menu. 2. Select [5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT] (B type) or [1 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [STAB GND], [STAB HDG], or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate. STAB GND: Reference to latitude and longitude. Origin position is always fixed regardless of your ship's movement. STAB HDG: Reference to heading. The relationship of relative bearing between origin position and own position is kept always. STAB NORTH: Reference to North. The relationship of true bearing between origin position and own position is kept always. 4. Close the menu. 2-25 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.20 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the Control Unit 1. Press the EBL 1 key to activate EBL1. 2. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the EBL 1 on a target of interest. 3. Press the EBL OFFSET key. 4. Operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the other target of interest. 5. Press the VRM 1 key to activate VRM 1. 6. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside edge of target 2. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by using the EBL 2 and the VRM 2. Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T". To return the EBL origin to the screen center, push the EBL OFFSET key. How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the trackball module 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [EBL Offset] then [EBL 1]. 3. Put the origin of the EBL on a target of interest. 4. Push the left button to anchor the EBL. 5. Put the cursor on the EBL 1 box then spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the other target of interest. 6. Put the cursor on the VRM 1 box then spin the scrollwheel to put the range marker on the EBL on the inside edge of target 2. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by using the EBL 2 and the VRM 2. Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T". To return the EBL to its origin, open the context-sensitive menu then select [Reset EBL]. Range marker 340 350 000 010 020 030 330 320 EBL 2 040 310 EBL 1 050 Target 2 Target 4 Target 1 300 290 280 Range marker 060 070 080 090 270 Target 3 EBL origin 260 100 250 110 240 120 230 130 140 220 EBL 1 EBL 2 140.0° R 335.2° R Range/bearing between targets 1 and 2 2-26 210 150 200 190 180 170 160 VRM 1 VRM 2 TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59 0.500 NM 0.980 NM Range/bearing between targets 3 and 4 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.21 How to Off-center the Display Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is put beyond 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit. Cursor Normal display Off-centered display This feature is available on the ranges between 0.125 and 48 NM and any presentation mode other than true motion. If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguishable, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail. How to off-center the display from the Control Unit 1. Put the cursor on the position within the display area where you want to move the sweep origin. 2. Press the OFF CENTER key to move the sweep origin to the cursor position. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again. How to off-center the display from the context-sensitive menu 1. Put the cursor in the display area then right-click to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Off Center]. 3. Put the cursor where to put the sweep origin, and push the left button. To cancel the off-center display, do steps 1 and 2 above, then click the display area. If you cannot cancel off-center… When the conditions shown below are met, off-center cannot be cancelled. This is because the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75% of the effective radar display. • Own ship marker is large. • The distance between the antenna position and the conning position is large. • Short-distance display range. To cancel the off-center in the above-mentioned conditions, first select a larger range, then cancel the off-center. 2-27 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.22 Target Trails The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of synthetic afterglow. Target trails are selected either relative or true and may be sea or ground stabilized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and position and speed inputs. 2.22.1 Target trails-related indications Trail-related indications are located at the bottom-right position on the screen. Several trail-related operations can be done from the [TRAIL] menu, which you can show by right-clicking the Trail time indication. Trail mode Elapsed trail time Trail time Right-click to show the TRAIL menu. TRAIL COLOR not available with IMO or A type. 2.22.2 True or relative target trails You may display echo trails in true or relative motion. Relative trails show relative movements between targets and own ship. True motion trails present true target movements in accordance with their over-the-ground speeds and courses. Click the Trail mode indication to select [True-G], [True-S] or [REL] as appropriate. True target trails (No smearing of stationary targets) 2-28 Relative target trails (Targets moving relative to own ship) 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.22.3 Trail time Trail time, the trail plotting interval, can be selected with the scrollwheel, left button or right button. The trail timer counts up the trail time and is erased once the terminal count is reached. For example, if the trail time is six minutes, the timer is erased when trails have been plotted six minutes. The maximum time of count up for continuous plotting is 29:59. Caution: The correctness of the target trails is uncertain until the trail timer count does not reach the trail time. How to select a trail time Four controls are available to select a trail time. • Control Unit: Push the TRAIL key. • Trackball module: Put the cursor on the Trail time indication at the bottom-right position then operate the control (left button or scrollwheel). For the right button, a context-sensitive menu appears. Click the desired time. The times available depend on the control used as shown in the table below. Control 2.22.4 Available setting Left button, right button, TRAIL key OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min, CONT(inuous) Scrollwheel OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1-30 min (30 sec intervals), CONT(inuous) How to reset target trails All trails can be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start trails fresh. Control Unit: Press and hold down the TRAIL key until trails disappear. Context-sensitive menu: Right-click the Trail box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Trail All Clear]. 2.22.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display You can temporarily remove all trails from the display. Trails are removed but are continued internally. Control Unit: Press the TRAIL key to show [OFF] in the trail time indication. Trackball module: Click the trail time indication to display [OFF]. 2.22.6 Trail stabilization in true motion True motion trails can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The [Trail time] indication shows current stabilization as [True-G] or [True-S]. To change the stabilization mode, open the [SPEED] menu and set [SHIP SPEED] to [BT] (ground stabilization) or [WT] (sea stabilization). 2-29 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.22.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu [TRAIL GRAD]: The afterglow of the target trails can be shown in a single tone or gradual shading. Monotone (SINGLE) Gradual shading (MULTI) [TRAIL COLOR]: The trail color can be selected from the colors shown in the left figure. This feature is not available with the IMO or A type. [TRAIL LEVEL]: The level (intensity) of the afterglow that extends from radar targets can be adjusted. The higher the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow. [OS TRAIL]: Show or hide trail for own ship. [SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS]: You can prevent the display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship, to clear the radar picture. Note: [SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] is automatically turned on when [OS TRAIL] is activated. The possible ON/OFF combinations between [OS TRAIL] and [SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] are as shown in the table below. Setting OS TRAIL SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS Remarks 2.23 OFF OFF ON/OFF pairings available ON OFF ON ON No OS trail - - ON OFF Setting not possible Parallel Index (PI) Lines PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are available depending on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the menu. PI lines Control of the orientation and interval of the PI lines is done from the PI line box, which is at the bottom-left position. Minimize button PI line no. PI line angle PI line interval 2-30 PI line status indication (ON, OFF) T PI line reference 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.23.1 How to display, erase a PI line How to display, erase a PI line from the Control Unit Displaying a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears. Erasing a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears. Press and hold down the INDEX LINE key to erase the PI line. How to display, erase a PI line from the trackball module Click the PI line no. indication to select a PI line. Click the PI line status indication (ON, OFF) to display or erase a PI line. 2.23.2 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval 1. If not already displayed, display a PI line. 2. Put the cursor on the PI line angle indication then spin the scrollwheel to set the angle (000 to 359.9). 3. Put the cursor on the PI line interval indication then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line interval. 2.23.3 How to select the number of PI lines to display You can select the number of PI lines to display among 1, 2, 3 or 6. For all PI lines 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu. 3. Select [2 SET ALL PI LINE] and the desired number of PI lines among [1], [2], [3] or [6]. 4. Close the menu. For individual PI line 6 TRUNCATE 1. Select the PI line no. to set the number of PI lines referring to paragraph 2.23.1. 2. Right-click the PI line box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Number of PI Line]. 3. Select the desired number of PI lines among [1], [2], [3] or [6]. Note: The actual number of lines visible can be less depending on line interval. 2.23.4 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line PI line bearing reference can be relative to your ship's heading (Relative) or referenced to North (True). Note: This function is not available with IMO type. The setting is fixed to [True]. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu. 3. Select [1 PI LINE BEARING]. 2-31 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 4. Select [REL] or [TRUE]. 5. Close the menu. 2.23.5 How to select the PI lines orientation 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu. 3. Select [3 PI LINE MODE]. 4. Select [PARALLEL] or [PERPENDICULAR]. [PARALLEL]: PI lines are displayed in parallel to your ship's heading when PI line angle is set to 0°. [PERPENDICULAR]: PI lines are displayed in perpendicular to your ship's heading when PI line angle is set to 0°. 5. Close the menu. 2.23.6 How to reset PI lines You can automatically return all or selected PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manually. 1. Open the menu. 2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu. 3. Select [4 RESET PI LINE] (reset currently displayed line) or [5 RESET ALL PI LINE] as appropriate. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to reset PI No.x line setting?" or "Attention: Do you wish to reset all PI line settings?" appears. Click the [OK] button to reset the PI line(s). 4. Close the menu. 2.23.7 How to adjust PI line length You can adjust the length of each PI line. This function is available when [2 SET ALL PI LINE] is set to [1]. 1. If not already displayed, display a PI line to adjust the length referring to paragraph 2.23.1. 2. Open the menu. 3. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu. 4. Select [6 TRUNCATE]. 5. Select [ON] in [PI 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) TRUNCATE]. MENU NAV TOOL PI LINE ← TRUNCATE 1 PI 1 TRUNCATE OFF / ON Adjust the length forward a PI line. 24.000NM 2 PI 2 TRUNCATE OFF / ON 2-32 24.000NM Adjust the length backward a PI line. 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 6. Set the length (setting range: 0.000 to 24.000 NM). Heading line Own ship position PI line Adjust the length forward a PI line. Adjust the length backward a PI line. 7. Close the menu. 2.24 Zoom The zoom function enlarges an area of interest in the information area (magnification range: 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0; 2.0 is default). To use the zoom display, right-click the operational area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Zoom Set]. Roll the trackball to put the zoom cursor on the area to zoom. Spin the scrollwheel to change the magnification then push the left button to confirm the magnification and the position. See the zoom display at the right side of the screen. Zoomed echo Zoom display Zoom cursor To deactivate the zoom function, right-click the operational area to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Zoom Off]. 2-33 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.25 Markers 2.25.1 Heading line The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode. It changes its orientation in the north-up and true motion modes according to orientation. Temporarily erasing the heading line To temporarily extinguish the heading line (and anything but radar echoes within the display area) to look at targets existing dead ahead of own ship, push the HL OFF key on the Control Unit, or click the [HL OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar. Release the respective control to redisplay the heading line, etc. 2.25.2 Stern marker The stern marker, which is a dotted line, appears opposite to the heading line and marks your ship’s stern. To display or erase this marker, do the following: 1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING]. 2. Select [6 STERN MARK] (B type) or [5 STERN MARK] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. 2.25.3 North marker The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the north marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal. 2.25.4 Own ship marker The own ship marker is displayed at your ship's position. It can be turned on or off and its configuration selected from the [MARK SETTING] menu. Two configurations are available: minimized marker and scaled marker. The scaled marker is scaled according to the length and beam of the vessel. If the beam width or length of the marker (set at installation) gets smaller than 3 mm, the marker is replaced with the minimized marker. Ship's dimensions should be entered at installation to use the scaled marker. Heading line Antenna position Heading line X Beam line Beam line Minimized marker Scaled marker 1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING]. 2. Select [4 OWN SHIP MARK] (B type) or [3 OWN SHIP MARK] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [MIN] or [SCALED] as appropriate. MIN: Show the minimized own ship marker. SCALED: Show the scaled own ship marker. 2-34 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.25.5 Vectors You can show or hide the vector for own ship and reference targets, on the [NAV TOOL] menu. 4 VECTOR COLOR GRN / BLU / CYA / MAG / WHT [TARGET VECTOR] menu [REF TARGET VECTOR]: Turn the vector for the reference target on or off. WHT is replaced with RED with A and B types. [OWN SHIP VECTOR] menu [VECTOR STAB IND]: Turn ON to show double arrow for ground tracking; single arrow for water tracking. [TIME INCREMENTS]: A short horizontal line can be marked on the own ship vector in one-minute intervals to show approximate later positions. [OWN SHIP VECTOR]: Turn vector OFF, or show ship's heading or course with a vector. [VECTOR COLOR]: Set the vector color for own ship. 2.25.6 Barge marker The length and breadth of the total barge size can be displayed as a simple rectangle on the radar display. Up to five rows of barges and nine barges per row can be shown. Barge mark This feature is available with an installation preset. Set up barge information as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [3 NAV TOOL]. 2-35 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2. Select [7 BARGE] (B type) or [6 BARGE] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [1 BARGE MARK]. 4. Select [ON] to turn on the barge mark. 5. At [2 BARGE SIZE], enter length (three digits) and width (two digits) of the total number of barges. 6. Select [3 ARRANGEMENT]. 7. Enter the number of barges that will be in front of your vessel, row by row: 1) Select a barge row. 2) Spin the scrollwheel to set the number of barges in the row. (The maximum number is nine.) The numerical indication to the right of the squares changes with scrollwheel operation. 3) Push the left button to confirm your selection. The squares on the row are “filled” according to the number of barges selected at step 2. 8. Close the menu. The radar display now shows the barge mark on the display. 2.25.7 Antenna marker The antenna marker appears as a blue cross at the antenna location. The marker can be shown or hidden as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING]. 2. Select [5 ANTENNA MARK] (B type) or [4 ANTENNA MARK] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. 2.25.8 Cursor The cursor measures the range and bearing to an object, selects menu items, selects location for mark entry, etc. For the B-type radar, you can select cursor attributes (bearing reference, range unit and size for the cursor) on the [CURSOR] menu in the [NAV TOOL] menu. For the IMO- and A-type radars you can select only the cursor bearing reference, with [EBL•CURSOR BEARING] in the [EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu of the [NAV TOOL] menu. [CURSOR BEARING]: Show cursor bearing reference in true or relative. [CURSOR RANGE]: Show the cursor range indication in the NM, SM, km or kyd. Not available with either IMO- or A-type radar. [CURSOR SIZE]: Select the cursor size for small or large. The large cursor covers the entire echo area. Not available with either IMO- or A-type radar. 2-36 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.26 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data You can adjust the relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric readouts displayed on the screen. 1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar then select [Brill Menu]. [BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 2 [BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 1 2. Click the brilliance adjustment bar of the item to adjust. Page 1 Item Adjust brightness of [1 CONTROL PANEL] backlighting of keys on Control Unit [2 CHARACTER] Alphanumeric characters [3 CURSOR] Cursor [4 ECHO] Radar echoes [2 VRM] VRMs [3 PI LINE] [4 TT SYMBOL] [5 TRAIL] Target trails [5 AIS SYMBOL] [6 HL] Heading line, stern line [6 MARK] PI lines TT symbols, AZ area, TT vector, TT past posn AIS symbols, AIS vector, AIS past posn Radar map marks, route, waypoint/MOB mark, anchor watch, drop1/2, zoom, north mark, user chart Chart-related objects [7 OS SYMBOL] Own ship symbol, barge mark, antenna mark, own ship track, own ship vector [8 RING] Fixed range rings [9 BEARING CURSOR] Bearing cursor Item [1 EBL] [7 CHART] Page 2 Adjust brigtness of EBLs, blind sector 3. Spin the scrollwheel to set brilliance level. 4. Close the menu. 2-37 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.27 Watch Alert The watch alert provides a flashing visual alert at regular intervals to remind you to monitor the radar picture for safety or other purposes. To enable the watch alert, open the [8 INITIAL SETTING] menu followed by the [4 ALERT] menu. Select [1 WATCH ALERT] and set desired watch interval. The [Watch] box appears at the bottom-left position. (The watch interval can also be selected from the [Watch] box when the watch alert feature is active. Right-click the time indication in the [Watch] box to show a drop-down list of watch intervals. Select a watch interval from the list.) Watch box T The timer counts down from the interval set and when the time interval elapses; • the buzzer sounds • the visual alert 500 “Watch Alert” flashes in yellow in the [Alert] box • the watch alert timer freezes at "0:00." Stop the flashing visual alert with the ALARM ACK key on the Control Unit or click the [Alert] box. If the alert is not acknowledged within one minute, the alert category changes to “warning” (the Alert 500 flashes in red in the [Alert] box and the buzzer sounds). After the alert is acknowledged the count-down sequence is repeated. Note: The countdown can be restarted, before the count reaches 0:00, by clicking the countdown indication in the watch box. 2-38 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.28 Information Box The information box shows navigation data and, when following a route set on the chart display, route information is also shown. 2.28.1 Information box contents Navigation data • Depth, analog and graph • Current (tide) direction and speed • Wind direction and speed • Water temperature • Current and wind gauge Nav data requires appropriate navigation sensors and IEC 61162-1/2 sentences output from the sensor. If there is no sentence or data input, asterisks (**) appear at the corresponding indication. NAV data Route 1 0 100 200 Depth graph -30 300 400 500 -10 min m -20 N Current and wind gauge (See inset.) W Route 2 Depth : 403 m Depth Water TEMP : 3.7°C Water temperature Wind True-North 124.5° 20.1 kn E Current 177.6°T 25.9 kn S Wind direction and speed Current direction and speed Current and wind gauge N Heading W Current direction E S Wind direction 2-39 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Route information The route 1 information displays route name, plan speed, plan course, course to steer, channel limit, and off track. The route 2 information displays waypoint no., distance to WOP (wheel over point), time to go, planning turn radius, turn rate, next waypoint no., bearing to next waypoint. Click the [Route 1] or [Route 2] tab to find route information. 2 ROUTE10 10 2 17 123 2 T 0 10 27 123 2 T 08 250 2 00 45 4 3 123 7 T Route 1 2.28.2 How to show the information box 1. Open the menu and select [4 INFORMATION BOX]. 2. Select [1 DISP INFO BOX] then [ON]. 3. Close the menu. 2-40 Route 2 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.28.3 How to turn NAV data on/off Wind, depth, ocean current and water temperature may be set up as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [4 INFORMATION BOX]. 2. Select [2 SET NAV DATA]. 3. Set up the nav data referring to the table below. Item [1 DEPTH] Description Selects the unit of depth measurement, or turn depth indication off. [2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE] Selects depth scale range. The depth for the last 30 minutes is plotted with a yellow line. The [Auto] setting automatically adjusts the scale according to depth. [3 DEPTH MARK] Selects the depth at which to show the depth mark. [4 CURRENT] Turns the current (tide) display on (current relative to North) or off. [5 WIND] Selects the unit of wind speed measurement. [6 WIND STAB] Selects Wind vector format, among three choices: [APPARENT]: Apparent wind measured by wind meter, with ship's bow as reference. [NORTH]: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with North as reference. [THEORETICAL]: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with ship's bow as reference. [7 TEMPERATURE] Selects the unit of water temperature measurement, or turns water temperature indication off. Note: Appropriate sensors are required to display any data. The wind vector shows a direction from which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and is labeled "T *". Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for own ship's speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is shown relative to bow in head-up, cursor gyro and course-up, and reference to North in north-up and true motion. 4. Close the menu. 2-41 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.29 Interswitch The interswitch uses a network to transfer multiple radar signals to the monitor units connected in the network. A master/slave relation can be set for a single radar signal and that signal can be shown on multiple displays. Up to four antennas and four display units can be connected. Set the radar display and antenna groups from the [Antenna] button on the Status bar. When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set at installation) for that antenna are automatically applied. The [Antenna] button on the Status bar shows current antenna selection. [Antenna] button - ANT-3(M): Antenna no. 3, (M)=Master (or (S)=Slave) - X-BAND (or S-BAND) Note: Switch to a different antenna or change the interswitch settings in the standby mode. 2.29.1 Displaying antenna information The [ANT SELECT] menu shows: • Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna currently powered. (If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.) • Current antenna and display combinations. To show antenna information, open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [5 ANT SELECT] menus. ANT 1 : X-BAND 25UP Main Top ANT 2 : S-BAND 30UP Main 2nd Using the information displayed in this example the antenna system configuration would look something like this. ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT 3 : X-BAND 12 Fore ← Antenna Unit ANT 4 : X-BAND 12 Aft ← Power Supply Unit DISP1 DISP2 HUB-3000 2-42 ANT4 DISP3 DISP4 ← Processor Unit 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.29.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to select the no. 1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit. 1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [5 ANT SELECT] menus. 2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For example, select [DISP2] to select the no. 2 display unit. 3. Select [ANT 1] and [M]. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other display and antenna combinations. 5. Click [STORE INTER-SW] and select [YES] to save your selections. 6. Close the menu. Antenna selection considerations • An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one Master display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display last-set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically changed to slave. • An antenna unit without a Master display cannot be selected on the sub display units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number display is automatically set as master. • If the Alert 750 “EXT Radar COM Error” appears, do one of the following as applicable: • If only your antenna is not displayed on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line in the Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode. • If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line in other Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, see the preceding page for how to select a different antenna unit. • When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is possible. • Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending on selection as Master or Slave (see the table on the next page). • When connecting with the FAR-2xx7 series radar, the maximum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu. For details, see the installation manual. • Do not use the interswitch function when the icing prevention feature (see section 2.40) is active. Compatibility of display and operation • When connecting with FCR-2xx9 series radar The FCR-2xx9 is compatible with the FAR-3xx0 in display and operation. For example, when switching the antenna from FAR-3xx0 to FCR-2xx9, the image for FCR2xx9 is displayed on the screen and each function is operative, and vice versa. 2-43 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION • When connecting with FAR-2xx7 series radar When switching the antenna from FAR-3xx0 to FAR-2xx7, the image for FAR-2xx7 is displayed on the screen and each function is operative. However, when switching the antenna from FAR-2xx7 to FAR-3xx0, the following functions are not operative. • Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function • Selection of the transmit frequency by the [TX CH] button for solid state radar Radar Functions AIS function Brilliance Echo trails EBL Lat/long data Orientation mode Speed data TT, AIS on/off TT, AIS track interval Vector mode Vector time VRM Range Reference Point A/C SEA A/C RAIN Auto Rain Gain Echo stretch Echo averaging IR Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Picture setting (Customize echo) Performance monitor SART STBY/TX Tuning TT Lost alert TT CPA/TCPA alert TT ALARM ACK TT acquire TT/AIS AZ 2.29.3 Control Master Display Option Independent Slave Display Option Desired value can be set Desired value can be set Dependent control Common control Cannot control Item commonly controlled Item commonly controlled How to select an antenna For the ship that carries multiple antennas, you can select the antenna to use. Click the [Antenna] button to select the antenna. 2-44 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.30 Dual Radar (B-type only) When installing two FAR-3xx0 series radars, the image from both radars (main radar and external radar) may be shown together on one radar display. This allows you to take advantage of the best characteristics each type of radar has to offer. The dual radar function is available only for the B type. Image from main radar Image from external radar Example image of dual radar The following should be done from the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu at the time of installation in order to enable the dual radar display: • Set the display area on both the main radar and the external radar ([2 COMBINE SECTOR], [3 COMBINE RANGE]). • Select the number of external radar to use ([4 EXT RADAR]). • Turn the dual radar function on ([5 COMBINE FUNC] is set to [ON]). TT information When a TT target crosses over the boundary line of the display area, its information is passed to the other radar display. Tracking on the TT continues. The number of the antenna which acquires a TT target is displayed in front of the TT number. TT TT TT target crosses over the boundary line of the display area. Boundary lines of display area TT information is passed to the other radar display. Tracking on the TT continues. 2-45 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.30.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display Turn on the power of main radar and external radar to set them in standby. The dual radar function is not available when one of two radars is in TX (transmit) state or turned off. From the menu 1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO] and [9 DUAL RADAR]. 2. Select [COMBINE] to enable the dual radar display. To disable the dual radar display, select [OFF]. 3. Close the menu. From the antenna button 1. Right-click the [Antenna] button on the Status bar to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Dual Radar]. 3. Select [Combine]. To disable the dual radar display, select [Off]. "(D)" appears in the [Antenna] button on the Status bar when the dual radar display is enabled. ANT-1(D) X-BAND 2.30.2 "(D)" appears on the [Antenna] button when the dual radar display is enabled. Operating considerations for the dual radar display In the dual radar mode, you can operate the antenna displayed in the [Antenna] button on the Status bar. To operate the other antenna, select it in the [Antenna] button on the Status bar. You can toggle each radar between standby and TX in the dual radar display. When switching to the standby mode, the Alert 730 "EXT Radar STBY" appears and the radar echoes are not displayed. The following functions are based on the settings in the radar which enables the dual radar display. These settings are common with two radars. • • • • Off-center display Range scale Presentation mode Electronic chart on/off • CU/TM reset • Trail settings • TT lost target filter Notes • The dual radar function is available between two FAR-3xx0 series radars using the LAN. FAR-2xx7 and FCR-2xx9 are not available. • When a transmission error occurs between two radars in the dual radar mode, the Alert 750 "EXT Radar COM Error" appears and the dual radar function is turned off. • The dual radar display is not available on the external radar which overlays the main radar image even though the dual radar is turned on. • If TT data (two places) are passed between two radars (see page 2-45), TT targets are lost in the external equipment using TT informations (TTM) of this equipment. 2-46 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Restrictions The followings are the restrictions of the dual radar function. • A REF (reference) mark can be entered on the display of the main radar but not the external radar. • TT targets can be acquired manually. [TT SELECT] is set to manual acquisition. • The reference position is set to [CCRP] (see section 2.33). Set the same CCRP position between two radars at the time of installation. • [ECHO AREA] is set to [CIRCLE] (see section 2.38). • The following functions are not available in the dual radar mode. • Performance monitor • SART • Tune initialize • TT simulation mode • Icing prevention • Interswitch 2-47 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.31 Performance Monitor The performance monitor, installed in the antenna unit, produces a visual indication on the radar display screen when the radar transmitter power and the radar receiver sensitivity and tuning are within the prescribed limits. A graph is also provided and it shows degradation of TX/RX/Power over time. How to activate, deactivate the performance monitor To activate, deactivate the performance monitor, do the following. Note: Activate, deactivate the performance monitor in TX (transmit) state. 1. Set the radar in TX (transmit) state. 2. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu. 3. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON] (B type) or [5 PERFORMANCE MON] (IMO and A types). 4. Select [ON] or [GRAPH ONLY] as appropriate. [ON]: Activate the performance monitor. The performance monitor graph is displayed. [GRAPH ONLY]: Display the performance monitor graph. (The performance monitor is not executed.) 5. Select [0], [2], [3], [5] or [6] in [ARC] (see "How to set the number of arcs" on page 2-49). 6. Close the menu after 30 seconds. 7. When selecting [ON] or [GRAPH ONLY], the performance monitor graph is displayed in the information box. Click [X] to close the PM graph. Value for degradation of transmission/ reception/total power 8 -10.2 dB Total transmission time Graph for transmission/ reception/total power A total of 10 dB loss 8. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu. 9. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON] (B type) or [5 PERFORMANCE MON] (IMO and A types). 10. Select [OFF] to deactivate the performance monitor. 11. Close the menu. The icon "PM" appears in the indication area (see paragraph 1.6.1) when the performance monitor is active. Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn off the blind sector in order to display echoes correctly. 2-48 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION The radar is automatically set as follows when the performance monitor is activated. Item CONDITION CUSTOMIZE ECHO EAV ES GAIN IR LOW LEVEL ECHO NOISE REJECT OFF center Presentation Mode PULSE RAIN RAIN AUTO RANGE SEA SEA AUTO TUNE VIDEO CONTRAST WIPER Setting at activation of PM Setting stored Grayed out, setting stored OFF OFF Adjustable while PM is active No No Setting at deactivation of PM Setting before activation Return to active display No No 70 *1 OFF Setting stored Yes*3 No No Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting before activation OFF No Setting before activation Yes Yes Setting at deactivation Setting at deactivation No No No OFF 2 Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting stored * LONG 0 MAN 24 NM, 24 SM, 48 km, 48 kyd 0 MAN AUTO 4B Yes *4 Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting at deactivation No No No No Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting before activation Setting before activation OFF No Setting before activation 1 * Gain is automatically set according to [PM GAIN ADJ] if it was adjusted at installation. *2 North-up RM is selected when the mode is North-up TM. *3 The setting is not memorized. *4 The performance monitor is deactivated if the range is changed. How to check radar performance The range scale is automatically set to 24 NM. The radar screen will show arcs. You can set the number of arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working order in as much as the original state when the monitor was turned on, the innermost arc should appear between 8.0 NM and 19.8 NM. The performance monitor can observe a total of 10 dB loss in the transmitter and receiver. Note 1: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC]. Note 2: When [ARC] (the number of arcs) is set to [0] (see "How to set the number of arcs" below), there are no arc indications. Only the performance monitor graph is displayed in the information box. How to set the number of arcs 1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON] (B type) or [5 PERFORMANCE MON] (IMO and A types). 2. Select [0], [2], [3], [5] or [6] in [ARC]. 2-49 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 3. Close the menu. Note: The lengths and location of the arcs may change with the direction in which the antenna unit is installed. Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 60° from arc location to confirm if the radar is working properly or not. Turn off the performance monitor when finished. The following illustrations in the table are the examples when [ARC] is set to [5]. Display Transmitter, receiver state Transmitter: Normal Receiver: Normal 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM Transmitter and receiver: No arc indicates 10 dB loss. Contact your dealer for advice. (For a magnetron radar, have a technician check the magnetron.) 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM Note: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC]. 2.32 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types) After replacing the magnetron for the antenna unit, reset the TX time then adjust the PM gain as follows: 1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING]. 2. Select [9 MAGNETRON RESET]. MENU INITIAL SETTING ← MAGNETRON RESET 1 TX TIME 4000H 2 PM GAIN ADJ AUTO/ 0 3. Select [1 TX TIME] then set the transmit time to 000000.0H. 4. Select [2 PM GAIN ADJ]. 5. Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL]. [AUTO]: PM gain is automatically adjusted. Go to step 7. [MANUAL]: Set PM gain manually. Go to step 6. 6. Adjust the PM gain manually as follows: Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn off the blind sector before adjusting the PM gain. 2-50 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 1) Set the radar settings as follows: • Range: 24 NM • Pulse Length: Long • A/C SEA: OFF (turn off manually) • A/C RAIN: OFF (turn off manually) • Echo Averaging (EAV): OFF • Video Contrast: 2-B 2) Adjust the gain so that a slight amount of white noise appears on the screen. Arcs for the performance monitor appear on the screen. 3) Set [PM GAIN ADJ] so that the outer arc faintly appears. The setting range is 0 to 255. Wait at least eight scans then adjust. The following illustration is an example when [ARC] is set to [5] (see "How to set the number of arcs" on page 2-49). Before setup After setup 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM 8.1 NM to 10.1 NM Approx. 12.1 NM (10 dB) Note: The location of the arcs changes with the setting of [ARC]. 7. Close the menu. 2.33 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point) The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading line, stern mark, etc.) can be the antenna position or CCRP, which is a location on own ship to which all horizontal measurements, for example range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA), are normally referenced. To select the reference position, click the button below [REF point] at the top-left position to select [ANT] or [CCRP] as appropriate. Click button to switch Conning position set at center of display Radar antenna position set at center of display ANT position CCRP position The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as above. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display area, the bearing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail. 2-51 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference point as shown in the table below. Category Range and bearing measurement Graphics Item EBL VRM Cursor PI line Range ring Drop mark Heading line Stern mark Beam line Own ship vector Own ship track Bearing cursor CPA, TCPA 2-52 Drawn from CCRP Drawn with CCRP at center Calculated with CCRP at center Course, speed BCR, BCT Own ship data Reference point CCRP Antenna position Range and bearing Range and bearing measured from measured from anCCRP tenna position Heading Speed Course over ground Speed over ground Own L/L Drawn from antenna position Drawn with antenna position at center Calculated with antenna position at center Calculated with Calculated with anCCRP at center tenna position at center Calculated from bow position Data from sensor, regardless of reference point selected Location of the CCRP 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.34 Drop Mark The drop mark is used to find the angle and distance from a point to your ship. This can be useful for marking a point to avoid while navigating to a destination. The drop marks can be shown or hidden on the screen. Drop mark The Drop mark box shows the angle and distance between the drop mark and your ship. Minimize button Drop mark no. (1 or 2) Drop angle Drop distance Note: The drop mark feature is inoperative when position data is lost. 2.34.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box The drop mark box can be shown or hidden by trackball. OFF: Click the arrow on the [Drop mark] box or right-click the box and select [DROPx Off] (x=Drop mark no.). ON: Click the minimize box. 2.34.2 How to inscribe a drop mark Click the desired Drop mark box at the bottom of the screen. Click a position on the display area where to put a drop mark, and a drop mark is inscribed at the position selected. The angle and distance to the point appear in the corresponding Drop mark box. 2.34.3 Drop mark bearing reference The bearing of a drop mark is automatically referenced to True or Relative according to the orientation mode. Orientation mode Head-up RM STAB Head-up RM Stern-up RM Course-up RM North-up RM North-up TM Bearing reference Relative True 2-53 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.34.4 How to erase a drop mark Erase drop mark from menu 1. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus. 2. Select [7 DROP MARK] (B type) or [6 DROP MARK] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [ON] or [OFF]. 4. Close the menu. Erase drop mark by trackball Right-click the applicable Drop mark box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Drop1 Off] (or [Drop2 Off]). The drop mark and its data are erased. 2.35 Anchor Watch The anchor watch is used to monitor if the ship is staying at anchor. If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the Alert 495 "Anchor Watch Error" appears in the [Alert] box and the audio alarm sounds. Alarm setting Your ship's position, where you start the anchor watch. : Alarm triggered How to activate anchor watch 1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [4 ALERT] menus. 2. Select [2 ANCHOR WATCH]. 3. Select [ON]. Use the scrollwheel to set the alarm radius (0.01 to 9.99 NM). 4. Close the menu. 2-54 0.01NM 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.36 SART 2.36.1 What is an SART? A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 NM. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. Screen B: When SART is close Screen A: When SART is distant Radar antenna beamwidth Echo from SART Echo from SART (Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric arcs.) (Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric arcs.) Own ship position Own ship position Position of SART Position of SART 1.5 NM 24 NM 2.36.2 How to receive an SART This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detection. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen. Note: For solid state radar, the SART function is not available. 1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu. 2. Select [7 SART] (B type) or [6 SART] (IMO and A types). 3. Select [ON]. 4. Close the menu. The icon "SART" appears in the indication area (see paragraph 1.6.1) when the SART function is active. When the SART is activated the radar controls are automatically set as follows. Setting at activation of SART feature Adjustable during activation of SART feature CONDITION Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation CUSTOMIZE ECHO Grayed out, setting stored No Return to active display EAV OFF No Setting before activation ES OFF No Setting before activation Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation Item GAIN Setting at deactivation of SART feature 2-55 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Setting at activation of SART feature Adjustable during activation of SART feature Setting at deactivation of SART feature OFF No Setting before activation Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation NOISE REJECT OFF No Setting before activation OFF center OFF Yes Setting at deactivation Setting stored *1 Yes Setting at deactivation LONG No Setting at deactivation Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation MAN No Setting before activation 12 NM, 12 SM, 24 km, 24 kyd Yes *2 Setting at deactivation SEA Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation SEA AUTO Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation TUNE Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation VIDEO CONTRAST Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation WIPER Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation Item IR LOW LEVEL ECHO Presentation Mode PULSE RAIN RAIN AUTO RANGE *1 North-up RM selected when the mode is North-up TM. *2 The SART feature is deactivated if the range is changed. 2.37 Alert Box, Alert List 2.37.1 Alert box When an alert condition is found, the applicable alert message and alert ID appear in the [Alert] box. For the alarm- and warning-type alerts a buzzer sounds. The [Alert] box is composed of the four items shown in the figure below. See chapter 20 for details. Buzzer stop icon (Click to stop buzzer temporarily.) Alert state icon Alert message (Alert ID and alert name) 2-56 Alert list/log icon (Click to display.) 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.37.2 Alert list The [Alert List] displays the status of the latest 900 system alerts, in order of generation, latest to the earliest. To display the list, click the Alert list/log icon in the [Alert] box. The Alert list/log icon is light-blue when the list is displayed. A maximum of nine alerts are shown per page. Unacknowledged alerts are displayed in flashing red (alarm) or flashing yellow-orange (warning). The ZDA sentence is required to display time in the list. Click to close list. • Click to close list. (Press ← on the Control Unit to close list.) • [BACK] shown when there are two or more pages. Switch to previous page in multiple page displays. The name of the alert not acknowledged or not rectified. Status icon Switch to next page in multiple page displays. (Not shown when only one page exists.) How to acknowledge or rectify from the list Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key. Trackball module: Click alarm name. How to find details about an alert Click the status icon in the list to show details about an alert. Alert Number : 255 Source: No. 2 Chart Radar Description: Gyro 1 COM Error Detail : Gyro 1 COM Error 2.37.3 Changing priority of primary alerts Alerts are categorized and prioritized as shown below. Priority Alert category High Alarm Middle Warning Low Caution If desired, you can specify the events that are to have the same priority as “Alarm”. 1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTINGS] and [4 ALERT] menus. 2-57 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2. Select [3 PRIMARY ALERT]. 3. Click the box to the left of an alarm name to show a circle to give that alarm the same priority as the alert category "Alarm." 4. Close the menu. Note: The priority is immediately changed for an inactive alert. For an active alert, the priority selected becomes effective when the alert is acknowledged and regenerated. 2.38 Echo Area The echo display area for the B-type radar can be selected for [CIRCLE] or [WIDE]. CIRCLE WIDE To select the echo display area type to use, open the menu, select the [1 ECHO] menu then set [2 ECHO AREA] to [CIRCLE] or [WIDE] as appropriate. 2.39 Echo Color The default echo color is yellow. Echo color is also available in the following colors: B type: Yellow, green, white, amber, and “color”. “Color” displays echoes in red, yellow or green corresponding to the signal levels of strong, medium and weak. IMO and A types: Yellow, green and white. To select the echo color, open the [1 ECHO] menu then select desired color from [3 ECHO COLOR] (B type) or [2 ECHO COLOR] (IMO and A types). 2-58 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.40 Icing Prevention You can rotate the antenna (24 rpm) without transmission to keep the antenna from freezing. 1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] menu. Select [9 ICING PREVENTION] (IMO type) or [0 ICING PREVENTION] (A and B types). 2. Select [ON]. The following message appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. Click [Start Antenna Rotation] to rotate the antenna without transmission. The message changes as follow. To stop the antenna rotation, click [Stop Antenna Rotation]. [STBY TX] is grayed out. ACE ACE ICING PREVENTION Rotate Antenna to Prevent Icing. Start Antenna Rotation When the antenna stops ICING PREVENTION Antenna Rotating, No TX. Stop Antenna Rotation When the antenna rotates With this feature active and the antenna stopped, pushing the STBY/TX key on the Control Unit or click the [STBY TX] button on the Status bar rotates the antenna and transmits pulses. Operating one of the above-mentioned controls again stops transmission but the antenna rotates. 2-59 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.41 Chart Radar Functions 2.41.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes Click the [CHART ON/OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar to show or hide the chart. [Chart ON/OFF] button Indication on button and corresponding mode [Chart ON]: Chart radar mode active. (Chart and radar picture are displayed.) [Chart OFF]: Radar mode active. (Only the radar picture is displayed.) When the GPS position is lost, the chart radar mode cannot be used. When this occurs, the label on the button shows [Chart OFF] and the button is grayed out. 2.41.2 How to show or hide chart objects The [Chart Disp] button on the InstantAccess bar has several buttons which control chart object visibility. 1 No. 2-60 Item 2 3 4 5 Function 1 [Coast Line Only] Hold down the left button to temporarily display only the coastline. Chart symbols (depth contours, navigation buoys, etc.) are temporarily erased from the screen. 2 [Chart Top Layer] Hold down the left button to temporarily put the chart objects (buoy, lighthouse, etc.) on the top layer. 3 [Chart DISP Menu] Show the [CHART DISPLAY] menu, where you set safety contours, safety depth, etc. See the figure on the next page for the content of this menu and see section 8.2 "How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects" for details. Note: This menu can also be shown by right-clicking the [CHART ON/OFF] button and selecting [Chart Display Menu]. 4 [Sel DISP Object] Show the [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] menu, where you can select the chart objects and text to show or hide. See the next page for the menus and see section 8.3 "How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features" (symbol display) for details. 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION No. 5 Item [Chart Legend] Function Show the chart legend for the current chart. See chapters 9 and 10 for a description of the chart legends. [CHART DISPLAY] menu 2-61 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION [IMPORTANT TEXT] [STANDARD ITEMS] [OTHER ITEMS] [OTHER TEXT] [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] menu 2.41.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects You can create one custom set of chart display objects and recall them when required. For example, you can create a custom set of chart display objects to display when you navigate a certain coastline. How to create a custom set of chart display objects 1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [2 SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] menus. 2. Open the [2 STANDARD ITEMS], [3 OTHER ITEMS], [4 IMPORTANT TEXT] and [5 OTHER TEXT] menus and turn objects and text on or off as appropriate. 3. Click [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] on the menu. 4. Select [1 SAVE TO PERSONAL] to save the settings. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to overwrite current settings to PERSONAL?" appears. 5. Click the [OK] button to save the settings. How to activate the custom set of chart display objects Click the [Chart database] button (see paragraph 2.41.4) on the Status bar then select [PERSONAL]. 2-62 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.41.4 Chart database information You can select the quantity of objects and text to display on the chart radar screen, with the [Chart database] button on the Status bar. There are four different pre-defined settings available and one user-definable ([PERSONAL]). Indication of selected setting appears on the label of the [Chart database] button. The [Chart ON/OFF] button (on the InstantAccess bar) must be ON to show the [Chart database] button. The [Chart database] button is grayed out if the [Chart ON/OFF] button is OFF. [Chart database] button 2.41.5 Selection Setting in [SEL DISP OBJECT] menu [IMO Base] Nothing checked in [STANDARD ITEMS], [OTHER ITEMS] or [IMPORTANT TEXT]. [IMO Primary] Nothing else checked but [BUOYS AND BEACONS] in [STANDARD ITEMS]. This is the "Primary Chart Information Set (PCIS)", based on IEC 62388 Ed.2 section12.1.5.1, IEC61174 and IMO Resolution MSC.232(82). [IMO Standard] All objects checked in [STANDARD ITEMS]; nothing checked in [OTHER ITEMS] or [IMPORTANT TEXT]. [IMO All] Everything checked in [STANDARD ITEMS], [OTHER ITEMS] and [IMPORTANT TEXT]. [PERSONAL] Use the settings recorded for [STANDARD ITEMS], [OTHER ITEMS], [IMPORTANT TEXT] and [OTHER TEXT]. Chart scale indications The system alerts you to the availability of larger scale ENC and overscale, at the top-left position. Location of chart scale indications When the radar display range is higher than the chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication, "Larger scale ENC" is displayed. For example, the radar range is 24 NM and the range available with the ENC chart is less than 12 NM. When the radar display range is lower than the chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication "Overscale x.xx" (x.xx=overscale factor). For example, the radar range is 0.25 NM and the chart scale is 0.5 NM. If both conditions exist, both indications are displayed. 2.41.6 Chart status The indication "Chart Status" appears at the top-right position on the screen when the display date for the currently displayed chart has passed. 2-63 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.41.7 Chart alert function The chart alert function operates in chart mode only. There are two types of chart alerts: your ship's predicted course, and route alert. See chapter 11 for details. For the ship's predicted course alert, the operator sets a safety contour. (See paragraph 8.2.1 for how to set a safety contour suitable for the ship.) The operator also sets the parameters for own ship predicted movement. (See section 11.2 "How to Activate Own Ship Check".) For the route alert, route planning (see section 12.3 "How to Create a New Route") and route monitoring (see section 14.1 "How to Select the Route to Monitor") functions are available. 2.41.8 Notes details "Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to a specific ship position. The chart radar compares the Notes position and own ship position and displays the Notes when own ship is at the distance from the Notes specified in route planning. To display the Notes at other times, right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu, then select [Notes Detail]. In the example below the Notes about a wreck are shown. Wreck area Wreck within circle 2-64 • [Object name]: The name assigned to the Notes. • [Object class]: The type of object (point, line, area or circle) linked to the Notes. • [Position]: Position of the object in latitude and longitude. • [Range]: The range to the object. • [Description]: A description of the object, input in the Voyage planning mode. 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.42 Radar Observation 2.42.1 General Minimum range The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5 or 0.75 NM, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the pulse length, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement. Maximum range The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the atmospheric conditions. Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is given in the following equation. R max= 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 ) where Rmax: radar horizon (NM) h1: antenna height (m) h2: target height (m) Radar horizon Optical horizon For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is; R max = 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 NM It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs the radar signal). X-band and S-band In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant difference between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an Sband radar would have better detection than an X-band radar. Radar resolution There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution and range resolution. 2-65 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Bearing resolution Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets which are at the same range and close together. It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be chosen for a bearing resolution better than 2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer. Range resolution Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined by pulse length only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars. Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of 10 m2 (Xband) or 1 m2 (S-band). Bearing accuracy One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship's heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range. 2.42.2 False echoes Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you understand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below. Multiple echoes Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the sea clutter. True echo Target Own ship 2-66 Multiple echo 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Sidelobe echoes Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the beam, called "sidelobes." If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or sea clutter. Mainlobe (beam) True target Sidelobe Sidelobe Antenna False echoes by sidelobes Virtual image A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen. Target ship Route for direct reflection Own ship True echo Bridge Route for indirect reflection False echo Mirror image of target ship 2-67 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION Shadow sectors Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sector may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected. Radar antenna Radar mast Shadow sector 2.42.3 RACON A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequency spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general, the RACON signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate. RACON 2.42.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) An RTE is a radar transponder that is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and re-transmits it, with the intention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display. The RTE can be detected on both X-band and S-band radars. 2-68 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION 2.42.5 Solid state radar A solid state radar transmits and receives using pulse compression beyond synthesis distance (approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM (depending on the pulse length)), and using noncompression within synthesis distance. The radar echoes of a solid state radar are synthesized echoes using these two methods. The objects may be displayed differently when compared to the echoes from a magnetron radar. : Non-compression : Pulse compression Synthesis distance* *: Approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM (depending on the pulse length) Range and signal intensity When the range is beyond synthesis distance using pulse compression, the signal intensity is equivalent to a magnetron radar, although the transmission power is lower. When the range is within synthesis distance using non-compression, the signal intensity (including sea clutter and rain clutter) is lower than a magnetron radar because of the transmission power difference. When an object enters to the synthesis distance, it is displayed with lower signal intensity. Range sidelobe As a result of pulse compression, range sidelobes may appear to the front and rear of a strong reflected echo. When the direction of the echo changes, the reflection weakens and the range sidelobes may disappear. Range sidelobes can also be removed by reducing the gain. Range sidelobes Echo 2-69 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION This page is intentionally left blank. 2-70 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.1 About TT The TT tracks and plots the movement of up to 200 radar targets and fully complies with IMO standards for TT. The TT automatically tracks an automatically or manually acquired radar target and calculates its course and speed, indicating them with a vector. Since the data generated by the TT depends on the radar targets selected, the radar must be optimally tuned for use with the TT, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unnecessary targets like sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked. Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.) The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the target. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 seconds for the lower relative speed. The following factors can affect accuracy: • Echo intensity • Radar transmission pulse length • Radar bearing error • Gyrocompass error • Course change (own ship and targets) 3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display Click the TT mode indication at the bottom-right position to show [OFF] to hide the TT display, or [AUTO]*, [MAN]* or [MAN/AUTO]* to show the TT display. You can right-click the TT mode indication to show a contextsensitive menu with the choices shown above. In this case, click the applicable option. * The indication shown depends on the setting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT•AIS] menu. 3-1 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, SOG, or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects) taken from this radar. Manual input is also possible. For automatic or manual speed input, see section 1.14. For echo-referenced speed input see the next section. 3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when: • The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar. • The vessel has no device that can measure ship's leeward movement (doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) when leeward movement cannot be disregarded. If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative to a fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They appear as tracked targets, each denoted with a small circle. When a plural number of objects are selected, the mean value is used. Note: This feature is not available when the AIS is active. 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [REF Mark]. 2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.1 to 24 NM from own ship. 3. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the target selected at step 2. 4. Push the left button to insert the reference mark. Changes to R01 in three minutes R01 5. Repeat steps 2-4 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be entered. 6. Right click the Sensor information, datum box then select [Select Sensor] and [Setting]. Open the [SPD] page and put a checkmark at [Reference SPD]. Click the [OK] button to finish. Notes on speed input by reference target • Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed. • Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed. Relative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow, hampering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision. • Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A moving target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in wrong collision avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target produces inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost. • When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the reference target mark flashes and the Alert 528 "REF Target Lost" appears in the [Alert] box. If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication disappears. Select a different reference target if the currently selected one is lost. 3-2 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) • When all tracked targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the target-based speed becomes invalid. • Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate. How to cancel echo-referenced speed input Right click the Sensor information, datum box then select [Select Sensor] and [Setting]. Open the [SPD] page and select a speed sensor. 3.4 Automatic Acquisition This radar can automatically acquire and track a maximum of 200 targets. The maximum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) is set at the time of installation. The options are 200 ([MAX]) and 100. The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the setting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu. A target just acquired automatically is marked with a dashed circle and a vector appears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. Within three minutes, the initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At this time, the dashed circle changes to a solid circle. Note: When connecting with the FAR-2xx7 series radar, the maximum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu. For details, see the installation manual. 3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition 1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu. 2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition. [NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX] Menu setting Acquisition condition [MANUAL 200] 200 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition [AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 150 targets manually [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, 100 targets manually [AUTO 150] 150 targets automatically, 50 targets manually [AUTO 200] 200 targets automatically, Not available for manual acquisition [NUMBER OF TT] is [100] Menu setting Acquisition condition [MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition [AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually [AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually [AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, Not available for manual acquisition 3. Close the menu. Note 1: The TT indication in the TT/AIS setting box shows [AUTO], [MAN/AUTO] or [MAN] depending on the acquisition condition selected. Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets have been acquired, the Alert 523 "TT Auto ACQ 100%" appears in the [Alert] box. 3-3 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone You can set an automatic acquisition zone to automatically track any targets entering the zone. The acquisition zone can be fan-shaped or polygonal. The maximum tracking range is set during the installation. Fan-shaped zone of AZ1: The range is fixed at 3 - 6 NM (width 0.5 - 1.0 NM). Fan-shaped zone of AZ2: The range is available between 0.7 - 24 (or 32) NM (width 0.5 - 1.0 NM) Polygon zone of AZ2: The zone can be set within the range of 0.125 NM to 120 NM. Note: When processing two acquisition zones, create the zones in numerical order and turn them off in reverse numerical order. To set the zone for AZ2, first set the zone for AZ1. To turn off the zone for AZ1, first turn off the zone for AZ2. When a target enters an acquisition zone, the following occurs: • • • • the buzzer sounds the Alert 521 "TT New Target" appears in the [Alert] box the symbol of the target is red and flashes the AIS function is automatically turned on if it is off 1. Click one of the boxes AZ1 or AZ2 at the right side of the screen. The indication in the AZ box changes from [OFF] to [SET]. For example, click here for AZ1. 2. Click point A. 3. Click point B. The indication in the AZ box changes from [SET] to [WORK]. 340 350 000 010 Acquisition zone 020 030 330 320 040 310 Other acquisition zone examples Point A X 050 Point B 060 300 A 290 070 B 280 080 090 270 260 100 250 X X Point A X Point B 110 240 120 230 130 140 220 210 150 200 190 180 170 160 Note 1: You are alerted when the capacity for automatic acquisition is 95% and 100%. These alerts are 522 "TT Auto ACQ 95%" and 523 "TT Auto ACQ 100%". Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone, the AZ box shows [OUT]. If the left button is pushed in this state, the acquisition alarm zone goes into [SLEEP] state (inactive). 3-4 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) How to sleep, deactivate an acquisition zone Use the trackball to select the appropriate AZ box. Sleep or deactivate the acquisition zone as appropriate: Sleep acquisition zone: Push the left button momentarily to remove the acquisition zone from the screen. The indication in the AZ box changes from [WORK] to [SLEEP]. To reactivate and display the acquisition zone, repeat this procedure to display [WORK]. Deactivate acquisition zone: Click applicable AZ box and select [OFF]. How to acknowledge the acquisition zone audio alarm Press the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box. Acquisition zone stabilization The acquisition zone may be referenced to heading or North. Open the menu then select the [TT•AIS] and [1 ACQUISITION ZONE] menus. Set [1 AZ STAB] to [STAB HDG] or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate. For a polygon acquisition zone, stabilization can be selected to [2 AZ POLYGON]. 3.5 Manual Acquisition This radar can manually acquire and track a maximum of 200 targets. The maximum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) is set at the time of installation. The options are 200 ([MAX]) and 100. The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the setting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu. Note: When connecting with the FAR-2xx7 series radar, the maximum number of acquired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu. For details, see the installation manual. 3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions 1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu. 2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition. [NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX] Menu setting Acquisition condition [MANUAL 200] 200 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition [AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 150 targets manually [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, 100 targets manually [AUTO 150] 150 targets automatically, 50 targets manually [AUTO 200] 200 targets automatically, Not available for manual acquisition [NUMBER OF TT] is [100] Menu setting Acquisition condition [MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition [AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually [AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually [AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually [AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, Not available for manual acquisition 3. Close the menu. 3-5 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target Acquire a target from the Control Unit Use the trackball to put the cursor on the target you want to acquire. Push the ACQ/ ACT key. Acquire a target by the trackball module 1. When the target to acquire and the AIS symbol overlap one another, push the right button to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Target Data/ACQ/ACT] and [TT Only] to acquire the target. 2. Put the cursor on the target to acquire then push the left button. The plotting symbol is drawn by a dashed circle during the initial acquisition stage. A vector appears approximately one minute after acquisition. The vector indicates the motion trend of the target. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks. Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target should be within 24 NM (or 32 NM, depending on initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter. Note 2: You are alerted when the capacity of manual acquisition is 95% and 100%. These alerts are Alert 524 "TT MAN ACQ 95%" and Alert 525 "TT MAN ACQ 100%". If the capacity is 100% you cannot acquire more targets. Cancel tracking of nonthreatening targets if you wish to acquire additional targets manually. Note 3: When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets may be "swapped". When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come close to each other, one of the two may become a lost target. If this occurs, manual re-acquisition of the lost target may be necessary after the two have separated. Note 4: You can reuse a target number. This is useful when you acquire the “wrong” target. Drag and drop the symbol onto the correct target. 3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including reference targets) When the TT has acquired the menu-set number of targets, the Alert 523 "TT AUTO ACQ 100%" (automatic acquisition) or 525 "TT MAN ACQ 100%" (manual acquisition) appears in the [Alert] box and no more auto or manual acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this happen, cancel tracking of less important targets to acquire new targets. 3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets Cancel tracking on a target from the Control Unit 1. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the TT or reference target to cancel tracking. 2. Push the TARGET CANCEL key. Cancel tracking on a target by the trackball module 1. Right-click the target to show the context-sensitive menu. 3-6 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 2. Select [Target Cancel] and [Any] or [TT Only] as applicable. 3. Click the TT or reference target to cancel tracking. 3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs Cancel tracking on all target from the menu 1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu. 2. Select [2 ALL CANCEL]. 3. Select [YES]. 4. Close the menu. Cancel tracking on all target from the Control Unit Long-press the TARGET CANCEL key to erase all displayed TT target data. 3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes 3.7.1 TT symbols The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288. Symbol Default color Green Name Past position marker Green Target under acquisition Description Past position point Red Plotting symbol selected for a target acquired manually is shown in broken lines. Target under automatic ac- Thick, broken circle around an echo to inquisition dicate the target under acquisition and initial stage of tracking, before steadystate tracking. Acquired target Solid circle with vector indicating steady state tracking (within three minutes after acquisition) Acquired target in ACQ Solid circle with vector indicating steady zone (before acknowledg- state tracking (within three minutes after ment) acquisition) Dangerous target Dangerous TT (thick, solid circle) Green Reference target Green Association target Red Red Association dangerous target Lost target Used to calculate own ship’s over-theground speed (echo-referenced speed) for ground stabilization. Association TT is shown in AIS symbol and TT data. Association dangerous TT is shown in AIS symbol and TT data. Lost TT is shown with cross mark. Green Target selected TT selected to show its data. T White Trial maneuver S White TT test Displayed (flashing) during trial maneuver test. Displayed (flashing) during TT test. Red Green Red R01 3-7 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance 1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar then select [Brill Menu]. 2. Go to page 2, select [TT SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the brilliance. 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 3.7.3 Color for TT symbol You can select the color for the TT symbol as follows: 1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [Symbol Menu] to show that menu. 2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Yellow is available with the A- and B-type.) 3-8 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.8 How to Display TT Data The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO MSC.192(79) and IEC 62288, including display of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA of all tracked targets. The target bearing is show in relative bearing in the head-up mode and true bearing in the course-up, north-up and true motion modes, with the suffix "R" (Relative) or "T" (True). The target speed and course are shown as speed over the ground or speed through the water depending on speed source. 3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT You can show the data for two (19-inch display) or three (23-inch display) tracked targets in the TT information window. From the Control Unit Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key. By trackball module Click the target for which you want to show its data. Tracked target data z To erase data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button. z The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information: • TT no. Target numbering starts from "1". When a target is erased the number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 200 targets are acquired. • Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship • True speed over the ground (SOG) and true course over the ground (COG) of the target • CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the closest point and the TT is going away from own ship. • Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT) Title bar TT no. Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA TCPA Bow crossing range Bow crossing time 3-9 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.8.2 TT pop-up information The TT pop-up shows abbreviated TT data (target no., COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA) for the selected TT. Simply put the cursor on the TT symbol to show the pop-up. The popup can be enabled or disabled with [TT POP-UP INFO] in the [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu. 3.8.3 Target list The target list shows the data for all tracked targets and AIS targets. To show the list, click the [Target List] button at the right side of the screen or press the TARGET LIST key on the Control Unit. (The button is light-blue when the target list is displayed.) To close the list, click the Close button (X) on the list or press the TARGET LIST key. Sort targets by: Filter targets: CLOSE 1 TT Target No. 21 BRG: 125.5°T RNG 3.434NM CPA: 2.923NM TCPA: 12:00 2 AIS Target INFO: A FURUNO BRG: 120.2°T RNG: 5.211NM CPA: 3.345NM TCPA: 14:30 3 AIS Target INFO: B VOYAGER BRG: 88.2°T RNG: 7.321NM CPA: 3.662NM TCPA: 16:25 Click to refresh data AIS transponder class* (A, B, C) *Click “AIS Target” on the list to show or hide the indication. 0 Refresh data → Next How to sort the list You can sort the list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE, SPEED or NAME, with the [Sort by] drop-down list. How to filter the list The list shows all tracked targets and AIS targets received. If you do not need to see all targets you can filter unnecessary ones. Use the [Filter] drop-down list to select what targets to filter: Show all targets, TT only, AIS targets only, or show only the AIS targets that meet the criteria set on the [DISP FILTER] menu. 3-10 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.9 Vector Modes Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or North (True). Note: IMO recommends the use of the true vector mode in sea stabilization or relative vector mode for collision avoidance. 3.9.1 Description of vectors Stabilization modes It is important to select the optimum stabilization mode for the radar display. To assess risk of collision the relative motion of a target gives the clearest indication of CPA and may be monitored by observing either the direction of the target's relative trail, or the CPA predicted by the relative vector. By default, relative motion displays relative target trails and true motion displays true target trails. Where true target trails is selected, a sea stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion through the water. A ground stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion over the ground. In coastal, estuarial and river waters where a significant set and drift may be experienced, a sea stabilized display will produce significant target trails from all fixed (stationary) objects possibly producing an unacceptably high level of clutter and masking. In such circumstances a ground stabilized display may reduce its effect and enable the observer to detect clearly the trails of moving targets, thus enhancing the observer's situational awareness. However, the display should be considered only as an approximation of the course and speed made good over the ground. Among other factors, the accuracy of the ground-stabilization is affected by inaccuracies in speed and heading inputs as well as radar measurement imprecision and will require the display to be readjusted periodically. The information displayed should be interpreted with due regard to these factors. Note: It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar; the calculation of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccurate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or leeway. Ground stabilization and sea stabilization Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the page from the menu. Select for ground stabilization or for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indication shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S]. Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not be used when the radar is displaying AIS targets. 3-11 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) True vector In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered. In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (TrueG) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Manual selection is available with [Stabilization Mode] in the [SPD] page in the [Sensor Settings] menu. Speed selection True vector mode LOG(WT) True-S LOG(WTC) True-G LOG(BT) True-G GPS(BT) True-G REF(BT) True-G MAN(WT) True-S MAN(WTC) True-G Relative vector Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.) TT TT Current (Set and drift) Buoy Own Ship Own Ship Own Ship AIS AIS AIS True vectors in ground stabilization 3-12 TT Buoy Buoy True vectors in sea stabilization Relative vectors 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.9.2 Vector motion and length Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of vectors) can be set between 30 seconds and 60 minutes. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision with any target. From the Control Unit Vector motion: Push the VECTOR MODE key consecutively to select relative or true vector mode. Your selection is shown in the Vector mode indication. Vector length: Push the VECTOR TIME key consecutively to select vector time, among 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes. By trackball module Vector motion: Click the vector motion indication at the right side of the screen to select relative or true vector mode. Vector length: Click the vector time indication at the right side of the screen to select time among 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes. Or, spin the scrollwheel to select the length from 30 seconds or 1 - 60 minutes, in one-minute intervals. Vector length Vector motion 3.10 Past Position Display The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any targets being tracked. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. See the illustration below for dot pattern and ship status. (a) Ship turning (b) Ship running straight (c) Ship reduced speed (d) Ship increased speed 3-13 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference Click the indications circled in the figure below to set the plot interval (or disable the display) and the past position reference (true or relative). Plot interval, past position display ON/OFF Past position reference 3.10.2 Past position points You can show 5 or 10 past position points per tracked target. Right-click the past position indication then select [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 TT PAST POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10]. 3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-degree steps. Drift, the speed of the tide, can also be entered manually in 0.1 knot steps. When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set and drift to get course over ground and speed over ground. Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and target data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information. These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors. Note: For the IMO type, turn off the AIS function in order to enter set and drift. To enter set and drift do the following: 1. Right-click the speed indication then select [OS Info Menu] to show the [OWN SHIP INFO] menu. 2. Select [2 SYSTEM SETTING] or [3 LOCAL SETTING] as appropriate. 3-14 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3. Use the right and left arrow buttons to select the [SPD] page. Set speed and course of drift 4. Set [Stabilization Mode] to [Water]. 5. Click the [Set Drift] box to show a checkmark in the box. 6. Put the cursor in the course input box then spin the scrollwheel to select the set. 7. Put the cursor in the drift input box then spin the scrollwheel to select the drift. 8. Close the menu. Note: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness. 3-15 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm The TT continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each TT. When the predicted CPA of any TT becomes smaller than the preset CPA range and its predicted TCPA less than the preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds and the Alert 526 "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box. In addition, the symbol of the offending TT is red and flashes together with its vector. This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to threatening targets. It is important that the gain, sea clutter and rain clutter and other radar controls are properly adjusted. The accuracy of TT calculations is a function of several variables including target glint, clutter conditions and signal-to-noise ratio. The design of the TT minimizes the effects of these variables but you must be aware that such errors will produce inaccuracies in the derived CPA and TCPA in particular during the initial tracking period. CPA and TCPA settings must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship. The TT CPA/TCPA alarm should not be solely relied upon to warn you of collision situations. The operator should check all aids to navigation to monitor possible collision situations. 3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following: 1. If the values for CPA and TCPA are blank, click [CPA/TCPA] to show them. 2. Click the CPA indication to select desired CPA range (0.1-20 NM). CPA setting TCPA setting 3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired TCPA time (1-60 minutes). 3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm The TT CPA/TCPA alarm can be enabled or disabled from the TT/AIS box. Click the indication shown in the right figure to enable or disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm. The alarm is disabled when the CPA and TCPA settings are not shown. 3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm When the CPA or TCPA of a target is within the CPA and TCPA limits, the Alert 526 "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box and the audio alarm sounds. To acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer, push the ALARM ACK key on the Control Unit, or click the alert indication in the [Alert] box. 3-16 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) The alert in the [Alert] box and the flashing of the plotting symbol and vector continue until the dangerous situation is gone or you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. 3.13 TT Lost Target Alert Tracked targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become "lost targets". When this occurs; • A red X is put on the TT symbol (flashing) of the lost target. (The lost target symbol disappears after the lost target alert is acknowledged.) • The audio alert sounds and the Alert 527 "TT Lost" appears in the [Alert] box. 3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert The [Lost TGT] indication at the bottom-right position enables, disables the lost target alert. Click the indication to select [OFF], [FILT] or [ALL] as appropriate. [OFF]: Disable the alert. [FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria meet the settings made in section 3.13.2. [ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets. Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS. 3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost frequently, you may want to disable the lost target alert against certain tracked targets, by maximum range. 1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show that menu. 2. Select [3 LOST FILTER MAX RNG]. 3. Select [ON]. Select the range setting then spin the scrollwheel to set the range. Any TT lost targets beyond this range will not trigger the TT lost target alert. MANUAL 200/ AUTO 50/ AUTO 100/ AUTO 150/ AUTO 200 4. Close the menu. 3-17 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.14 Trial Maneuver The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ship's movement against all tracked targets, without interrupting the updating of target information. It is available for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use relative motion and sea stabilization (water tracking). 3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers There are two types of trial maneuvers: dynamic and static. Dynamic trial maneuver A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and own ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain "delay time." Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and courses, the targets' and own ship's future movements are simulated in one-second increments indicating their predicted positions in 30-second intervals as illustrated below. The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when own ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should therefore take into consideration own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and ends in a minute. In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a maneuver) for a delay time of 2:30 and alters speed and course until operator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this example). Delay time = 2 m 30 s. Current position Static trial maneuver The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked targets at the completion of the trial maneuver. Enter expected course and speed and delay time until start of a maneuver and the expected position of your ship and TTs at the end of the trial maneuver are shown on the display. By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a maneuver. Thus, the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result immediately. 3-18 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Position of target B at end of trial maneuver Course and speed changes completed; position where course and speed are changed B Position of target A at end of trial maneuver Delay time Current position A T 3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver To do a trial maneuver: 1. Right click the DELAY setting in the [Trial] box (see step 7) then select [Trial Maneuver Menu]. 2. Select [1 TRIAL MANEUVER] then select [STATIC] or [DYNAMIC] as appropriate. 3. Select [2 SPEED RATE] then set the speed rate with the scrollwheel. 4. Select [3 TURN RATE] then set the turn rate with the scrollwheel. Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided. This is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship's speeds and turn rates. 5. For the B-type radar, select [4 TGT DATA] then select whether to use [ACTUAL] or [TRIAL] data. (Skip this step if your radar is the IMO or A type.) 6. Close the menu. 7. Find the [Trial] box at the right side of the screen. Trial time Trial ON/OFF Trial course Trial speed Trial delay time 8. Right-click the Trial title bar, select [Trial Mode] then select a trial mode, [Static] or [Dynamic]. 3-19 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 9. Click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show [ON]. 10. Click the Trial course indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the trial course. 11. Click the Trial speed indication. spin the scrollwheel or use the Control Unit to set the trial speed. 12. Click the [DELAY] indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the amount of delay. This is the time after which own ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. The time indication depends on trial mode: Dynamic mode: The position of your ship and TTs is updated and displayed every 30 seconds. Static mode: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are reached are displayed. The progress time until the position is reached is indicated on the display. The trial time can be changed from the Trial time indication. Put the cursor in the Trial time indication and roll the scrollwheel. The position of targets at the end of selected time is shown. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe maneuver. When the cursor is removed from the box the original positions of your ship and TTs are restored. If a maneuver is unsafe, change speed, course and delay until it is safe. The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen. The time appears at the top-right position on the display. If any TT is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset CPA/ TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver. Terminating a trial maneuver The termination method depends on the trial mode as follows: Dynamic mode: The trial is terminated when 60 minutes is shown in the Trial time indication. Static mode: The trial is terminated when you terminate the trial maneuver manually. To terminate the trial maneuver manually, click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show [OFF]. 3.15 TT Simulation Mode You can simulate the risk of collision by using the TT simulation mode and the trial maneuver together. 1. Execute the TT simulation mode as follows: 1) Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [8 TT SIMULATION MODE]. 2) The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to start TT SIMULATION MODE?" appears. Click the [OK] button to start the test. 2. The normal operation is suspended then three simulated targets appear on the display. The indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the simulation mode. The simulation may be terminated any time by going to the STBY mode. 3-20 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Three simulated targets move as the following table. The simulated target is automatically generated with the relative movement in the following table based on own ship's movement at the start of simulation mode. Note: If own ship moves after the start of simulation mode, the movement of the simulated target is not matched with the values in the following table. Target A Target B Target C Range (R) 9.5 NM 1.1 NM 9.3 NM Bearing (R) 270.0° 333.0° 45.0° Speed (R) 20.0 kn 10.2 kn 19.9 kn Course (R) 90.0° 90.2° 225.1° CPA 0.0 NM 1.0 NM 0.0 NM TCPA 28.5 min 2.9 min 28.0 min C A B S 3. Acquire the simulated targets after the TT simulation mode is performed. The tracking state changes from unstable to stable and the vector appears. You can simulate the movement of each function with changing true/relative vector, stabilization through the water/over the ground, range or length of vector. 4. After the target B crosses in front of own ship, that is the target B is not a dangerous target, you can simulate the risk of collision by using the trial maneuver as follows: 1) Set the TT CPA/TCPA alarm. For example, set 0.5 nm for CPA, 30 min for TCPA. 2) Execute the trial maneuver (see section 3.14). In the static mode, the movements of own ship and the target after the time set as the trial time elapses are displayed. If the target is dangerous after the time set as the trial time elapses, its symbol is the one for the dangerous target. Adjust the trial course and trial delay time so the target symbol does not become the dangerous symbol when executing the trial maneuver. 3.16 TT Alerts There are nine situations that cause the TT to trigger visual and audio alerts. To acknowledge the audio alerts, push the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box. Alert No. 520 Message Category TT System Error Warning 521 TT New Target Warning 522 TT Auto ACQ 95% Caution 523 TT Auto ACQ 100% Warning Description TT system is inoperative. Checking heading sensor, antenna. Tracked target entered the acquisition zone. The capacity for auto acquisition has reached 95%. The capacity for auto acquisition has reached 100% and no more target acquisition is possible. Cancel tracking on unnecessary targets. 3-21 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.17 Alert No. 524 TT Man ACQ 95% Caution 525 TT Man ACQ 100% Warning 526 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm 527 528 TT Lost REF Target Lost Warning Warning Message Category Description The capacity for manual acquisition has reached 95%. The capacity for manual acquisition has reached 100% and no more target acquisition is possible. Cancel tracking on unnecessary targets. Tracked target on collision course. Take evasive action. Tracked target lost. Check target. Tracked target used for speed input is lost. To continue using reference target for speed input, select another tracked target. Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than this dimension are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video echo. When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the IMO requirements for TT, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TT complies with these requirements. Echo detection (quantization) The entire picture is converted to a digital from called "Quantized Video." A sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is "1" if there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or "0" if there is no return. The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the antenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1's indicating an echo presence at the exact same range, a target "start" is initiated. Since receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an echo. The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closest and most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a land. This land echo is not used by TT acquisition and tracking process. All smaller echoes are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target. 3-22 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Acquisition A target that is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is judged to be a radar echo. Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball. Automatic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times continuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking The range and bearing of an echo are found from the relative distance of the target from the radar antenna. The distance a tracked target moves between radar antenna rotations is used to calculate the relative speed of the tracked target. However, because of calculation error, smoothing is applied to get stable target speed and course data. When a target changes course, smoothing is reduced in order to quickly follow target movement. Tracking is achieved when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans, whether acquired automatically or manually. Required tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6, 12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale is changed. Targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become "lost targets." The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship's course and speed. The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the TTs. This process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the radar. The REF point for tracked target calculation can be the radar antenna position or the CCRP. For CCRP, the displayed value includes the distance between the CCRP and the antenna position. Therefore, when switching the REF point, the range, bearing, CPA and TCPA of the tracked targets change. Qualitative description of tracking error The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceeds IMO standards. Own ship maneuvers For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150°/minute, depending on gyro), then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy. Other ship maneuvers Target ship courses; lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy recovers quickly. 3-23 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) 3.18 Factors Affecting Target Tracking Sea returns If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data. Rain and snow Rain clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the rain clutter control to suppress the clutter. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acquisition. Accuracy can be affected. Low clouds Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the rain clutter control. Non-synchronous emissions No effect. Low gain Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at long distance. The TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased. The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined. Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automatic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously. Tracking continues if a return echo is received at least once in nine antenna rotations. However, the fewer the return echoes the lower the accuracy. If no return echo is received within nine antenna rotations the target is declared a lost target. Second trace echoes When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse. This gives an incorrect range indication. Second- and third-trace echoes can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but target course and speed data will be in error. Blind and shadow sectors Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard the ship, for example, funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets. The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo. The angular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided. 3-24 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) Indirect echoes A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as reflection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT system can acquire and track a false echo if it is detected in five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be reduced. Radar interference If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting" and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the display. Delay of sensor input If the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal is too slow, error in target bearing occurs when own ship turns. To prevent this error, the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal must be as indicated in the System Configuration drawings. 3-25 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) This page is intentionally left blank. 3-26 4. AIS OPERATION An AIS transponder can be connected to this radar to overlay AIS targets on the radar display. The radar can store up to 2,000 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the Alert 533 "AIS Target Capacity 100%" is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over the Ground (SOG), Course Over the Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets. This radar can activate 500 AIS targets. The Alert 535 "AIS Target Activate 100%" is generated when 500 AIS targets are activated. This radar can display a maximum of 1,000 AIS targets. The Alert 531 "AIS Target Display 100%" is generated when 1,000 AIS targets, which includes both activated and sleeping targets, are displayed. The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the radar defines which AIS targets are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, the corresponding AIS symbol will be removed from the display. Type of Ship Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG ≤ 3kn Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG > 3kn Class A: 0kn ≤ SOG < 14kn Class A: 14kn ≤ SOG ≤ 23kn Class A: SOG > 23kn Class B: “CS” SOG < 2kn Class B: “CS” SOG ≥ 2kn Class B: “SO” 0 kn ≤ SOG < 2kn Class B: “SO” 2 kn ≤ SOG < 14kn Class B: “SO” 14 kn ≤ SOG ≤ 23kn Class B: “SO” SOG > 23kn Class A and Class B: no SOG available AIS SAR aircraft AIS aid to navigation AIS base station AIS search and rescue transponder IMO nominal reporting interval 3 min Lost target indication (reporting interval >) 10 min 10 s 50 s 10 s 6s 2s 3 min 30 s 3 min 30 s 15 s 5s N/A 10 s 3 min 10 s N/A 50 s 30 s 10 s 10 min 150 s 10 min 150 s 75 s 25 s 10 min 50 s 10 min 50 s 10 min An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either a Class A or Class B AIS. Additionally, the AIS transponder receives messages from ships and non-ships (AIS SAR aircraft, AIS aid to navigation, AIS base station, and AIS search and rescue transmitter). 4-1 4. AIS OPERATION There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the radar display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such sleeping targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and change it from sleeping to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector, headline, ROT indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active AIS targets and change their status to sleeping. An indication of AIS target activated capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of 500 targets are activated, the Alert 534 "AIS Target Activate 95%" appears. When 500 targets are activated, the Alert 535 "AIS Target Activate 100%" appears. An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 530 "AIS Target Display 95%" appears. When 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 531 "AIS Target Display 100%" appears. An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. The Alert 532 "AIS Target Capacity 95%" will be given when 95% of 2,000 targets are in the storage buffer and the Alert 533 "AIS Target Capacity 100%" appears when 2,000 targets are in the storage buffer. This radar generates AIS-related alerts. These are Alert 536 "AIS CPA/TCPA" and Alert 537 "AIS Lost". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The operator can activate or sleep AIS target alerts as desired. The feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets that need supervision. This radar further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing non-active targets to active targets, if their CPA and TCPA are within a preset limit. 4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function Long-click the AIS status indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF] to deactivate the AIS function (sleep all AIS targets) and AIS messaging facility. To activate AIS, push the left button again. Note: You cannot enable AIS if any of the items listed below are active. • Manual speed • Manual set & drift • Speed is calculated from reference targets 4-2 4. AIS OPERATION 4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the display. Click the AIS status indication to select [DISP OFF], [DISP FILT] or [DISP ALL]. [DISP OFF]: Turn off the AIS display. (Tracking continues internally.) [DISP FILT]: Filter AIS targets according to the settings of the AIS target filter. See section 4.4. [DISP ALL]: Display all AIS targets. 4.3 Symbol AIS Symbols Default color Green Green Name AIS tracked target past position point Sleeping AIS target Description Mark past position. Green Activated AIS target Red (fixed) Activated target in AZ (without acknowledgment) Green Activated target in AZ (with acknowledgment) Green Activated target, true scale symbol Blue AIS SART test Red (fixed) AIS SART active Denote AIS SART (search and rescue radar transponder) active. Red (fixed) Dangerous AIS target Green Association AIS target Target’s CPA and TCPA are within the CPA and TCPA settings. Vector shown. The symbol flashes until acknowledgment. AIS and TT target declared as "association target". AIS symbol and AIS data are used. Red (fixed) Association AIS dangerous target Denote sleeping AIS symbol. (Lines are thinner than Active AIS symbol.) Denote active AIS target, with vector for course and speed. (Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS symbol.) Color can be changed with the menu. Unacknowledged active AIS target in acquisition zone, with vector for course and speed. (Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS symbol.) Acknowledged active AIS target in acquisition zone, with vector for course and speed. (Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS symbol.) Color can be changed with the menu. Active AIS target with symbol shown in true scale. Association AIS symbol or activate AIS symbol is displayed within the ship’s symbol when activated. This symbol disappears when the size of the true scale symbol is smaller than 3 mm on the display. Denote AIS SART (search and rescue radar transponder) test. AIS and TT target declared as "association target". AIS symbol and AIS data are used. Target's CPA and TCPA are within limits set. 4-3 4. AIS OPERATION Symbol Default color Green Name Heading-turn indicator Description Show target’s direction of turning. Blue Physical (real) AIS ATON AIS aid to navigation Yellow Physical AIS ATON Off Position AIS aid to navigation with off position Blue Virtual AIS ATON Virtual AIS aid to navigation Yellow Virtual AIS ATON Off Po- Virtual AIS aid to navigation with off posisition tion Green SAR Aircraft Denote SAR aircraft. Blue AIS base station Denote AIS base station. Green AIS select symbol Target selected to display its data. Green SAR vessel SAR (search and rescue) vessel Red (fixed) AIS lost symbol X is superimposed on the AIS target symbol and is flashing. Green Non HDG/COG sleeping AIS target Non HDG/COG activated AIS target Denote sleeping AIS symbol without HDG and COG. Dashed line. Denote active AIS symbol without HDG and COG. Dashed line. BS Green Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed. Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the heading is changed from the head-up mode. Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the Alert 380 "AIS COM Error" appears in the [Alert] box. Check the AIS transponder. Note 4: An AIS target is declared a lost target if it is not detected in five consecutive reporting periods (see the table on page 4-1). 4-4 4. AIS OPERATION 4.4 How to Filter Sleeping AIS Targets If the screen becomes cluttered with AIS targets, you can filter out unnecessary sleeping AIS targets, from the [DISP FILTER] menu. 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Open the [5 DISP FILTER] menu. MENU TT • AIS AIS ← DISP FILTER 1 SLEEPING CLASS A OFF / ON 2 SLEEPING CLASS B OFF / ON 3 MAX RANGE OFF / ON 12NM 4 MIN SHIP SPEED OFF / ON 1.0kn 3. At [1 SLEEPING CLASS A] - [2 SLEEPING CLASS B], disable or enable tracking of respective item as appropriate. 4. Select [3 MAX RANGE] and set the maximum range to display a sleeping AIS target. A sleeping AIS target not within the range set here is not displayed. 5. Set the minimum ship speed for sleeping AIS targets, with [4 MIN SHIP SPEED]. Any sleeping AIS target whose speed is slower than that set here will not be displayed. 6. Close the menu. Note: This function is not available for an activated target. 4.5 How to Activate Targets When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, an activated target's course and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by monitoring the vector. 4.5.1 How to activate specific target From the Control Unit Select the target with the cursor then press the ACQ/ACT key. By the trackball module Click the AIS target symbol. SOG (Speed Over the Ground) and COG (Course Over the Ground) vector*1 Turning direction (ROT) *1 Vector shows STW (speed through the water) and CTW (course through the water) when sea stabilized mode is selected at the radar. Heading line*2 *2 Line points in direction of COG when there is no heading data. 4-5 4. AIS OPERATION 4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets You can get automatic activation of a sleeping AIS target when its CPA/TCPA are within a preset limit. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to use this feature. How to set conditions for automatic activation of AIS targets 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Open the [4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] menu. 3. Set each menu item, referring to the description below. [1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any AIS target at a distance greater than set here will not be activated. [2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use. Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will not be activated. [3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select [ON] to exclude class B AIS targets. 0NM 1.0kn 4. Close the menu. How to enable, disable automatic activation of AIS targets Click the location circled in the figure below to select one of the following: [AUTO OFF]: Disable automatic activation of AIS target by CPA. [AUTO ACT FILT]: Activate AIS targets that fulfil the requirements set on the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] menu. [AUTO ACT ALL]: Activate all AIS targets within the CPA range set. 4.6 How to Sleep Targets 4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target You can "sleep" an activated AIS target as shown below when the screen becomes filled with targets that might prevent important radar and AIS targets from being identified. The targets that have been activated automatically cannot be "slept." From the Control Unit Put the cursor on the AIS target to sleep then press the TARGET CANCEL key. By the trackball module 1. Right-click the screen to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Target Cancel] and [Any] or [AIS Only] as applicable. 3. Click the AIS target to sleep. 4-6 4. AIS OPERATION 4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets Sleep all activated targets from the menu 1. Open the menu then select [2 TT•AIS] and [4 AIS]. 2. Select [3 SLEEP ALL TGTS] then [YES]. 3. Close the menu. Sleep all activated targets from the AIS box Long-click the AIS status indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF] then click [DISP ALL] to sleep all AIS targets redisplayed. 4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data You can display an AIS target's data by selecting it on the display. 4.7.1 AIS pop-up information The AIS pop-up shows abbreviated AIS data (COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA) for the selected AIS target. Simply put the cursor on the AIS target to show the pop-up. The pop-up can be enabled or disabled with [AIS POP-UP INFO] in the [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu. 4.7.2 Basic AIS target data From the Control Unit 1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the activated AIS target symbol you want to know its data. 2. Press the TARGET DATA key. 3. The selected target is marked with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected. By the trackball module Click the activated AIS target symbol. The selected target is marked with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected. A 4-7 4. AIS OPERATION AIS no. (information display order) Vessel name Bearing FURUNO Heading Range Course over ground Rate of turn Speed over ground CPA TCPA Bow crossing range Bow crossing time Position Navigation status Note 1: AIS is not available in dead reckoning when the radar type is selected to [IMO] on the [INSTALLATION] menu. Note 2: If the TCPA value is negative, this means that you have already passed the closest point and the AIS target is going away from your ship. 4-8 4. AIS OPERATION 4.7.3 Expanded AIS data The expanded AIS data display provides additional information about an AIS target, including call sign, MMSI No., IMO No., etc. To display expanded AIS data, show the basic data for a target, right-click the target data display then select [Expanded AIS Data]. Title bar Vessel name FURUNO Call sign WG27CQ Position Type of position sensor Position accuracy (HIGH or LOW) Navigation status MMSI No. IMO No. 2324433222 0023555552 Length of vessel Width of vessel Draught of vessel Destination ETA at destination Version of AIS transponder Association (On or Off) Ship and cargo type If data for an item is unknown, "missing" appears. In the example above, the name of the position sensor is “missing”. 4-9 4. AIS OPERATION 4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions. An AIS dangerous target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set in the TT/AIS box. The AIS symbol of an AIS dangerous target is red and flashing, and is announced with the Alert 536 "AIS CPA/TCPA". After the alert is acknowledged the target symbol is displayed in red color. To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following: 1. If the CPA and TCPA settings are not shown, click [CPA/TCPA]. Note: When clicking [CPA/TCPA], the CPA/TCPA alarm function is off. 2. Click the CPA indication to select desired CPA range. 3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired TCPA setting. CPA setting TCPA setting 4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance 1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar then select [Brill Menu]. 2. Go to page 2, select [5 AIS SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the brilliance. 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 㪈㪌 3. Close the menu. 4-10 4. AIS OPERATION 4.10 AIS Symbol Color 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [Symbol Menu] to show that menu. 2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Yellow is not available with the IMO type.) 3. Close the menu. 4.11 AIS Lost Targets An AIS target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for intervals which are based on the table on page 4-1. When this occurs, the target is marked with the lost target symbol (flashing), shown in the right figure, the buzzer sounds (for activated targets only) and the Alert 537 "AIS Lost" appears. To acknowledge a lost target, push the ALARM ACK key or click the [Alert] box. Note: The AIS data transmission interval depends on target's speed. For example, the data is transmitted every 10 seconds on the ship speed of 0 to 14 kn and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots. For details, see the owner's manual of the AIS transponder. 4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alert The[ Lost TGT] indication (at the bottom-right position) enables, disables the lost target alert. Click the indication to select [OFF], [FILT] or [ALL] as appropriate. [OFF]: Disable the lost target alert. [FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria meet the settings made in section 4.11.2. [ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets. Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS. 4-11 4. AIS OPERATION 4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter If you are in an area where AIS targets often become lost, the lost target alert may activate frequently. In this case, you may want to specify which targets to classify as lost targets, to prevent frequent triggering of the lost target alert. 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Open the [6 LOST FILTER] menu. 3. Set each menu item, referring to the description below. 0NM [1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any AIS target at a distance greater than set here will not trig1.0kn ger the lost target alert. [2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use. Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will not trigger the lost target alert. [3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select [ON] to exclude class B AIS targets from the lost target alert. 4. Close the menu. 4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line. Below are sample past position displays. (a) Ship turning 4.12.1 (b) Ship running straight How to enable/disable the past position display, select past position reference (c) Ship reduced speed (d) Ship increased speed Plot interval, past position display ON/OFF Click the indications circled in the figure below to set the plot interval (or disable the display) and the past position reference (true or relative). Past position reference 4-12 4. AIS OPERATION 4.12.2 Past position points You can show 5 or 10 past position points per AIS target. Right-click the past position indication then click [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 AIS PAST POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10]. 4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors AIS targets vector can be displayed relative to your ship's heading (relative) or with reference to the North (True). Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set at the bottomright position on the screen. For further information, see section 3.9. 4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship radar antenna). To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the "association" function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the association criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the association method selected. Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS target is lost. All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the chart for radar mode, with the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. All settings are mutually shared. 4.14.1 How to select association method Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target, or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the corresponding item on the [TT•AIS] menu. To turn off association, click the location to remove the arrow. < > Note: You can also select the method by right-cllcking the location. Click desired association method. Association: OFF Association: TT Association: AIS [Association Menu] 4-13 4. AIS OPERATION 4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association 1. Open the menu then select [TT•AIS] and [6 ASSOCIATION]. 2. Enter the association conditions, referring to the following: [ASSOCIATION TGT]: Disable Association with [OFF], or select [AIS] or [TT]. [AIS] selects the AIS symbol for association target; [TT] selects the TT symbol for the association target. [GAP]: Range between AIS target and TT. Setting range: 0.000-0.999(NM) [RANGE]: Enter the range difference from own ship to AIS target and TT. setting range: 0.000-0.999(NM) [BEARING]: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and TT. Setting range: 0.0-99.9(°) [SPEED]: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and TT. Setting range: 0.0-9.9(kn) [COURSE]: Enter the course difference between AIS target and TT. Setting range: 0.0-99.9(°) When the association criteria are met • either the AIS or TT symbol is erased according to association made in section 4.14.1. • the Alert 560 "Association" appears in the [Alert] box. 4.15 Voyage Data Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught and crew, on the [VOYAGE DATA] menu. 1. Click the [OWN AIS] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [VOYAGE DATA] menu. 4-14 4. AIS OPERATION 2. Select [1 NAV STATUS] then use the scrollwheel to set the applicable two-digit nav status code, referring to the table below. No. Nav status No. Status 00 Underway using engine 08 Under way Sailing 01 At anchor 09 Reserved for high speed craft 02 Not under command 10 Reserved for wing in ground 03 Restricted Maneuverability 11 Reserved for future use 04 Constrained by her draft 12 Reserved for future use 05 Moored 13 Reserved for future use 06 Aground 14 AIS SART 07 Engaged in fishing 15 Not Defined 3. Select [2 ETA] then use the scrollwheel to enter ETA: day (two digits), month (two digits), year (four digits) and time (four digits). 4. Select [3 DESTINATION] then use the software keyboard to enter the name of your destination, using a maximum of 20 characters. 5. Select [4 DRAUGHT] then use the scrollwheel to enter ship's draft (0.0 - 25.5 (m)). 6. Select [5 CREW] then use the scrollwheel to enter the number of crew (00008191). 7. Close the menu. 4.16 AIS Messages You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS. 4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message You can create and send an AIS message as follows: 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu. 3. At [1 ADDRESS TYPE], select [ADDRESSED] to send the message to a specific AIS-equipped ship, or [BROADCAST] to send the message to all AIS-equipped ships within VHF communication range. For [ADDRESSED], enter MMSI of ship at [3 MMSI No.]. 4. At [2 MESSAGE TYPE], select [SAFETY] for safety message, or [BINARY] for routine message. 4-15 4. AIS OPERATION 5. At [4 CHANNEL], select the channel over which to broadcast your message. The choices are [A], [B], [A or B] or [A and B]. 6. Click [NEXT] to go to the next page. 7. Select [3 EDIT]. A text input box appears together with the software keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter your message. The number of characters that may be entered depends on message type, and the number of characters available appears below the text box. Safety message broadcast: 161 characters Binary message broadcast: 156 characters Safety message addressed to MMSI: 156 characters Binary message addressed to MMSI: 151 characters 8. To save the file, select [2 SAVE FILE]. 9. To transmit the message, click [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to transmit AIS message?" appears. Click the [OK] button to transmit the message. The Alert 542 "AIS Transmitting" appears in the [Alert] box while the message is being transmitted. If the message could not be transmitted, the Alert 541 "AIS Message Transmit Error" appears. 4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message If you have saved some previously transmitted AIS messages, you can edit one and send it as follows: 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu. 3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 OPEN FILE] then select the number of the message to transmit. 4. Select [3 EDIT] to edit the message. 5. To save the message, select [2 SAVE FILE]. 6. To transmit the message, select [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to transmit AIS message?" appears. Click the [OK] button to transmit the message. 4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages When you receive an AIS message, the Alert 539 "AIS Message Received" appears. To display the message, click the [AIS message] button on the InstantAccess bar. [AIS message] button 4-16 4. AIS OPERATION How to get notification of AIS message reception with the [AIS message] button Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. Go to page 2 and set [1 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] to [ON]. When you receive an AIS message, the [AIS message] button is displayed in orange. AIS Received Messages list Received AIS messages are stored in the AIS received message list. A maximum of 200 messages are saved over 50 pages for FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit, 34 pages for FURUNO 23-inch monitor unit. 1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. 2. Select [7 RECEIVED MESSAGES]. Title bar Page no./total no. of pages Close current window 1 10/APR/2012 08:21 ADDRESSED SAFETY MMSI: 431060309 2 10/APR/2012 10:45 ADDRESSED BINARY MMSI: 303056302 AIS message list NAME: FURUNO CALL: 098657334 Ship’s name and call signTEST:INFORMATRIOIN SW 2M/S WEATHER RAINY VISIBILITY -5000M Message content 3. Click an AIS message in the list to show its contents. 4. Click the [CLOSE] window button to close the window. 4-17 4. AIS OPERATION 4.17 Other AIS Features The [TT•AIS] menu additionally provides the features described below. AIS SCALED SYMBOL OFF / ON AIS BASE STATION OFF / ON AIS PHYSICAL ATON OFF / ON AIS VIRTUAL ATON OFF / ON Page 1 Page 2 [ATON SYMBOL COLOR]: Select the ATON symbol color. [AIS ROT TAG LIMIT]: The ROT marker appears on the heading line of an AIS target and points in the direction of the turn when the ship's rate of turn is greater than that set here. [AIS SCALED SYMBOL]: The AIS target symbol can be shown as a simple triangle or a symbol scaled according to a vessels's dimensions. Select [ON] to show the scaled symbol. Standard AIS symbol AIS scaled symbol [AIS BASE STATION]: Select [ON] to show the AIS base stations. [AIS PHYSICAL ATON]: Select [ON] to show the physical AIS ATON. [AIS VIRTUAL ATON]: Select [ON] to show the virtual AIS ATON. 4-18 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.1 What is a Radar Map? A radar map consists of a layer of marks and lines overlaid on the radar display. A map is intended for indicating safety-related areas and objects. Ten radar maps can be made and each map can have a total of 4,000 lines and marks. The map data can be saved to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area. The user can create a radar map in real time while using the radar for navigation or at leisure time at anchor or while the radar is not being used. Waypoints, events and user charts from the chart can be shown or hidden on the radar map display. The radar map does not affect any radar function. 5.2 Presentation Modes Six presentation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, STAB Head-up, Stern-up and North-up TM. To select a mode, use the MODE key on the Control Unit or click the [Range/Presentation mode] box. Note: Chart data is not displayed in the Head-up and STAB Head-up modes. 5.3 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display Click the [MAP ON/OFF] button to display [MAP ON] or [MAP OFF] as appropriate. [MAP ON/OFF] button 5-1 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.4 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines Marks and lines can be entered in the radar mode. (Marks cannot be entered in the chart radar mode.) These marks and lines can be displayed in red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow or white. (Some marks, lines and colors may not be available depending on the specifications of your radar.) The capacity for map storage is 10 maps/4,000 points per map. When 4,000 marks and lines have been entered into a map, the message "MARK FULL" replaces the mark icon in the [Mark] box and no more marks and lines can be entered into that map. In this case save the marks/lines to another map file or erase some marks from the full map file in order to save the mark. The procedure below shows how to enter a mark, including mark selection, mark entry method, and save location. You can skip steps in the procedure where it is not necessary to complete the corresponding action. 1. Put the cursor on the mark shown in the [Mark] box at the bottom-left position on the display. Minimize button Selected mark Map file number 2. Spin the scrollwheel to select a mark. The name of the mark appears to the right of the mark. Name of mark 3. Select mark color (B-type only), mark position, and where to save the mark as follows: 1) Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Mark Color]. 2) Click the mark color desired. 3) At the context-sensitive menu, click [Mark Position] to select the mark input method. The choices are [CURSOR], [OWN SHIP] and [L/L]. For L/L, the mark is entered at the L/L position entered at [MAP MARK L/L] on the [MAP•MARK] menu. 5-2 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 4) At the context-sensitive menu, click [MAP File] then click the map file number where to save the mark. 4. For entry with the cursor, use the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired. (You can see the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by monitoring the Cursor position box.) Push the left button or the MARK key on the Control Unit to inscribe the mark or line point. Note: To continue entering the same mark or line under the same conditions, do the following at the next time of entry. Entry by cursor: Click the location where to put a mark. Entry by ship's position, or manual input of latitude and longitude: Click the mark icon. 5.5 How to Find Number of Map Points Used You can show the number of points used in each radar map file. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]. See [MARK POINTS] at the bottom of the menu to see how many mark points have been used per map file. In the example below 7 points out of 4,000 points have been used in Map 1. EVENT 5 USER CHART Map no., no. of points used/total no. of points 5-3 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.6 How to Select the Radar Map to Display 1. Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [MAP File] and then click the map no. you want to display. 5.7 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find Comment for a Map 5.7.1 How to attach a comment to a radar map You can attach a comment to radar maps you have created, to help you distinguish your maps. 1. Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Edit Map Comment]. A text input box appears together with the software keyboard, as shown in the right figure. 3. Select the map no. with the [Radar map file] drop-down list. 4. Enter your comment in the text input box. The number of characters available appears below the box. Edit map comment Radar map file MAP 1 X Edit comment 53 up input 5. Click the [OK] button to finish. 5.7.2 How to find the comment for a map Put the cursor on the map no. indication. The comment is displayed to the right of the map no. In the example below the comment is "Kobe". Map no. 5-4 Location of comment 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.8 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines A total of 4,000 marks and lines is allotted per map. When this amount is exceeded in a map, no more map marks or lines may be entered into the map unless you erase some unnecessary marks or lines. 5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Mark Delete]. 3. Click the mark or line to erase. 5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area You can erase all marks and lines within an area as follows: 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Area Select]. 5-5 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 3. Specify the area as follows: 1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button. 2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button. Start point Marks within the area are colored cyan End point All marks and lines within the area selected are highlighted in cyan (A and B types only). 4. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 5. Click [Area Mark Delete] to delete the marks and lines in the area selected. 5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file You can erase all radar map marks and lines in the map file currently displayed. Be absolutely sure you want to erase the marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored. 1. Right-click the [Mark] box, select [Map•Mark Menu] and [1 MARK SETTING]. 2. Select [8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE] (B type) or [7 MAP MARK ALL DELETE] (IMO and A types). The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to delete all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to erase all marks and lines. 3. Close the menu. 5-6 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.9 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines 5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map mark and line to another map file You can copy individual mark and line from the currently displayed radar map to the radar map file of your choice. 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Mark Copy] then click the map file no. where to copy the mark. 3. Put the (light-blue) cursor on the mark or line then click. 5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to another map file You can copy radar map marks and lines within an area of the currently displayed radar map to the radar map file of your choice. 1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Area Select]. 3. Specify the area as follows. 1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button. 2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button. All marks and lines within the area selected are highlighted in blue (A and B types only). 4. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu. 5. Click [Area Mark Copy] then click the map file number where to copy the marks and lines. 5-7 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to another map file You can copy all radar map marks and lines in the currently displayed radar map to the radar map file of your choice. 1. Display the map file of which to copy all its marks and lines. See section 5.6. 2. Right-click the [Mark] box then click [Map•Mark Menu]. 3. Select [1 MARK SETTING]. 4. Select [9 MAP MARK ALL COPY] (B type) or [8 MAP MARK ALL COPY] (IMO and A types). 5. Select [1 COPY TO] then select where to copy the map marks and lines. 6. Select [2 ALL MARK COPY]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to copy all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to copy. 7. Close the menu. 5-8 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.10 How to Export Radar Map You can export a radar map to a USB flash memory. 1. Set the USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus. 3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK MANAGE]. The confirmation message appears. Attention X Do you wish to open map convert window? OK Cancel 4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box. Map Convert Export Import No. Map1 Map2 Map3 Map4 Map5 Map6 Map7 Map8 Map9 Map10 Comment NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT Points 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 100/4000 Export Exit 5. Check [Export] at the top-left position of the dialog box. 6. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to export. 7. Click the [Export] button to show the [Save file] dialog box. 8. Select the USB flash memory as the destination to save then click the [Save] button. After the data export is completed, the message "x file(s) have exported success." appears (x is the number of the radar map(s)). 9. Click the [OK] button. 5-9 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.11 How to Import Radar Map You can import a radar map created on another equipment (FAR-3xx0 or FAR-2xx7). Copy the radar maps to a USB flash memory. 1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the radar map(s) to import in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus. 3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK MANAGE]. The confirmation message appears. Attention X Do you wish to open map convert window? OK Cancel 4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box. 5. Check [Import] at the top-left position of the dialog box then click the [Select file to import] button to show the [Select file] dialog box. Select file Volume select: Lock in: Space: Total Name Size Modified File Name: File Type: Export File(*.mrk;*.MRK) Cancel Open 6. Select the folder that contains the file to import then click the [Open] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box. Map Convert Export Import Select file to import Points: 76 Import file: 2107000.MRK No. Map1 Map2 Map3 Map4 Map5 Map6 Map7 Map8 Map9 Map10 Comment NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT NO COMMENT Points From To 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 0/4000 Import Exit 7. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to which the data created on another equipment are imported. 8. Click the [Import] button to import the data to the radar map(s) selected at step 7. Note: When importing a radar map created on another FAR-2xx7, the radar maps marks and lines are converted. See the tables on pages 5-11 and 5-12. 5-10 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK The list of the radar map marks and lines The radar map marks and lines created on another FAR-2xx7 are converted to ones on the FAR-3xx0 series as below. Marks FAR-2xx7 Symbol Other FAR-3xx0 Color Name IMO or A type Symbol Color Name B type Color Name Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy * Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy * Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy * Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy * Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy * Danger Purple Danger * Danger * Danger Purple Danger * Danger Purple Danger Purple Danger Purple Danger * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark * Mark Mark * Mark - - Mark * Mark Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Symbol *: The display color is selectable. See "Contrast table for the display colors" on page 512. 5-11 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK Lines FAR-2xx7 Symbol Color Name * Mark * Mark * Nav Line Purple * Coast Line * * Other FAR-3xx0 IMO or A type Symbol Color Name Symbol YellowBuoy orange YellowBuoy orange Contour Line Prohibited Area * Danger * Line Buoy * Line Buoy * Line Mark * Line Mark - - B type Color Name * Mark * Mark Buoy * Nav Line White Buoy * Coast Line Gray Buoy * Purple Prohibited Area * Purple Danger * Danger Line Mark * Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Mark Line Mark * Line Mark Line Mark * Mark Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Yelloworange Contour Line Prohibited Area *: The display color is selectable. See "Contrast table for the display colors" on this page. Contrast table for the display colors Below is the contrast table for the display colors of the radar map marks and lines. FAR-2xx7 Red Yellow Green Cyan Magenta Blue White Other 5-12 FAR-3xx0 Red Yellow Green Cyan Magenta Blue White Green 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.12 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features You can show or hide radar map objects as follows: 1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu] and [2 RADAR MAP]. 2. Turn objects on or off as appropriate. 3. Close the menu. 5.13 Track 5.13.1 How to set up ship's track The track traces your ship's movement. This radar records track at the interval you set on the [OWN TRACK] menu, and the recording interval determines the maximum recording time. The longer the interval the longer the recording time, as shown in the table below. When the memory for track becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval so as to keep the track on the display for a longer time. Save Interval Max. Recording Time Save Interval Max. Recording Time 30 s 6 days 22 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr 1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr 2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min 15 min 208 days 5 hr 1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [1 OWN TRACK] menus. 2. Select [1 DISP OWN TRACK]. 3. Select [ON] to show your ship's track or [OFF] to hide the track. 4. Select [2 OWN TRACK SOURCE]. 5. Select the navigation sensor that is to feed the position data to use to plot your ship's track, among [PRIMARY], [SECONDARY] and [SYSTEM]. [PRIMARY]: Navigation sensor having first priority. [SECONDARY]: Navigation sensor having second priority. [SYSTEM]: Plot own ship's track using system-fed position. 6. Select [3 SAVE INTERVAL]. 7. Select how often to save your ship's track, among [30s], [1min], [2min], [3min], [6min] and [15min]. [DRAW ONLY] draws the track but does not save it. 5-13 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 8. For the B-type radar, you can select the color for the track with [5 OWN TRACK COLOR]. 9. Close the menu. 5.13.2 How to erase track When the display becomes filled with track, for example, your ship traces the same route several times, you may want to delete some or all of your track from the display. 1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [1 OWN TRACK] menus. 2. Select [5 DELETE OWN TRACK] (A and B types) or [4 DELETE OWN TRACK] (IMO type). 3. Select the color to delete (A and B types), or the percentage of track to delete among [30%], [50%], [80%] and [ALL]. 4. Close the menu. 5.14 Route Display The route selected for navigation (in the chart mode) (see chapter 12) can be shown on the radar display. You can show or hide the entire route, and show or hide elements of the route (channel limits, safety margin, leg marks and wheel over line). 1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu] and [3 ROUTE]. 2. Turn the route display on or off at [1 DISP ROUTE]. 3. Turn the channel limit, safety margin, leg marks and wheel over line displays on or off at [2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT]. WPT1 124.8° 0.8NM Wheel over line Channel limit WPT2 87.9° 1.2NM 4. Close the menu. 5-14 Safety margin WPT3 Leg mark 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK 5.15 User Chart Display The active user chart can be shown in the chart radar mode. See chapter 13 for a description of the user chart. 1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu] and [5 USER CHART]. 2. Show or hide the user chart on the radar display with [1 DISP USER CHART]. 3. Show or hide the user chart objects on the radar display with [2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT]. 4. Close the menu. 5-15 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK This page is intentionally left blank. 5-16 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1 Chart Screen Overview The chart screen is divided into several areas, as illustrated below. Status bar Cursor position box Sensor information box Chart scale/presentation mode box Own ship functions box Route information box Electronic chart area Instant Access bar Overlay/ NAV Tools box Alert box EBL1 box, EBL2 box Permanent warning box VRM1 box, VRM2 box • The Status bar provides for selection of operating mode, chart format, IMO chart display; one-click restoration of IMO standard display, etc. • The Sensor information box displays ship's speed, course and position and selects sensors. • The Own ship functions box applies offset to the chart. • The Route information box shows route and waypoint data, when a route is selected for navigation. • The Overlay/NAV Tools box provides for setup of navigation-related functions. • The Alert box shows operational and system alert messages. • The VRM boxes measure the range to an object. • The Permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages. • The EBL boxes measure the bearing to an object. • The InstantAccess bar provides quick access to functions such as brilliance adjustment, display palette and the chart-related menu. The contents change according to the operating mode selected. • The Chart scale/presentation mode box selects the chart scale and presentation mode. • The Cursor position box shows the latitude and longitude position of the cursor and the TTG to the cursor. • The Electronic chart area shows the chart. 6-1 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.1 Electronic chart area This chart radar can use the following types of charts: • S-57 (IHO) • S-63 (IHO) (S-63 encrypted) • CM-ENC (C-MAP by Jeppesen) • CM-93/3 (C-MAP by Jeppesen) The following information can also be displayed: • Cursor (moved by trackball) • Planned route • EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM • Own ship symbol with speed vector • TT-acquired target from radar • AIS target Electronic charts The electronic navigational charts, S57ed3 ENC or CM-93 vector format, are displayed in the electronic chart area. The chart radar combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e.g., differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic navigational chart was derived. This chart radar is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. ENC charts are converted to SENC for use with the chart radar. When you open a chart, it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation scale. The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart area and these can be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT functions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:70,000,000. CM-93 vector format The CM-93 charts require a contract with applicable provider. These charts are from a private source and they cannot be used as a substitute for paper charts under any condition. To emphasize this point these charts are called "Non-ENC" charts in this manual. Note that some eToken dongles from the FEA-2xx7 can be used. These are labeled "JeT FURUNO XXXXX". This chart radar accepts the following C-MAP chart types: CM-ENC, Professional, Profes and Jeppesen Primary ECDIS Service. C-MAP produced official ENC chart that complies with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Organization's) S-57 Edition 3 product specification. When used in the chart radar, the ENC data improves the safety of navigation at sea. 6-2 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.2 Status bar The Status bar mainly provides for selection of operating mode, chart type and IMO chart display setting. 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NAVI No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Button name Operating mode NAVI CHARTS PLAN OTHERS CHART ONLY STD DISP Chart priority Chart database 10 11 Settings 12 Date 13 14 Time Working Indicator Description Selects a mode: RADAR or CHART for RADAR. Selects the Voyage navigation mode. Goes to the Chart maintenance mode. Selects the Voyage planning mode. Sets system in standby. Shows only the chart, when left button is pressed and held down. Restores the IMO standard display instantly. No use. Selects the pre-defined presentations of ENC content: IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL. CUSTOM appears when the symbols selected or deselected on the [Chart Display] menu do not match the preset conditions for IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL. Displays the operator's manual, chart program no. and system information. Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu. • Displays the date. • Selects the time to use, local or UTC. • Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time). Displays the time, local or UTC. Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning the system is not working. Shortly after it stops spinning the buzzer sounds. Reset the power to restore normal operation. 6-3 6. CHART OVERVIEW How to operate the buttons on the Status bar The Status bar has two types of controls: toggle button and drop-down list button. You operate the buttons with the trackball module. Button type Mode button A mode button selects the operating mode (see section 6.3). The background color of a mode button is light-blue when its operating mode is enabled; gray when disabled. The [NAVI] button is an example of a mode button. Drop-down list button A drop-down list button provides a list from which to select an option related to the label on the button. The [Chart Database] button is an example of a drop-down list button. See the right figure. A drop-down list button has a list status indicator (a triangle) whose position changes according to list status. List closed 6-4 List opened Operating procedure OFF (gray) Click button. Click button. ON (light-blue) 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.3 InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar contains all the operating functions related to the chart operating mode (Voyage navigation, Chart maintenance and Voyage planning) selected. The bar is divided into two sections, upper and lower. The buttons in the upper section change according to the mode selected. The buttons in the lower section are static for all modes. [NAVI] button activated [CHARTS] button activated [PLAN] button activated Instant Track Voyage navigation mode bar Chart maintenance mode bar Voyage planning mode bar 6-5 6. CHART OVERVIEW Button name Description Voyage navigation mode bar ← Minimize the InstantAccess bar. To restore the maximized bar, click anywhere on the bar. Click arrow Instant Track Click anywhere on the bar Route Route functions: select route, deselect route, move route to plan, monitor route. Processes AIS Safety and Navtex messages. If you have unread Navtex or Safety messages, the icon changes as shown right; "N" for unread Navtex, "S" for unread Safety, "S/N" for unread Safety and Navtex. Manual Update Shows the menu for manual update of chart objects. Mini Conning Shows or hides the mini conning display. Instant Track Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour from the monitored course. Chart maintenance mode bar ← Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. AUTO Load Loads charts automatically. Manage Charts Deletes charts; installs charts manually. Cell Status Finds cell status. License Enters license information. Public Key Shows the current public key. The public key changes each time a new one is installed. System Functions for chart synchronization. [Sync Config]: Selects the ECDIS units to synchronize. [Sync Status]: Checks synchronization status. [Reconvert]: Reconverts outdated SENC charts to the corresponding current ones. Voyage planning mode bar ← Minimizes the InstantAccess bar. Planning Creates and edits routes and user charts. Report Displays route and user chart reports. Guide Box Shows or hides the guide box, which provides range and bearing measurement between waypoints when creating a route. Manage Data Manages routes and user charts. [Route]: Imports, exports, deletes routes. [User Chart]: Deletes user charts. [Data Import]: Imports route, user chart created with FEA-2x07 ECDIS. 6-6 6. CHART OVERVIEW Button name Common bar Chart INFO DISP Record Palette BRILL MOB Capture UNDO Description Provides chart information. [Chart Legend]: Shows chart legend, in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. [Viewing Dates]: Sets Display date and Approved until dates. [Chart 1]: Displays an overview of ECDIS chart symbols. [SET]: Shows the [Basic Setting] menu, [Chart Display] menu, [Symbol Display] menu, [Chart Alert] dialog box. [TWO DISP]: This function is currently unavailable. [AIO]: Shows or hides the AIO overlay. : Shows or hides the software keyboard. Displays Chart log (ENC, C-MAP), Event log* (user event, POSN event), NAV log (Voyage, Details, Chart Usage), Target log (Danger Target). Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night. Adjusts the brilliance of a FURUNO monitor unit. Inscribes the MOB (ManOverBoard) mark. Takes a screenshot. Restores previous condition in route and user chart creation. How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar The InstantAccess bar has four types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list button, slider bar button, and speciality button. (The [MOB], [Capture] and [UNDO] buttons are specialty buttons that provide a single-action function.) The buttons can be operated with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you how to operate the buttons with the InstantAccess knob. Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar button [Palette] button OFF (gray) ON (light-blue) Palette choices 1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar. 2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the button selected is light blue. 3. Do one of the following depending on button type. • Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting. 6-7 6. CHART OVERVIEW • Drop-down list button or slider bar: Rotate the knob to select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection or setting. Note 1: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating sequence. Note 2: The InstantAccess knob can only adjust the slider bar on the InstantAccess bar. 6.1.4 Sensor information box Sensor information box displays the sensor data. When the user-selected sensor fails, the system automatically selects another sensor. When this occurs, the color of the sensor name changes from green to yellow. For details, see section 1.9. 6.1.5 Own ship functions box The own ship functions box shows information about own ship, enables offset and TM reset. [Offset] button [WGS84] button ENC info appears here. TM/CU status • [Offset] button: See section 16.8.1. • [WGS 84] button: Convert position data between datum; go to selected position on the current chart. Click the button to display the dialog box shown in the right figure. To convert a position from one datum to another, select the datum source at the [Source] pull-down list and enter position. Select the datum to convert to at the [Converted] pull-down list then click the button. The position on the chart selected is shown below the [Converted] pull-down list. To go to a position, click a [Go To] button. 6-8 6. CHART OVERVIEW • ENC info: ENC chart info appears here. No indication: ENC chart is currently displayed. "Non-ENC data": Non-official ENC material, in yellow characters. See section 7.18. • TM/CU status: "TM/CU Reset": True motion reset is active. (Chart is stationary and own ship moves on the chart.) "TM Reset off": When dragging the chart; true motion is OFF. To restart true motion, click the indication. "Ship off screen": Ship is out of the display area. 6.1.6 Route information box Asterisks appear in data locations when no route is selected for navigation. • [Route]: Name of monitored route. • [Plan Speed]: Planned speed to approach "To WPT". • [Plan Course]: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT". • [Course to Steer]: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route, including off track, drift and gyro error compensation. • [CH Limit]: Planned width of channel to approach "To WPT". • [Off Track]: Perpendicular distance the ship is from the intended track. • [To WPT]: The waypoint that the ship is approaching. • [DIST to WOP] (Wheel Over Point): Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at "To WPT" is given. • [Time to Go]: Time to go to WOP (hh:mm:ss). • [Turn RAD]: Planned turning radius at "To WPT". • [ROT]: Calculated rate of turn that is based on current speed and planned turning radius. • [Next WPT]: The WPT following the "To WPT". • [Next Course]: Next course (in degrees). 0.9 m 37 341.2° Course to steer WOL WOL (Wheel Over Line) Course to steer: 110° Planned course: 90° Course to steer: 120° Planned course: 90° Current No current Current present 6-9 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box sets up the following objects and consists of the following pages. • TT/AIS • Parallel index lines • Range rings • Predictor (predicts ship’s future movements) • Under the keel clearance graphic • Anchor watch • Check area See chapter 15 for information about objects other than TT/AIS. 6.1.8 Page name Minimize button Page selection buttons Alert box The [Alert] box shows operational and system alert messages, with alert ID no. and alert message. See chapter 20. 6.1.9 Permanent warning box The permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages. The box cannot be closed or minimized. 6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes The EBL measures the bearing to an object, and the VRM measures the range to an object. See section 6.10. 6-10 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.11 Context-sensitive menus Context-sensitive menus are available at the locations shown below. Right-click the applicable area then select the appropriate item from the menu. The availability of the context-sensitive menu depends on the mode in use, as shown in the table below. Cursor info display Sensor selection Chart scale Route selection, route information Electronic chart area TT/AIS page EBL reference Item Chart scale Cursor info display Sensor selection Route selection, route information TT, AIS page Alert list, Alert log VRM reference EBL reference Electronic chart area VRM reference Functions Drop-down list of chart scales. Switch cursor displays. Select sensors. Select route; unselect route; move route to plan; show route info. Access TT, AIS functions. Open alert list, alert log. Select VRM reference; offset (heading or north). Select EBL reference; offset (heading or north). Ship offcentering, centering; object info; chart legend; manual update; divider; hide MOB. Alert list, Alert log Mode and availability NAVI CHARTS PLAN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes* * Hide MOB only 6-11 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.1.12 How to enter alphanumeric data On some screens it is necessary to enter alphanumeric data. The data can be input two ways: software keyboard or trackball. Alphanumeric data entry from the software keyboard A software keyboard is also available for entry of alphanumeric data. Do as follows to use the software keyboard. Display the keyboard before opening menus. 1. On the InstantAccess bar, press the [DISP], [ ] and [ON] buttons to show the software keyboard. The [BS], [Enter], [↑], [↓],[ ←], [→] and [Space] on the keyboard function the same as those keys on the keyboard of the Control Unit. 2. To switch between the alphabet keyboard and symbols keyboard, click the [!$&] key. Alphabet keyboard Symbols keyboard 3. Click the input box. 4. Click appropriate keys and finally click the [Enter] key. To erase the software keyboard, click the X button at the top right corner of the keyboard. Alphanumeric data entry with the trackball module The trackball module can also be used to enter alphanumeric data. 1. Put the cursor in the input box. Up and down arrows appear at the right side of the box. 2. Enter data by one of the methods shown below. • Spin the scrollwheel to set data. Upward to decrease the value; downward to increase the value. • Click S to increase the value; T to decrease the value. 6-12 6. CHART OVERVIEW How to enter latitude and longitude data with the trackball module The trackball module can also be used to enter latitude and longitude data. 1. Put the cursor in the input box. A selection cursor (lightblue) appears. Selection cursor 2. Enter data by spinning the scrollwheel. Upward to decrease the value; downward to increase the value. 3. To switch coordinate between N and S and vice versa, put the cursor at the right edge of the input box. Dual arrows appear 4. Click to switch the coordinates. The method to switch E to W and vice versa is the same. 6.2 How to Select the Operating Mode Click the [Operating Mode] button at the far left side of the Status bar then click [CHART for RADAR] to activate the chart mode. [Operating Mode] button 6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode The chart display has three chart operating modes: Voyage navigation, Chart maintenance and Voyage planning. Select a mode from the Status bar with the [NAVI], [CHARTS] and [PLAN] buttons. The background of the button of the active mode is light-blue. For Voyage navigation For Voyage planning mode mode For Chart maintenance mode Note 1: When switching between the Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance modes it may take several minutes to read the chart when using C-Map charts or there are many charts installed. Note 2: If the equipment accepts no key operation after switching to the Chart maintenance mode, reset the power. 6-13 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale When you open a chart it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation scale. To change the chart scale, do one of the procedures shown below. The scale range is 1:1,000 to 1:70,000,000. • Click the chart scale selection buttons in the Chart scale/presentation mode box. • Right-click anywhere inside the Chart scale/presentation mode to show a dropdown list of chart scales. • Put the cursor anywhere on the chart and spin the scrollwheel. Chart scale indication Chart related message Chart scale selection buttons The table below lists the chart related messages and their meanings. Message Display date is not current Non-ENC data Large scale ENC available Overscale RM(OFF) 6-14 Meaning Displayed date is not the current date. ENC non-compatible chart in use. Larger scale available at current position (TM reset ON) or cursor location (TM reset OFF). Scale too large. Relative motion turned off when the chart is scrolled or the trackball is operated. 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode The presentation mode depends on the chart operating mode, as shown in the table below. Voyage navigation mode Yes North up TM North up RM Course up TM Yes Yes Course up RM Yes No Route up TM *1 Route up RM*1 Head up RM Voyage planning mode Yes*2 No Yes*2 No Yes Yes*2 No Yes No *1 When monitoring a route. *2 Motion mode (TM) is not shown. For example, “North up”. To select a presentation mode, click the presentation mode indication to cycle through the presentation mode choices or click the triangle to show the drop-down list of presentation modes. Click to show drop-down list of presentation mode choices Presentation mode Presentation modes North up: North (0 degrees) is at the top of the display. Course up: The course is put at the top of the screen the moment it is selected. Route up: The planned course is put at the top of the screen, in route monitoring. When route monitoring is canceled, the course up presentation mode is automatically selected. Head-up: Heading is put at the top of the display. TM (True Motion): Own ship mark follows ship’s movement. The chart is fixed. RM (Relative Motion): Own ship mark is put at the screen center and is fixed. The chart moves relative to own ship movement. 6-15 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.6 Cursor Position Box The Cursor position box shows • Cursor position in latitude and longitude • Time to go to the cursor position • The bearing (True or Relative) and range to the cursor position, or x-y coordinates of cursor position. Click the bearing and range indication or x-y coordinates indication to switch the indication, in the sequence shown below. Cursor position, Time to go to cursor position Bearing(T) and range to cursor position Bearing(R) and range to cursor position x-y coordinates of cursor position 6.7 The Standby Mode The standby mode, which requires a password to activate, deactivates the audio alarms from the chart system. Use this mode when the chart system is not required, like in a harbor. To go to the standby mode, first click the [OTHERS] button on the Status bar then click [STANDBY]. Have the holder of the password enter the password then click the [OK] button. To return to normal operation, click [Back to Normal Mode]. Click [OTHERS], [STANDBY]. Enter password; click [OK] button. Click to return to normal operation. 6-16 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.8 True Motion Reset In the true motion mode, the chart is stationary and own ship moves on the screen. With TM reset active, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline(s), then the chart is redrawn and own ship jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. (This resetting can also be done manually by clicking the [TM/CU Reset] button.) When the TM reset function is active, "TM/CU Reset" appears at the right side of the display. TM reset borderline setting (Ring does not appear on the display.) OWN SHIP TM Reset OWN SHIP How to enable, disable automatic TM reset To enable automatic TM reset, click the [TM Reset off] indication at the right side of the display to show [TM/CU Reset]. Click When the TM reset is disabled, change the chart scale with the scrollwheel and scroll the chat by drag and drop. The own ship functions box shows [TM Reset off]. When own ship moves off the screen the box shows [Ship off screen]. How to set the true motion reset borderline You can set the limit for TM reset (in percentage) on the [Basic Setting] page. See section 8.2.2. 6-17 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes Click for Voyage navigation mode Functions in Voyage navigation mode Click for Voyage planning mode Functions in Voyage planning mode Click the appropriate chart mode button [NAVI] or [PLAN] at the top of the display to go to respective mode. For the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button then click the button corresponding to the action to take. For the Voyage planning mode, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to select a route, or [User Chart] button to select a user chart. Voyage navigation mode functions [Select]: Selects the route to use in the Voyage navigation mode. [Route]: Shows the [Route Plan] dialog box to create or edit a route. [Unselect]: Deselects active route. [User Chart]: Shows the [User Chart] dialog box to create or edit a user chart. [Move to Plan]: Moves active route to Voyage planning mode. [Route INFO]: Shows the [Route Information] dialog box. 6-18 Voyage planning mode functions 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL The VRM measures the range to an object and the EBL measures the bearing to an object. There are two each of VRMs and EBLs. The lengths of the dashes on the EBL2 and VRM2 are longer than those of the EBL1 and VRM1 to distinguish them. The color of the VRMs and EBLs is orange. VRM1 EBL2 VRM2 EBL1 T T EBL On/Off EBL no. 240.8° VRM no. VRM On/Off T EBL bearing VRM range EBL reference 6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM Control Unit: Press the EBL or VRM key to hide or show respective marker. Trackball module: Click the arrow on an EBL or VRM box to hide the respective marker. To redisplay the marker, click the minimized box. 6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing Range: Put the cursor on the VRM then drag the cursor until the VRM is on the inner edge of the object. Bearing: Put the cursor on the EBL then drag the cursor until the EBL bisects the object. 6.10.3 How to select bearing reference The EBL bearing reference can be true or relative. Click the EBL reference indication to display T (True) or R (Relative). 6-19 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu The EBLs and VRMs have additional functions that are accessed from the contextsensitive menu. Right-click any VRM or EBL box to show the context-sensitive menu. Function Description [Centered] Centers the origin of the EBL and VRM on the current position. [Ground] Anchors the EBL and VRM to ground; neither the EBL or VRM move with ship's movement. [Offset HDG] Select [Offset HDG]. Drag and drop EBL, VRM on desired location. When vessel changes course, the EBL, VRM move so that the range (L) to their centers stays fixed. [Offset North] Select [Offset North]. Drag and drop EBL, VRM on desired location. 6-20 The EBL, VRM move to keep the angle from North to the center of the EBL, VRM, even if the vessel changes course. The distance to the center of the EBL, VRM is fixed. 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.11 Split Screen This function is currently unavailable. 6.12 Datum 6.12.1 General Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced. If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so can result in errors of several sea miles. The difference between two datum is never constant, but depends on position. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum, generally used in paper charts, is not generally valid with electronic sea charts. 6.12.2 Paper charts Datum used in paper charts have been traditionally national datum for historical reasons. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the correction terms are printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. The correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question. 6.12.3 Electronic sea charts The ENC vector material has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in the WGS-84 datum. 6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum In early days of electronic positioning devices, datum received little attention because the commonly used systems utilized special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data output was added to these systems, but still no attention was paid to datum and the position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of the GPS, however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no value if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum. 6.12.5 Chart radar and datum The chart radar uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Positioning devices connected to the chart radar must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO requires that the chart must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the WGS-84. 6-21 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings Sensor settings can also be selected in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually changed between the radar and chart for radar modes. This chart radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: [System] or [Local]. [System] shares sensor data among multiple chart radars in network. Sensor priority is also commonly shared among the chart radar. [Local] selects a sensor outside the network. 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Local] or [System]. Note: Sensor system can also be selected from the menu. Open the menu and click [System/Local Select] on the [Sensor] menu. Click the circle next to [System Sensor] or [Local Sensor] then click the [Save] button. 6.14 Open MENU How to Enter Ship Speed Speed can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually changed between the radar and chart for radar modes. The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu. Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-150 provides both COG and SOG. Speed data is checked for integrity (see section 16.7 for details), and the data is judged as [Passed], [Doubtful], [Failed], [Excluded] or [Not Available]. The results of the check appear on the [SPD] page, shown below. 6-22 6. CHART OVERVIEW [Passed] (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal. [Doubtful] (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. [Failed] (orange): Data is quite away from predicted value based on a comparison. [Excluded] (orange): Data is greatly changed compared with predicted value. [Not Available] (orange): Sentence status or mode indicator is abnormal. 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Open MENU]. 3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local Sensor Settings]. 4. Click the [SPD] tab. Open MENU Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list Stablilization mode Integrity check result LOG/GPS selection Check for manual speed input [SPD] page, system sensor Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list Stablilization mode Not Available LOG/GPS selection Integrity check result Set course and speed of drift Check to use radar as source for speed and course Check for manual speed input [SPD] page, local sensor 6-23 6. CHART OVERVIEW 5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step 6. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle on the Priority1 line to select the sensor to be the Priority1 sensor. Do the same for the Priority2. Only one sensor can be Priority1; all others are priority 2. If a speed sensor is changed from Priority2 to Priority1, then that sensor previously selected to Priority1 is then automatically selected to Priority2 state. 3) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type]. 4) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode]. Select [Bottom] if GPS is the source of speed data, or [Water] if a speed log is the source of speed data. 5) Go to step 7. 6. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. Enter the speed using the scrollwheel, the software keyboard or the keyboard on the Control Unit. Note: For set and drift, see page 16-3. 7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. Notes on speed input • Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the log signal is lost, the GPS sensor is used. In the event of GPS loss, the SPD is shown as "**.* kn". • The SPD is shown as "**.* kn", and the label "LOG" is erased if no log signal is present for a certain amount of time. The timeout varies according to ship. • If SOG is changed to STW, the label "LOG" (in orange) appears. If log signal is lost "LOG" is colored yellow. • A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the leeway direction. 6.15 How to Enter Heading Heading can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually changed between the radar and chart for radar modes. Heading can be entered manually or automatically. Heading data is checked for integrity (see section 16.7 for details), and the data is judged as [Passed], [Doubtful], [Failed], [Excluded] or [Not Available]. The integrity check results appear on the [HDG] page, shown below. [Passed] (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal. [Doubtful] (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. [Failed] (orange): Data is quite away from predicted value based on a comparison. [Excluded] (orange): Data is greatly changed compared with predicted value. [Not Available] (orange): Sentence status or mode indicator is abnormal. Note: If there is only one gyro connected to the chart radar, heading data is compared to COG from GPS. When the speed is 10 knots or less, and COG is unstable when it is compared to heading data, the data integrity is judged as [Doubtful]. When the 6-24 6. CHART OVERVIEW ship’s speed becomes greater than 10 knots and COG stabilizes, the data integrity automatically changes to [Passed]. 1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Click [Open MENU]. 3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local Sensor Settings]. 4. Click the [HDG] tab. Open MENU Check for automatic input Corr.: Sensor list Not Available Passed Corr.: Check for manual input* Not Available Passed Integrity check result *: This is not available with the [System Sensor Settings] menu. This is not shown on IMO type. [HDG] page, system sensor Check for automatic input Corr.: Sensor list Not Available Passed Check for manual input* Corr.: Not Available Passed Integrity check result *: This is not shown on IMO type. [HDG] page, local sensor 5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step 6. 1) Check [Sensors]. 2) For local system settings, set the priority for each sensor connected, referring to section 6.14. 3) Go to step 7. 6. For manual input, check [Manual]. Enter the heading using the scrollwheel, the software keyboard or the keyboard on the Control Unit. 7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. 6-25 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.16 Set up Before Departure 6.16.1 Updates before departure Update S57 chart material Update your S57 chart material before embarking on a new voyage. See section 7.19. Display date and approve until dates for S57 charts and manual updates Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approved until dates for charts as the current date. There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in charts. Accordingly, if you have not set Display date and Approved until dates as the current date, there is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some feature may be absent. See section 9.2. Create or update user chart, Notes If necessary, create a new user chart and Notes or modify existing ones. See chapter 13. Chart alert calculation Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage, on the [CheckArea] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. See section 11.2. 6-26 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.16.2 Create or update a route Create a new route or modify an existing one. See chapter 12. Check your route against chart alerts Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alerts. This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart viewing dates information. You can check chart alerts from the [Check Results] page on the [Route Plan] dialog box. The following information is stored with the monitoring route plan: • Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring, which includes safety contour and other chart alerts, on the [Alert Parameters] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box. B • Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route, on the [User Chart] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box. B 6-27 6. CHART OVERVIEW • Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route, on the [User Chart] dialog box (click the [Planning] button then click the [User Chart] button). Check in Notes column indicates Notes is used with route monitoring and planned route. Recalculate timetable and ETA values Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time, and set optimization values. B 6.16.3 How to check and prepare route to monitor Select a route for the voyage: In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] button followed by the [Select] button, or right-click the route indication in the [Route Information] box (right edge of screen) then select [Select Route]. See chapter 12. Note: A route cannot be opened if its planned settings are different from its navigation settings. The reason is given on the [Select Route] dialog box. In this case, open the route in the Voyage planning mode and click the [Check Route] button, on the [Alert Parameters] page. Adjust the route as necessary. The To WPT can be selected, however WPT 01 cannot be selected. 6-28 6. CHART OVERVIEW Select confirm conditions of the route plan Check the setting on the [Chart Alert] dialog box; click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons to show that dialog box. Planned user chart, Notes To check what planned user chart is selected, open the [Route Information] dialog box and click the [User Chart] tab. The name of the user chart(s) to be used is in the [Linked User Chart] window. 6-29 6. CHART OVERVIEW 6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors You can check the configuration of your navigation sensors. Check speed settings ([SPD] page) Open the menu and click the [SPD] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The user can select navigation sensors for use in navigation and view their current values. Passed [SPD] page, system sensor Passed [SPD] page, local sensor Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If there is no value shown for a sensor, it indicates that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship. Select the available dual logs. Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed reference is available. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed sources. If no dual log is available, check [Reference SPD] (local sensor page) to use a reference target from the radar as the source for speed and course. 6-30 6. CHART OVERVIEW Check position sensors ([POSN] page) Open the menu and click the [POSN] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The [Prim] and [Second] labels indicate the type of the position sensor. (In the figure below the [Prim] label shows GPS1.) [Prim] and [Second] indicate sensor status and priority. LAT: LON: Passed LAT: LON: Not Available Second shows Integrity as “Not Available” when only one position-fixing equipment is connected. Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off position. After a sensor is turned off, its status is changed to Secondary state. When a position sensor state is changed to primary and another sensor was primary, the sensor formerly primary becomes secondary. Select the "Primary" navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Set all other navigation sensors as "Secondary". 6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter To reset the odometer and/or trip meter do as follows: 1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAVI Log] menu in the [Record] menu. 2. Click one of the following buttons. [Reset All]: Reset both the odometer and the trip meter. [Reset Trip]: Reset the trip distance. 3. Click the [Close] button to finish. 6-31 6. CHART OVERVIEW This page is intentionally left blank. 6-32 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS This chapter mainly shows you how to install the public keys, licenses and charts, manually update chart objects, and synchronize charts among chart radars. All chartrelated operations begin from the Chart maintenance mode, which you access by clicking the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar. Note 1: Charts, routes and user charts are shared with other FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 and FAR-3xx0 units, via LAN. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required. Note 2: Chart processing (installation, deletion, etc.) may take several minutes depending on the number of charts to be processed. Note 3: If, when attempting to install charts, nothing appears on the display at the start of the procedure, reset the power and try again. 7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts Public keys authenticate the source and integrity of the ENC chart materials used in this chart system. Before you install a new ENC chart, confirm that the corresponding public key is installed. Generally, there are two types of public keys: • IHO (file name: IHO.PUB) • Primar (file name: PRIMAR.pub) 1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the public key. (The IHO public key is preinstalled.) 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Public Key] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [Load New Key] button to show the [Open file] dialog box. 4. Find the .pub file then click the [Open] button. The [Select Public Key] dialog box reappears. 7-1 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 5. Click the [Display Content] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog box to show the display contents. Public Key content //BIG p FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE 01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998 CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17 //BIG q FCA6 82SE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF7 110E 526D B078 B05E DECB CD1E B4A2 08F3 AE16 17AE 01F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5E1 2ED0 8998 CD13 2ACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3579 2E17 6. To accept the contents, click the [Activate] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog box. 7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts Install your ENC licenses and charts, in that order. 7.2.1 How to install an ENC license Automatic installation 1. Insert the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ENC license. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Install Licenses] button. 4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button. 7-2 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 5. Find the license (permit.txt) then click the [OK] button to install the license. The [Licenses] dialog box then shows cell name, date of expiration, data server name and subscription type of the license. 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. Manual installation If you do not have the medium which has your ENC license, you can enter the license number manually. 1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box. 3. Select the type [ENC/ARCS] at the bottom of the screen. 4. Enter the license number(s) then click the [OK] button. 7.2.2 How to install ENC charts When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number, from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by clicking the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar. Note: Do not click the [Cancel] button during the installation of a chart. If you get an error message, try to install the charts again. 1. Set the medium that contains the ENC charts. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the InstantAccess bar. The confirmation message "Attention: This process takes time to complete, and the operation speed of the system will decline. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue. A message informs you that 7-3 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a DVD) for chart data. The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To cancel the installation, click the [Cancel] button. 3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications. To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button. To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button. 7-4 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish. 5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium then repeat steps 2-4 to install the next database. Note 1: When many charts are installed, the chart system checks for error in the installed chart data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction. Note 2: Previous versions of charts cannot be displayed if installed after installing the latest versions. 7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. 2. Click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [ENC] tab as appropriate to show a list of licenses. 4. Put a checkmark next to the license(s) to delete. 5. Click the [Delete Licenses] button to delete the license(s) selected. 7-5 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.4 How to Install C-MAP Charts Synchronize chart data before you install C-MAP charts, grouping the chart radar units to synchronize, otherwise the chart data cannot be shared. See the procedure in paragraph 7.20.1 for how to synchronize chart data. If C-MAP charts are not synchronized after installation, delete all C-MAP charts, and do the above procedure again. 7.4.1 How to register the eToken The eToken is a hardware mechanism (installed inside the processor unit) used for password authentication. Registration of the eToken is required only once, before you install the C-MAP database. 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [License] dialog box. 2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to the show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 3. Click the [C-MAP Setup] button. 4. The confirmation message "Attention: C-MAP eToken will be initialized. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue and register the eToken. Note 1: "CMAP: No connection to eToken" disappears from the Permanent warning box after completion of the registration. Note 2: You can show your C-MAP system ID by clicking the [C-MAP SystemID] button on the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. C-MAP system ID appears here. 7.4.2 How to install the C-MAP database When you install the C-MAP database from a medium, all data is saved to the SSD. Note 1: If several chart radar units are installed, synchronize C-MAP charts among the units after you have installed the database. Note 2: The installation of a chart cannot be cancelled while it is in progress. If you get an error message, try to install the charts again. Note 3: Disable the Chart Alert function at the [CheckArea] page of the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box (see section 11.2) before removing any C-MAP charts. Note 4: The C-MAP database in the units selected for synchronization are synchronized at the successful completion of the database installation. 7-6 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 1. Insert the medium that contains the C-MAP database. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications. To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button. To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button. 4. When the installation is completed, information about the chart database installed appears in the [Error/Warning/Guidance] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish. 5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-3 to install the next databases. Note 1: If, after installation, C-MAP Pro+ charts do not appear, delete all corresponding charts and then reinstall them. Note 2: Synchronization is not done for charts which could not be installed successfully. Reinstall failed charts. 7-7 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.4.3 How to install C-MAP licenses A C-MAP license can be installed automatically or manually. Automatic installation 1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the C-MAP license. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [Install Licenses] button. 4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button. 5. Click the [OK] button to install the license. 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. Manual installation 1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box. 3. Select the type [C-MAP] at the bottom of the window. 4. Enter the [Database name] and [Collection name] information as shown in the table below. Enter the names exactly as shown to ensure correct installation. Database name Chart type Name to enter Professional: World Professional+: Professional+ CM-ENC: ENC JeppesenPRIMAR: JeppesenPRIMAR Collection name Enter the contracted zone number according to chart type as follows: Professional/Professional+: Enter "Zone *" (without quotations) Ex. Zone 0 CM-ENC/JeppesenPRIMAR: Enter "Zone * ENC" (without quotations) Ex. Zone 0 ENC * = Zone no. 5. Enter the license (max. 16 characters) in the bottommost window. 6. Click the [OK] button to install the license. 7. Click the [Close] button to finish. 7-8 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.4.4 How to generate and order an update file To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to generate an update file, and e-mail the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display on your chart system. 1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord. 5. Select the USB flash memory. 6. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory. 7. Send the order file to updates@c-map.no. Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as shown in the next section. 7.4.5 How to apply the update file 1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Update from File] button. 5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button. 7.5 How to Delete a C-MAP Database 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 3. Select the database to delete with the [Database] pull-down list. 4. Click the [Delete Database] button. 7-9 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.6 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts Register the eToken if it has not already been registered. See section 7.4.1. 7.6.1 How to generate and order an update file To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to create an update file and e-mail the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display on your chart system. 1. Insert a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord. 5. Select the USB flash memory. 6. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory. 7. Send the order file to updates@c-map.no. Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as shown in the next section. 7.6.2 How to apply the update file 1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP. 4. Click the [Update from File] button. 5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button. Note: If the .ans file does not update the status of all shared C-MAP DL charts, reset the power of all processor units. 7-10 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.6.3 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [C-MAP DL] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP DL. C1210011 ENC 01 Jun 2012 Unissued 3. Check [Enable Dynamic License] to enable the dynamic licensing. You now have access to all the charts contained within the selected subscription zones - both already licensed charts and new charts. Settings, indications on the Licenses dialog box for C-MAP DL • Set your annual credit limit with [Credit Limit]. A permanent warning is given if your credit goes below this value. A new chart cannot be enabled if it causes the credit to go below this value. • [Credit Rest] shows the amount of credit remaining and is updated each time you receive a confirmation answer for your request via e-mail. • [Next Report Date] is the date when the next report should be sent to Jeppesen. If charts are not reported before the mandatory report date, access to all non-reported charts is discontinued and can be resumed only after the confirmation answer allowing use of the charts is received via e-mail. • [Confirmation Date] is the date when you receive the confirmation answer for your request via e-mail. • [Confirm before open new chart], if checked, a confirmation window asks for confirmation before opening charts that require issuing a new license. A chart denied is added to the list of protected charts, so the confirmation request will not be repeated for that chart. Those charts cannot be opened until they are removed from the list of protected charts. • [Protected], if checked, shows the protected charts in the cell list. To remove a chart from protection, select it then click the [Release] button. Then, when an attempt is made to open that chart, the confirmation window appears. Note that multiple confirmation windows open when releasing multiple charts from protection. 7.7 How to Export a List of Charts Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Check the charts to add to the list. Click the [Export List] button to export the checked charts to a USB flash memory, in .txt format. 7-11 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.8 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses You can export a list of your ENC or C-MAP (excluding C-MAP DL) licenses to a USB flash memory, in .txt format. 1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. 3. Click the [ENC] or [C-MAP] tab. 4. Click the [Export List] button. 5. Change the file name at [File Name] if desired. 6. Select the USB flash memory then click the [Save] button. 7. Click the [OK] button to finish. 7.9 How to Show the ENC Permit 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. 2. Click the [ENC] tab. 3. Click the [ENC User Permit] button to show the ENC permit. 4. Click the [OK] button to finish. 7.10 How to Backup, Restore Licenses You can make backup copies of your ENC and AVCS (AIO) licenses and save them to a USB flash memory. If re-installation of the licenses becomes necessary, you can re-install them from the USB flash memory. The backup and restore functions are not available with C-MAP charts. To backup licenses: 1. Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Backup Licenses] button. 4. Select the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button to save the licenses. To restore licenses: 1. Insert the USB flash memory that has the licenses into the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Licenses] dialog box. 3. Click the [Restore Licenses] button. 4. Select the licenses from the USB flash memory then click the [OK] button. 7-12 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.11 How to View Permit Expiration Date Permits are used to control the right to use chart data in this chart system. A permit is connected to the edition of a chart. Permits are issued in two different types: • Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 3, 6, 9 or 12 months. • One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the permit. The expiry date of a permit controls the installation of Base charts and their updates to the chart. The system will warn you when you are installing charts or updates that are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. If a permit has expired, it is impossible to install a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration date of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, except C-MAP charts that have viewing periods which end two months after the expiry date of the license. If the charts are not updated regularly it will not complete the requirements for having up-to-date charts. To view the permit status of a chart, click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar and then click the applicable "chart" tab ([ENC], [C-MAP] or [C-MAP DL]). The example below shows the status of ENC charts. The expiration date of each cell appears in the [Expires] window. Subscription warnings for RENC If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn you about the expiration date of your subscription license, in the Permanent warning box. Note: If you change service provider for some reason, it is recommended that you remove all the charts from this chart system before installing new charts of new service provider. 7-13 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.12 How to Display Install/Update History You can see a history of chart installations and updates. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Record] and [Chart Log] buttons followed by the [ENC] or [C-MAP] button. The example below shows the install/update history for ENC charts. You can filter the log with [Period Covered (UTC)]. Enter the period to display then click the [Set Period] button. Click the [Clear Period] button to display all entries. The [Refresh] button updates the list. [Print Text] prints hard copy of the history. The [Find] button searches required text string as follows: 1. Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. Input box Find Enter text in box and [Find] button appears. 2. Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3. Select the search direction with the [up] or [down] radio button. 4. Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5. To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. 7-14 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.13 Catalog of Chart Cells A catalog is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your SSD, available in a named "medium". Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts. Note that sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it. To display the catalog, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. The [Filter] window lets you select what to display. Check or uncheck items as appropriate. 11 1 2 3 4 5 [Filter] window 6 Not up-to-date 7 8 9 10 License ok, chart is up-to-date DL issued, not reported License ok, chart is not up-to-date 12 License available, chart not installed Not available or expired Canceled chart yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 1) [Chart Type] [ENC]: Display ENC charts. [ARCS]: Display ARCS charts (no use). [C-MAP]: Display C-MAP charts. 2) [Availability] Display available or unavailable charts. 3) [License] [Valid]: Cell with valid license. [Missing/Expired]: Cell with missing or expired license. [Valid] + [Missing/Expired]: Display cell regardless of license. Uncheck both: Hide all cells. 4) [Dynamic License] Display DL or non-DL C-MAP charts. 7-15 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 5) [C-MAP Collections] A collection is a pre-defined dataset, the contents of which can be defined by zone, individual chart or any of those combinations. Applicable to C-MAP charts also. 6) [Official] Display official or unofficial charts. 7) [Up-to-date] Display charts which are or are not up to date. 8) [Purpose] Display chart according to its purpose - [Overview], [General], [Coastal], [AIO], [Approach], [Harbour], [Berthing]. 9) [Group] See the next section for how to group charts. 10) [Route] Show or hide chart area with route. 11) Chart boundary boxes Define the area covered by a chart and are color-coded according license and permit status. 12) [Line Color Legend] The line color legend provides information about license validity. Color Green Yellow Orange Magenta Red Blue 7.13.1 Message License ok, chart is up-to-date DL issued, not reported License ok, chart is not up-to-date License available, chart not installed Not available or expired Canceled chart How to group chart cells You can define groups of like-format chart cells. This means you can collect related charts, for example, all cells that cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office. You can make a group and define charts from the [Edit Group] dialog box. How to make a new group of chart cells 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Edit] button in the [Filter] window to show the [Edit Group] dialog box. Group Name: 7-16 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 3. Click the [New] button. 4. In the [Outside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to add to the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Select All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of [Name], in either window.) 5. After you have selected the cells to add to the group, click the [<<] button to move the names of the selected cells to the [Inside Group] window. If you want to remove a chart from the group, select it then click the [>>] button. 6. Click the [Save] button. 7. Enter a name for the group, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software keyboard, then click the [OK] button. 8. Click the [Close] button to finish. How to edit a group of chart cells You can edit a group of chart cells from a group as follows: 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. 2. Click the [Edit] button. 3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name]. 4. In the [Inside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to remove from the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Select All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of [Name].) 5. After you have selected the charts to remove to the group, click the [>>] button to remove the selected charts cells from the group. 6. Click the [Save] button. 7. Click the [Close] button to finish. How to delete a group of chart cells You can delete group of chart cells as follows: 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. 2. Click the [Edit] button. 3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name]. 4. Click the [Remove] button. 5. Click the [OK] button. 6. Click the [Close] button to finish. How to select the group to view 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Filter] window. 2. Select the group to view from the pull-down list at [Group]. 3. Click the [Close] button to finish. 7-17 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.13.2 How to view status of chart cells The [Cell Status] dialog box shows the status of the chart cells stored in the system. To show this dialog box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar. • [Type]: Type of chart cell, ENC or C-MAP. • [Chart Name]: Chart name • [Data Server]: The name of the data server where the chart was downloaded from. • [Edition/Issued Date]: Edition no. and issued date of the chart cell. • [Update: Num/Date]: No. and date of the update of the chart cell. • [Updated]: [yes] is shown if the cell is up-to-date, [no] if the cell is not up-to-date, [maybe] means the cell has not been updated from more than one month. 7.14 How to Open Charts In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to display the dialog box shown below. Select the chart to open then click the [Open Chart] button. 7-18 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.15 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List 7.15.1 How to print the chart list 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. 2. Check the charts to print. 3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print. 4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the message "The number of page is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.) Example Description of chart list printout Item [Ship Name] [IMO Number] [Call Sign] [MMSI Number] [Printing Date] [Data Location] [Filter] [Status Summary] Description Name of ship Ship’s IMO number Ship’s call sign Ship’s MMSI number Date list printed Location of charts; normally [Internal]. Settings of the items in the [Filter] window. [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts [no]: charts with no status/total number of charts 7-19 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.15.2 How to print the cell status list 1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Cell Status] dialog box. 2. Check the charts to print. 3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print. 4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the message "The number of page is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the [OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.) Example Description of cell status printout Item [Ship Name] [IMO Number] [Call Sign] [MMSI Number] [Printing Date] [Filter] [Status Summary] 7.16 Description Name of ship Ship’s IMO number Ship’s call sign Ship’s MMSI number Date list printed Settings of the items in the [Filter] window. [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts [no]: charts with no status/total number of charts How to Delete Charts 1. Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. 2. Click the block to the left of the chart to remove to show a checkmark. A contextsensitive menu with [Select All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by rightclicking the block to the left of [Type]. 3. Click the [Delete Charts] button to delete the charts selected. 4. Click the [Close] button to finish. 7-20 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.17 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts You should read the text file associated with each catalog, which you can view when installing a chart from a medium. Click the [Note] button in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. You can print a hard copy with the [Print Text] button. 7-21 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.18 How to Find the Chart Type The electronic chart system can display more than one ENC chart cell at a time. This feature is called multi-cell display. If one ENC chart cell does not cover the whole display, the system opens more ENC chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The Own ship functions box shows information about ENC chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM reset is active, the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. If TM reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position. ENC info appears here. Chart type indication No indication (Official ENC chart) “Non-ENC data” (Unofficial ENC chart, indication in yellow) “ENC data available” (Currently, RNC chart is in use, but ENC material is available. Indication shown in yellow.) 7.19 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this system, manual updates are stored in a common database. Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display. If a mariner needs to make obsolete any of the official objects, he “deletes” them. Then, in practice, the deleted objects are still visible, but a diagonal line on the object indicates it is a deleted object. However, a mariner can remove objects that he has inserted himself. Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update received later for charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the official chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update, the mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question. The system records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications and insertions are recorded and time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks ago, he uses Update History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display date and Approved until dates, see paragraph 9.2.3. 7-22 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.19.1 How to insert update symbols An update symbol can be added as shown in the procedure below. Note 1: If the system freezes when updating the drawing type [Area], reset the power. Note 2: An update symbol that straddles the international date line cannot be edited. In this case, insert the same symbol on each side of the line. 1. Go to the Voyage navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar to open the [Manual Update] dialog box. 3. Click the [Planning] tab. 4. Click the [Add] button. Note: This window can also be shown from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then select [Manual Update] and [Add New]. 5. Use the [Drawing Type] pull-down list to select drawing type: [Point], [Line] or [Area]. 6. Click desired object. 7. Put the cursor on the location where to insert the symbol then left click. The [Manual Update] dialog box shows: - [Object] - [Drawing Type] - [Display Until] (display until date*) * Set as desired; default setting is three months from date of entry. 8. You can add a comment related to a manual update object in the [Description] box. 7-23 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 9. To add textual information to an attribute, select the attribute from the [Attributes] window then add text in the [Edit Attribute’s Value] window. 10. Click the [Commit] button to add all selected objects to the chart. Note: A manual update object is displayed until the display until date entered for it has passed. If the object remains on the screen after the display until date, do some operation on the screen to refresh the screen to erase the object. 7.19.2 How to delete update symbols Manually entered update symbols cannot be deleted until the display until date arrives or is changed. However, you can mark the symbol to indicate that it can be ignored. 1. Put the cursor on the symbol then right-click to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Manual Update] and [Delete]. The symbol is marked with a diagonal line. Note: A symbol can also be deleted from the [Manual Update] dialog box. Follow steps 1-2 in paragraph 7.19.1, click the [List] tab, select the symbol to delete then click the [Delete] button. 7.19.3 How to modify existing update symbols The position, display until date and description of an update symbol can be modified. A symbol that is marked as “deleted” cannot be modified. 1. Follow steps 1-2 in paragraph 7.19.1 to display the [Manual Update] dialog box. 2. Click the [List] tab. 3. Select the object to modify then click the [Modify] button. The [Planning] dialog box appears. 4. Modify the object referring to steps 8-9 in paragraph 7.19.1. 5. Click the [Commit] button. 7-24 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS 7.20 How to Synchronize Chart Data This section shows you how to synchronize chart data between FMD-3xx0 and FAR3xx0 units, so that all units share the same chart data. Synchronization can be done automatically or manually (see paragraph 7.20.2), however all units selected for synchronization must be powered to complete the synchronization. Synchronization includes the following actions: • Synchronize public keys • Synchronize chart permits and licenses • Synchronize chart data • Synchronize manual updates Note 1: Before synchronizing chart data, confirm that all units selected for synchronization are powered. (Do not turn off a unit during synchronizing.) If a unit is turned off during the synchronizing, do the following on the unit which contains the medium: • Open the [Sync Status] dialog box then click the [Disable Sync] button to disable synchronization. Power all units registered for synchronization, then click the [Urge Sync] button on the [Sync Status] dialog box on the unit containing the media to forcibly synchronize. • Make a group of all the units currently powered, referring to paragraph 7.20.1, and register the group with [Grouped with This Unit]. Reset the power on all units selected for synchronization. Note 2: C-MAP charts are not automatically synchronized. C-MAP charts are only synchronized immediately after installing or updating the C-MAP database. If the system has several FCRs or FMDs, make a group of associated units before you install C-MAP charts. 7.20.1 How to select the units to synchronize Do as follows to select the units to synchronize. 1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System] followed by [Sync Config] to show the [Sync Config] dialog box. CRA002 CRA003 CRA004 [Grouped with This Unit]: This window shows the units currently selected for synchronization. [Not Synchronize with This Unit]: This windows shows the units not selected for synchronization. 2. To select a unit for synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name in the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window then click the [<<] button. That 7-25 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS unit’s name is moved to the [Grouped with This Unit] window. To deselect a unit from synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name in the [Grouped with This Unit] window then click the [>>] button. That unit’s name is moved to the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window. To deselect all units, click the [Reset All] button. 3. Click the [Save] button to finish. 4. Restart the power on applicable units to apply synchronization configuration changes. 7.20.2 How to check synchronization status You can check chart synchronization status on the [Sync Status] dialog box. Chart synchronization operations also are available from this dialog box. Normally, chart synchronization is done automatically, according to the sync settings on the [Sync Config] dialog box. Use the [Sync Status] dialog box to manually synchronize chart data when there is network failure, for example. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar, click [System] followed by [Sync Status] to show the [Sync Status] dialog box. [Current Status]: Displays current synchronization status. The table below shows all the synchronization status messages. Sync status [disabled] [must receive] [must send] [none] Meaning Synchronization is disabled. This chart radar will receive chart data from another FMD-3xx0 or FAR-3xx0 series. This chart radar will send chart data to another FMD-3xx0 or FAR3xx0 series. No synchronization task ready. [Update] button: Click this button to update [Current Status]. [Enable Sync] button: Enables synchronization. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you want to enable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to enable synchronization. Synchronization is always enabled when chart radar starts. A progress bar indicates progress in synchronization. The bar is erased within five minutes after completion of synchronization. [Disable Sync] button: Disables synchronization function temporarily. Use this feature to enable chart administration in case of network failure, for example. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you want to disable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to temporarily disable synchronization. 7-26 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS Note 1: In normal operation do not disable synchronization. If you accidentally disable synchronization, try to synchronize by clicking the [Enable Sync] button. If that does not work, reset the power of all units selected for synchronization then click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize. Note 2: With synchronization disabled, the message "Synchronization disabled" may appear twice when installing a license. This does not affect installation of a license. [Urge Sync] button: Does immediate synchronization. The confirmation message "Attention: Chart data in other units will be overwritten by this unit. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to synchronize. If synchronization is not successful, restart applicable units and try again. [Reset Status] button: Reset synchronization status to recover from synchronization status conflict. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you want to reset sync status? This unit may be synchronized from the other unit." appears. Click the [OK] button to reset. 7.20.3 Manual updates and synchronization If you are synchronizing multiple FAR-3xx0 units while manual updating is being done on one of the units, the message "File not found" may appear, meaning the manual update data was deleted. If this occurs, follow the procedure below to synchronize the FAR-3xx0 units. The procedure uses CRA001 and CRA002 as an example. 1. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click [System] and [Sync Config] on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Add CRA002 to [Grouped with This Unit] then click the [Save] button. 3. Reset the power on the CRA001 and CRA002. 4. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [System] and [Sync Status] buttons on InstantAccess bar to show the [Sync Status] dialog box. 5. Click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize charts between CRA001 and CRA002. 6. To confirm synchronization, do as follows: 1) At the CRA001, get into the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar to open the [Manual Update] dialog box. 2) Click the [Planning] tab followed by the [Add] button. 3) Insert an object at the CRA001. 4) At the CRA002, move the cursor or change the chart scale. Confirm that the chart is updated. 7.21 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts If you unintentionally installed outdated SENC charts, you can reconvert those charts to the latest SENC charts. Click the [System] and [Reconvert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to reconvert all your SENC charts. Note: All manual updates are removed in the reconversion. 7-27 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS This page is intentionally left blank. 7-28 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS This chapter provides the information necessary for controlling chart features. 8.1 How to Browse Your Charts You can view your charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools for browsing charts are the RANGE key, chart offcenter, and scroll. RANGE - and RANGE + change the chart scale. (The scrollwheel also can change the chart scale. Spin to change.) If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display. The system automatically selects next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing position, the message "Larger scale ENC available" appears. The own ship position can be easily relocated to the screen center in the Navigation voyage and Navigation planning modes. Further, in the Navigation voyage mode, the own ship position can be put at the cursor position. To move the own ship mark to the screen center, put the cursor in the chart area and right-click [Ship on center]. To move the own ship mark to a location, right-click the position on the chart where to put the own ship mark then right-click [Ship off center]. ([Ship off center] is not available in the Voyage planning mode.) To scroll your chart, simply drag and drop. 8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects The [Chart Display] menu has several pages of chart features that you may show or hide as appropriate. To display this menu, click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 8.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour You can set values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour, on the [Chart Alert] dialog box (sequence: [DISP], [SET], [Chart Alert]). Colors used for depth presentation on the electronic chart are controlled by setting values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour. Soundings on the electronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of safety depth, are highlighted. See the illustrations on the next page for multi-color presentation and two-color presentation. Selection of multi- and two-color presentations can be done by selecting from list box of [Depths] on the [Basic Setting] menu. Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour. 8-1 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS MULTI-COLOR presentation Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In the multi-color presentation four colors are used for depths. If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour as the safety contour. For example, the input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in the electronic chart. Then, the system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour (10 m) as the safety contour. The depth contour value of 10 m is used as the safety contour in the electronic chart. Shallow contour shows visual color change inside an unsafe water area. An unsafe water area is all areas shallower than the safety contour. Set the value for the shallow contour less than the value of the safety contour. TWO-COLOR presentation Chart zero Shallow contour Safety contour (input value) Safety contour (exisiting in ENC) Deep contour Non-navigable area Navigable area In the two-color presentation, unsafe water is shown in blue and safe water is shown in white. The safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safety contour) and safe water (depths deeper than safety contour). If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically selects the next deeper available depth contour as the safety contour, the same as with the multi-color presentation. 8-2 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.2.2 Basic Setting menu To display this menu, click [DISP], [SET] and [Basic Setting] on the InstantAccess bar. [Symbols]: Select how to display chart symbols. The options are: [Simplified]: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color. [Paper Chart]: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts. [Depths]: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. [Two Color]: The chart display uses only two colors: • Deeper than safety contour • Shallower than safety contour [Multi Color]: The chart display uses four different colors for contours: • Deeper than user-selected deep contour • Between deep contour and user-selected safety contour • Between safety contour and user-selected shallow water contour • Between shallow water contour and coastline [Boundaries]: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are: [Plain]: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines. [Symbolized]: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line. [Lightsectors]: Set how to display light sectors. The options are: [Limited]: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale. [Full]: The length of a light sector represents its nominal range as defined by the chart producer. [Shallow Pattern]: Set how to display shallow water area. The options are: [None]: Shallow water areas are not shown. [Diamond]: Provided to distinguish shallow water at night. [Shallow Hazard]: Show or hide the shallow hazard symbols ( ). [TM Reset]: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). For example, "80" resets the position when the own ship marker is at a location which is 80% of the range. 8-3 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.2.3 Chart Display menu To access this menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] on the InstantAccess bar then open the [Standard], [Other] or [AIO] page as appropriate. The [Standard] page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard display. You can recall the standard display at any time in a single action; click the [STD DISP] button on the Status bar to get the standard display. The [Other] page contains chart features for which you can control visibility and that are not part of IMO-defined standard display. The [AIO] page controls what to display on the Admiralty Information Overlay. AIO Note: To display the information for the cursor-selected object, the associated chart feature must be turned on from the [Standard], [Other] or [AIO] page. 8-4 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.2.4 Display base A subset of chart features is called the “display base”. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible. To get the display base, uncheck all items on the [Standard] and [Other] pages in the [Chart Display] menu. The display base consists of the following chart features: • Coastline (high water) • Own ship's safety contour, which is selected by the user • Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour • Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation. • Traffic routine systems • Scale, range, orientation and operating mode • Units of depth and height 8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features Control of symbols and features is divided into five pages in the [Symbol Display] menu, which you can access by clicking the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. [General] page: Controls own ship and target related items. [Tracking] page: Controls past tracks and some other features. [Route] page: Controls planned and monitored route. [Mariner] page: Controls user charts. [Targets] page: Controls TT and AIS targets. The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area. 8.3.1 General page 3 mm 3 mm [Ship Outlines] [Ship Outlines]: Select [OFF] or [ON] to show minimized or scaled symbol, respectively. [AIS Outlines]: Select [OFF] or [ON] to show AIS targets in same size or scaled symbol, respectively. 8-5 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS [True outlines shown if]: If the length or width of the own ship mark is greater than 3 mm, the own ship mark is shown with the true scale symbol. Select [Length] or [Beam width]. The right illustration in the figure below shows own ship mark and AIS targets with scaled symbols. The left illustrations shows own ship mark and AIS targets with point symbol. AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>3 mm) on the [General] page in the [Symbol Display] menu and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of the true scale symbol is larger than 3 mm on the chart display. [Velocity Vectors] [Ship Vectors]: Show or hide own ship vector. [Target Vectors]: Show or hide target vectors. [Style]: Select the vector style. The [std ECDIS] vector is a speed-referenced vector symbol. [Conventional] is a simplified symbol. [Time Increments]: Check to show ticks of velocity vector. This controls both own ship and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly spaced, they will be automatically removed from the display, until spacing between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separately. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel and target. [Path Predictor]: Check to show the path predictor. The path predictor is a single dashed line originating at the CCRP and drawn at a length to represent the distance and path own ship will travel over the ground in the user-selected time interval for own ship speed vector. [Radar Antenna]: Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x”). 8-6 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.3.2 Tracking page [Own Ship Past Tracks] [CCRP]: Check to plot CCRP position. [Primary]: Check to plot own ship's past track with position fed from sensor with highest priority. [Secondary]: Check to plot own ship's past track with position fed from sensor with second highest priority. [Style]: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by [Tick] or [Point]). [Length]: Select length of past track. [Labels]: Select label interval. [Events] Events marks are based on the [Voyage] log records. [User Events]: Display event symbols on the chart. User events are recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [User Event] on the InstantAccess bar. [Auto Events]: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has recorded an event based on conditions you have set. Auto events are recorded every 14 hours. [Positions]: Display the latitude and longitude of an event, recorded by clicking [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] on the InstantAccess bar. Note 1: A MOB event is visible always. Note 2: You can select the period of time to display event marks, from the [Show] list box. [Newer than 12 hours], [Newer than 24 hours], [Newer than 1 week], [Newer than 2 weeks], [Newer than 1 month], [Newer than 3 months], or [All]. 8-7 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.3.3 Route page The [Route] page selects the route parts of the monitored and planned routes to show on the chart. [Channel Limit]: The distance from the centerline to one side of the nav lane. [Safety Margin]: The distance from one side of the channel limit to the safety margin distance. [Leg Marks]: Indications of waypoint no. and range and bearing to next waypoint. [Wheel Over Line]: The location where the ship turns toward new course. WPT1 124.8° 0.8NM Safety margin Channel limit Wheel over line WPT2 87.9° 1.2NM 8.3.4 WPT3 Leg mark Mariner page [User chart] [Labels]: Check to show labels on user charts. [Lines]: Check to show lines on user charts. [Clearing Lines]: Check to show clearing lines (for marking dangerous areas) on user charts. 8-8 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS [Tidals]: Check to show symbols and tidals on user charts. [Areas]: Check to show areas on the user charts. [Circles]: Check to show circles on user charts. [Transparent]: Set the degree of transparency for the user chart objects. Color fill for the areas can be selected as transparent from 25%, 50%, 75% and as [No color fill]. If [No color fill] is selected, only the boundaries of the areas are visible. 8.3.5 Targets page [Color]: Select color of target (TT and AIS, common) from the list box. [AtoN Symbol Color]: Select the color for AtoN symbols. [TT Size]: Select symbol size for tracked targets, [Standard] or [Small]. [AIS ROT TAG Limit]: ROT (°/min.), limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector. (Source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel.) [TT Label]: Show or hide the TT label (target no.). [AIS Label]: Show or hide the AIS label (ship’s name). [TT Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the TT pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking a TT. [AIS Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the AIS pop-up, which is shown by right-clicking an AIS target. [AIS Base Station]: Show or hide AIS base stations. [AIS Physical AtoN]: Show or hide AIS physical AtoN. [AIS Virtual AtoN]: Show or hide AIS virtual AtoN. TT(04) COG: 235.0°T SOG: 6.1kn CPA: 0.23NM TCPA: -10:18 NAME VOYA... COG: 324.0°T SOG: 8.1kn CPA: 0.12NM TCPA: -19:18 TT pop-up info AIS pop-up info [Past Position] [TT Points]: Select the number of TT past position points to display. [AIS Points]: Select the number of AIS past position points to display. [Style]: Select style of presentation of target's past position. 8-9 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS 8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings There are three sets of predefined chart display settings that can be used to display charts with certain chart features. The predefined chart display settings are • [IMO BASE] • [IMO STD] (STANDARD) • [IMO ALL] You can change the chart display setting in use with the [Chart database] button on the Status bar. [Chart database] button 8-10 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vectorcoded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3 and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorized Hydrographic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal issues in this chapter. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to as "S57 charts" regardless of their source. Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your S57 charts. This is called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales from the same area. 9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts An ENC chart is encrypted to prevent unauthorized use so the user needs a permit to view the ENC. This permit could be entered manually from the Control Unit, loaded from a USB flash memory. Any new ENC must be loaded into the system. Some parts of the charts may be date dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with Display date and Approved until dates. In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts. An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds of updates: 1. Incremental updates, which are small additions to original base cells. 2. Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base cells and their updates. All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display date and Approved until dates. Using Display date and Approved until dates, you can view your charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future. Chart material will be stored in media such as DVD ROMs, CD ROMs and USB flash memory or electronically through from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived in DVD ROMs, CD ROMs or USB flash memories. Such material can contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart system contains as standard the software required to access a medium. Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides the chart itself. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This system copies these textual descriptions and pictures into its SSD so the user may cursor-pick them for viewing purposes. 9-1 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.1.1 9.1.2 Definitions of terms Cell A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data and it is the smallest division of ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name. Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish. S57 chart A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with this system without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office. ENC A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with this system on the authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be considered necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for ENC is S57ed3. SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by the system for appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the system for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also contain information from other sources. Chart legend for S57 charts The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find info for current position, turn on TM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage planing mode or Voyage navigation mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the [Close] button to close the display. This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. [Name]: Name of chart. [Source]: Source of chart. [Edition]: Edition number of the chart. [Edition Date]: Date the edition was published. [Update Number]: Update number. [Update Date]: Date of update. 9-2 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS [Compilation Scale]: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. [Projection]: Projection of current chart. [Horizontal Datum]: Horizontal datum used with current chart. [Sounding Datum]: Datum used to create sounding data. [Vertical Datum]: Vertical datum used with current chart. [Units of Depth]: Unit of depth used with current chart. [Units of Height]: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. [Magnetic Variation]: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. [Quality Indication]: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer. 9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts Permanent warnings help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date. Message Meaning, Remedy Display date is not current Display date is not the current date. Set Display date and Approved until date to the current date. ENC: permits have expired The system found an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. ENC: Product list not up to date The product list is not up to date. Update the product list. ENC: AIO product list not up to date The AIO chart is not be up to date. Load updated material. No connection to dongle The dongle is not inserted. Insert the dongle to erase the message. Not up to date (SSE 27): XXXXXXXX (Chart name appears at location of Xs.) At least one chart is not up to date. Load updated material. Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX (Chart name appears at location of Xs.) You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts that have been loaded from sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to know the exact up-to-date situation. 9-3 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart 9.2.1 Introduction S57 charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues, new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency. These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal date end" are used for seasonal chart features such as summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc. You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency in order to use the valid data for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example, you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart upto-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display date and Approved until once per week to keep your chart up-to-date. 9.2.2 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates that are included into S57 charts. Normally you have selected for automatic after the SENC conversion. In this case, after all the SENC conversions have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. See the next section for how to set Display date and Approved until dates. If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following: 1. Use [Approved until] to set the begin date for the update highlight. (See paragraph 9.2.3.) 2. Use [Display date] to set the end date for the update highlight. (See paragraph 9.2.3.) 3. Review the changes. Added features are highlighted with orange circles. Removed features are highlighted with orange slashes. Changed features are highlighted with both orange circles and slashes. 4. After reviewing, set [Approved until] and [Display date] back to the current system date. 9-4 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.2.3 How to set Display date and Approved until dates Click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Viewing Date] dialog box. Set desired dates then click the [Close] button. 9.2.4 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date. Update 3 Update 2 Update 1 Base cell 1 2 3 4 Date The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approved date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 areas as follows: 1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as current date of the system. Approve date has to be set to current date. 2. The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1. 3. The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approved dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2. 4. The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3. Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan. 9-5 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO Chart 1, which is included in this system. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See section 8.2. 1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show to the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu, shown below. 2. Click a chart feature to show detailed information about the feature. Click [Overview] to show a compilation of all features, shown below. [ECDIS Chart 1] menu 9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features The system uses the official IHO presentation library to draw S57 charts. The presentation library is replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personnel and type approval authorities. When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb03_4.dai", known as "Official IHO presentation library for system Ed 3 revision 1, Edition: 3.4". 9-6 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart Objects The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an important function of the system. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and barely intelligible attribute information. Do the following to find information about a chart object. 1. Get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then rIght-click an object to show the context-sensitive menu. Ship on center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update New Divider 2. Click [Object INFO] to show the [Select Object] dialog box. 3. Click the object for which you want to know its details then click the [OK] button. Note: If another window is active, the preview window may be partially obscured by that window. Move the window to display the entire preview. 4. To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button. Below is a sample chart object printout. 9-7 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) The Admiralty Information Overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides additional navigationally significant information from UKHO's ENC validation programme. The AIO is displayed as a single layer on top of the basic ENC and is available free of charge as part of the Admiralty S57 Chart Service and within Admiralty Value Added Resellers' services. The AIO has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage, the Admiralty Information Overlay will give seafarers the same consistent picture of the maritime environment on their charts as they have always had. The AIO license is free of charge for AVCS license holders. 9.5.1 Installation Installation is the same as that for the ENC chart. See section 7.2. 9.5.2 How to display the AIO Click the [DISP], [AIO] and [ALL] buttons to show the AIO. To hide the AIO, click the [DISP], [AIO] and [OFF] buttons. The area(s) that contain temporary or preliminary changes are marked with a hatched red rectangle. 9-8 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells A catalog of AIO cells is maintained in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. To show this box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar. The AIO cell is GB800001. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information Do the following to find chart object information contained in the AIO. 1. Right click a red hatched area in the chart area, then select [Object INFO] to show the [Select Object] dialog box. 9-9 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS 2. Click [Preliminary Notice] in the dialog box to show the [Chart object] dialog box. The [Chart object] dialog box shows the following information: • Cell (name) • Drawing type (Preliminary Notice, Temporary Notice) • Category (AIO) • The preview box provides a scaled-down image of the area selected. Click the image to enlarge it. • The [Attribute] window shows the attributes for the AIO area selected. To find information about an attribute, click it to show its information in the [Description] box. [Information]: Description of area (for example, danger area). [Object name]: Object name (number) [Pictorial representation]: Associated diagram when applicable. [ENC affected]: ENC affected by the NM Textual description: Full text of the Notice to Mariners (NM) appears below [ENC Affected]. To print the chart object information, click the [Print Text] button. 9.5.5 How to select the information to display Select what type of notices to display as follows: 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [AIO] tab. 3. Check or uncheck items as appropriate. 4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the menu. 9-10 10. C-MAP CHARTS The descriptions in this chapter apply to the CM-93/3 charts. (This system does not support CM-93/2 charts.) 10.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service Your chart system has the capability of using and displaying the latest C-MAP worldwide vector chart database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57 3.1 specifications. In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP database, there are a number of things that must be done. 10.2 How to Register the System at C-MAP Norway Your system has the capability to use the C-MAP database. To do so an Aladdin eToken (supplied by C-MAP) must be connected to the system. The eToken provides the system with a unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself, on the back of the installation CD box or on a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on all chart orders, by e-mail (license@C-MAP.no). 10.3 How to Order Charts A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is essential that the required information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the information that is required, and contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your licenses throughout the lifetime of the system. Charts can be ordered by Zone, Area or Cell and these can be seen on the C-MAP web site or by downloading the Chart Product catalog also available on the web site. Price quotations can be obtained via your chart dealer or direct from your local C-MAP office. Once the license order has been prepared it should be emailed to license@C-MAP.no. 10.4 How to Apply for Licenses Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and transmitted back to the operator. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string (16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR. Once this license has been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed and supplied by the chart manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase and subscription. Purchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. Failure to renew a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable. 10-1 10. C-MAP CHARTS 10.5 Troubleshooting If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MAP: • Check that the charts are available, with the chart management function. • Check that the license is correctly installed, with the license function. Contact Information: For information or help please call you're nearest C-MAP Office (details can be found on the reverse side of the C-MAP chart CO box) or contact CMAP Norway. E-mail: technical@C-MAP.no 10.6 Chart Subscription Services 10.6.1 C-MAP services The C-MAP DL service is an ENC service available on DVD or online, in C-MAP SENC format. The C-MAP DL service ensures immediate access to ENC licenses whenever they are needed. ENC licenses available in seconds automatically via online C-MAP service providers. Cost is controlled via pre-set budgets and spending limits, giving shipowners a true "pay-as-you-go" service. For further details about C-MAP DL, contact a C-MAP provider. Note 1: CM-ENC is available. If you change CD-ROM service to DVD service, you need to also have a new license for the DVD service. Contact your chart agent or CMAP for details. Note 2: PC and internet connection with e-mail are required. Further it is necessary to access Jeppesen approx. once every two weeks. 10.6.2 What is ENC delivery? ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. Both deliveries can be used in this system. In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC, JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then charts are loaded into the system. In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard and loading to the system. A CM-ENC delivery is SENC delivery. Important notices • If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart name loaded into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the chart is in ENC delivery. • Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart updates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep charts up-to-date separately. • If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the system before loading charts from new delivery. 10-2 10. C-MAP CHARTS 10.7 Chart Display 10.7.1 Introduction C-MAP charts are S57 charts displayed together with ENC (S57) and CM93/3 charts. These charts have the priority order shown below. 1. CM- ENC 2. C-MAP 93/3 Prof and C-MAP 93/3 Prof+ If the same navigational purpose charts are available over an area, priority is as shown above. Areas where ENC is not available CM-ENC charts are shown. Where C-MAP Prof or CM93 Prof+ are available, CM 93/3 charts are displayed. The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find info for current position, click the [TM/CU Reset] button then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Chart Legend] button. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart Legend]. Click the [Close] button to close the display. This system is capable of showing more than one chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display. If one chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about charts displayed on the electronic chart display area. Chart Legend [Name]: Name of chart. [Source]: Source of chart. [Edition]: Edition number of the chart. [Edition Date]: Date the edition was published. [Update Number]: Update number. [Update Date]: Date of update. [Compilation Scale]: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here. [Projection]: Projection of current chart. [Horizontal Datum]: Horizontal datum used with current chart. [Sounding Datum]: Datum used to create sounding data. [Vertical Datum]: Vertical datum used with current chart. [Units of Depth]: Unit of depth used with current chart. [Units of Height]: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level. [Magnetic Variation]: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction. [Quality Indication]: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer. 10-3 10. C-MAP CHARTS 10.8 Permanent Warnings Permanent warnings help you keep the C-MAP up-to-date and these are shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date. Message CMAP: Database not up to date Meaning, Remedy Database is not up to date. Update the data base. CMAP: Dynamic license reporting overdue The time for the “Next Report Date” has passed. This occurs once every 12 hours if the condition continues. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button. Click the [C-MAP] tab then the [Order Update File] button. 10-4 CMAP: Dynamic licensing credit limit You have exceeded the allotted credit limit. Raise credit limit. CMAP: No connection to eToken eToken dongle is not connected (inside the Processor Unit). CMAP: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. No connection to dongle. Dongle not connected. Connect dongle. Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX (Chart name replaces Xs.) You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the chart or renew subscription for the permit. 11. CHART ALERTS The chart radar can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect an area where a specified condition exists. If prediction of own ship movement goes across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists, the system does the following: • Highlights warning alert objects in red (route checked in route planning, and route navigation) • Provides visual alerts in the [Alert] box for warning alert objects (route navigation) • Sounds an aural alarm for warning alert objects (route navigation) Warning (highlight) chart object For this function, the chart radar utilizes the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the SSD in SENC format. Note that the chart radar calculates dangerous areas using the largest scale chart available, which may not be the visualized chart. You can select objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example, restricted areas). A dialog box lists the various areas that activate danger warnings. You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can utilize these areas when calculating chart alerts. z The system can check the following for you: • Predicted movement area of own ship • Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas z The system will highlight the following for you • Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship • Dangerous areas inside your monitored route • Dangerous areas inside your planned route 11-1 11. CHART ALERTS 11.1 Chart Alerts Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of chart alerts. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below. 1. Select suitable safety contour for your own ship. See paragraph 11.1.1 for how to set the safety contour. 2. In the Voyage planning mode, define a new route or select an existing one. Make a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the route. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. To modify an existing route see section 12.4. 3. Select route as monitored route. 4. Set check area for your own ship. The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated own ship position. 11.1.1 How to set safety contour Select safety contour suitable for the own ship. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Chart Alert] page. 2. Enter desired depth at [Safety Contour] then click the [Save] button. A depth contour is created on the chart according to the safety contour value entered. Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically select next deeper contour. 11-2 11. CHART ALERTS 11.1.2 How to select objects used in chart alerts You can also include calculation areas that have to be noted when sailing (for example, restricted areas). To include these areas in chart alerts, do the following: 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Chart Alert] page. 2. Click a checkmark to select the alert choice ([Warning] or [Caution]). In the example above, [Restricted Area] and [Military Practice Area] are selected to [Caution] and all other times are set for [Warning]. 3. Click the [Save] button to finish. Note: C-MAP Pro+ charts may take several minutes to identify danger areas. List of areas There are the areas that the chart radar detects and provides the audible alert and/or visual alert if estimated own ship position or planned or monitored route crosses the area defined on the [Chart Alert] page. You can select from the following areas: • • • • • • Safety Contour Areas To Be Avoided User Chart Danger Traffic Separation Zone Inshore Traffic Zone Restricted Area • • • • • • Caution Area Offshore Production Area Military Practice Area Seaplane Landing Area Submarine Transit Lane Anchorage Area • • • • • • • Marine Farm/Aqua Culture PSSA Area UKC Non-official ENC No Vector Chart Not Up-to-date Permit Expired 11-3 11. CHART ALERTS 11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is done using a check area about own ship position. Set the check area as follows: 1. Select the [Check Area] page from the [Overlay/ NAV Tools] box. Note: The [ON] button may not be shown depending on installation setting. 2. Set the ahead time or distance and ahead width, referring to the figure below. Also, set the "Around" figures: port, starboard, bow and stern check distance. The reference point is the conning position (CCRP). Width Ahead Distance Bow Stern Port Starboard 3. To select the objects to use in chart alerts, click the [Chart Alert] button and see paragraph 11.1.2. 4. To show or hide the chart alert area figure, click the button ([ON] or [OFF]) to the right of the [Chart Alert] button at the bottom of the [Check Area] page. Note: When the button to the right of the [Chart Alert] button is not displayed, this means that the own ship check is active always. When an object having a Warning setting enters the Check Area, the object is highlighted in red and the aural alarm sounds. 11-4 11. CHART ALERTS Object selected for Chart Alert Highlight (red) 11.3 Check Area Route Planning The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Danger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are crossed by the planned route. For more information on route planning, see chapter 12. Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier than it is to take place, use the Display date and Approved until dates corresponding to the dates you are going to sail. 11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning You can generate a list of chart alerts that cross by the planned route. This can be done as follows: 1. Enter safety contour you want to use. 2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See chapter 12 for route planning. 3. Select dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the [Alert Parameters] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, shown below. a) Click the [PLAN], [Planning] and [Route] buttons. b) Click the [Alert Parameters] tab. c) Click the alert to process. Show a red circle for visual and aural alerts, or yellow circle for visual alert. Note that the safety contour is always shown in red. 11-5 11. CHART ALERTS B 4. Click the [Check Route] button to generate a list of chart alerts. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. B The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in the planned route, check alerts leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of alert. 11-6 11. CHART ALERTS 11.4 Route Monitoring • When the ship enters a check area specified as a caution alert, a visual alert is generated. Neither the object in the area or the route is highlighted. • When the ship enters a check area specified as a warning alert, a visual alert is generated and the object and route are highlighted. • A red box(es) indicates an area having several highlighted objects. The system has a route monitor that facilitates safe use of routes. You can check your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to use together with a route plan. To show the [Route Information] dialog box, get into the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Route] and [Route INFO] buttons. Click the [Waypoints] tab. 11-7 11. CHART ALERTS This page is intentionally left blank. 11-8 12. ROUTES 12.1 Route Planning Overview A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The plan includes: A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The plan includes: • Route name • Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint • Radius of turn circle at each waypoint • Safe channel limits • Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart danger • UKC calculation • Deadband width, nominal deadband width used for the chart operating modes with moderate accuracy and economical sailing behavior • Minimum and maximum speed for each leg • The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle) • Fuel saving • ETD for the first waypoint • ETA for the last waypoint • Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation • Name of the user chart to use during route navigation together with the planned route • Name of the Notes to use during route navigation together with this planned route, in the user chart dialog box Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for each leg, ETAs for each waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP. It also calculates safe water areas based on user-defined channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a file for later use. Main functions of route planning are: • Define waypoints • Define turnings for each waypoint • Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints). The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring your route. • Define the speed for each leg • Calculation for ETD and ETA • Calculation for most economical sailing Note 1: If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western (0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/western hemisphere is not on the display. A maximum of five routes can be edited simultaneously. Note 2: If a planned route's Safety Margin or Channel Limit contains excessive land masses, the chart radar may freeze during a route check. If this occurs, reset the chart radar, then adjust the Channel Limit and Safety Margin settings in the Route Plan dialog box's Waypoints so that land mass is not included in the route. 12-1 12. ROUTES 12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning The main parameters for the route planning are: • Latitude and longitude of the waypoint • Channel limits to the waypoint • Turning radius of the waypoint • Maximum speed limit and planned speed for each leg There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring. To complete route planning, do the following. 1. Create a new route or select an existing one. See section 12.3. 2. Modify your route if necessary. See section 12.4. 3. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 12.3.5. 4. Optimize your route. See section 12.7. 12.3 How to Create a New Route To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following: 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to activate the Voyage planning mode. 2. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route] button to open the [Route Plan] dialog box. 3. Click the [New] button. 4. Use the cursor to select a position for the first waypoint then push the left mouse button. A waypoint mark appears on the position selected, and the latitude and longitude of the position, etc. are entered into the [Route Plan] dialog box. After entering a waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]), Radius, Channel limit, Plan SPD, SPD Max and Margin as appropriate in the [Route Plan] dialog box, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. To change the settings of items other than L/L position: Put the cursor on an item to show up and down arrows then click required arrow. To change L/L position: Put the cursor on the digit to change and roll the scrollwheel. 12-2 12. ROUTES Note: A guide box that shows the range and bearing between waypoints as you drag the cursor is available. You can show or hide the box with the [Guide Box] button on the InstantAccess bar. Click the button to show its background color in light-blue to display the guide box. Guide box 5. Repeat step 4 to enter other waypoints. 6. After you enter the final waypoint, right-click the display area to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Finish]. 7. Click the [Save] button. Enter a name (max. 53 alphanumeric characters) for the route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. Click the [OK] button to finish. 8. Use the [Alert Parameters] page to define the safety contour and other specified conditions for checking the route. Click a "block" under a safety item to show a red circle to get check boxes and highlights or yellow circle to get the highlight. A parameter can also be assigned globally to all legs from the context-sensitive menu. See section 12.3.4 for how to use the [Alert Parameters] page. 9. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. This system can examine chart database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts. 10. Use the [User Chart] page to link, de-link a user chart(s) with the route. See section 12.3.2. 11. Use the [Optimize] page to enter parameters for route optimization.See section 12.3.3. 12-3 12. ROUTES How to use the Undo feature The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar. In route creation the feature is used with waypoint and text input as follows: Waypoint input: Delete last-entered waypoint. Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string. Note: The [UNDO] button is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit. 12.3.1 How to use the Waypoints page B The following fields and boxes can be found in the [Waypoints] page. Scroll the list rightward to see hidden items. [WPT]: Each waypoint has a number. [Name]: You can name each waypoint. [Latitude]: WPTs latitude coordinate is displayed in WGS-84 datum. [Longitude]: WPTs longitude coordinate is displayed in WGS-84 datum. [Leg/°]: Bearing of leg [Leg/NM]: Length of leg (nm). [Str Mode]: Define steering mode for each leg - rhumb line or great circle. Click to select [Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]. [RAD/NM]: Define turning radius for each waypoint. To change a radius, put the cursor in this column to show up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set the radius. 12-4 [Ch Limit/m]: Define channel limit for each leg. [Plan SPD]: Define planned speed to use with a leg. [SPD Max]: Define maximum speed to use with a leg. [Margin/m]: Define extension for channel to be checked against selected alerts. [PL 1/m, PL 2/m]: One or two sets of parallel lines, colored orange, can be drawn on a route. Set the distance (in meters) to offset the lines from the route, from -99999 to 99999. Parallel lines allow the navigator to maintain a given distance away from hazards. See the illustration on the next page. 12. ROUTES WPT1 WPT2 Parallel Line for Leg 1 Parallel Line for Leg 2 WPT3 Note: You can select the route information data to display on the [Waypoints] page with the context-sensitive menu. Rightclick an item from [WPT] to [PL 2/m] then select [Edit Columns] to show the context-sensitive menu. Check or uncheck items as appropriate then click the [OK] button. 12.3.2 How to use the User Chart page The [User Chart] page lets you link user charts to routes. To link a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Stored User Chart] list to show a checkmark. Click the [<<] button to copy that name to the [Linked User Chart] list. To de-link a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Linked User Chart] list then click the [>>] button to erase the name. The contents of each user chart are shown in the [Contents] window. [Linked User Chart]: List of user charts linked with selected route. [Stored User Chart]: List of stored user charts. [<<] button: Link a stored used chart. Check the chart in the [Stored User Chart] list then click this button. The user chart name is then copied to the [Linked User Chart] list. [>>] button: Click to remove selected (checkmarked) user chart from the [Linked User Chart] list. [Contents]: Lists the objects saved to the user chart selected. 12-5 12. ROUTES 12.3.3 How to use the Optimize page After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can optimize your route, on the [Optimize] page. If not selected, then optimization will be done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with a specific strategy, see section 12.7 for how to optimize a route. [Type]: Select optimization strategy: maximum speed, time table, maximum profit, or minimum cost. [Set ETD]: Set date, time and waypoint to start from. [Parameters]: Set the parameters for optimization, speed limit and income (max profit). [Edit Cost Parameters] button: Enter fuel consumption figures. See section 21.3. [Set ETA]: For the type [Time table], set the date and time that you want to arrive at the waypoint selected. [Optimized Speed/ETA]: The optimized speed for the date and time entered at [Set ETA] appears here, after clicking the [Calculate] button. [Calculate] button: Click to calculate optimization. 12.3.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page The [Alert Parameters] page sets the alert conditions to use when checking a route. Put a red circle for an item to highlight. The relevant alerts are shown in the [Check Results] page. You can select the safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the route. This allows you to check the safety with conditions different from those selected n for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions. Click each box to show one of the following: - Red circle (Item highlighted in red) - Yellow circle (No highlight) 12-6 12. ROUTES Radio buttons, input boxes Item Description [Check Check how to apply the alerts, type] to every leg or individual leg. (Only [Draught] can be applied to every leg.) [Safety Set the safety contour (in Contour] meters). [UKC Limit] Under keel clearance limit. [Date (UTC)] [Copy from Default Alert] button [Copy to Default Alert] button [Check Route] button [Leg] Item [Draught/m] Alert items Description Ship’s draught [Safety Contour] Safety contour [Areas to be Avoided] [User Chart Danger] Areas to be avoided [Traffic Separation Zone] Traffic separation zone Copy the alert settings for this route as default alert settings. [Inshore Traffic Zone] Inshore traffic zone Click to check route for safe navigation. The results appear on the [Check Results] page. Leg number [Restricted Area] Restricted area [Caution Area] [Offshore Production Area] [Military Practice Area] [Seaplane Landing Area] [Submarine Transit Lane] [Anchorage Area] [MarineFarm Aquaculture] [PSSA Area] [UKC Limit] [Non-official ENC] [No Vector Chart] [Not Up-to-date] [Permit Expired] Caution area Offshore production area A chart may have date-dependent features. Enter the actual data of embarkation to know date-dependent features. Copy the default alert settings to this route. User chart danger area Military practice area Seaplane landing area Submarine transit lane Anchorage area Marine farm aquaculture Particularly Sensitive Sea Area Under keel clearance limit No official ENC data No vector chart for area Chart not up to date. Permit for chart has expired. Context sensitive menus A context-sensitive menu for setting the draught is available on the [Alert Parameters] page. Right-click [Draught/m] to show the menu. [Set "ALL" setting to all legs] applies the draught value of [Check type: All Legs] to all legs. [Clear setting] restores previous settings for each leg. Set “ALL” setting to all legs Clear setting 12-7 12. ROUTES 12.3.5 How to use the Check Results page The [Check Results] page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route. Click the [Check Route] button to do the check. After the button is operated, the alert type and latitude and longitude position of the alert appear for applicable legs on the route. Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. Note 2: A route check can take longer with C-Map or CM-ENC charts. Wait until the completion of the check. 12.4 How to Modify an Existing Route 12.4.1 How to change waypoint position To change position of a waypoint you have the following choices: • Drag and drop waypoint using the left button. • Enter latitude and longitude on the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. How to drag and drop waypoint to new position 1. Put the cursor on the route waypoint to move then push the right button to show the context-sensitive menu. 2. Select [Edit]. 3. Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position. Release the button when the cursor is at the desired position. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Finish]. How to change latitude and longitude from the Waypoints page 1. Show the [Waypoints] page. 2. Put the cursor on the digit to change in the Latitude or Longitude field. 3. Enter position from the Control Unit’s keyboard, or spin the scrollwheel. 12-8 12. ROUTES 12.4.2 How to change other waypoint data Other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max speed, can be edited from the [Waypoints] page. Select the route to edit and open the [Waypoints] page. Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change data. (Push the left button to change steering mode.) 12.4.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the electronic chart area 1. Put the cursor on the current last waypoint of the route. 2. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit]. 3. Put the cursor to the new location for the last waypoint then push the left button. 4. Right-click, then click [Finish]. How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the last waypoint. Select [Insert after]. A waypoint is added at the end of the list. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary. 12.4.4 How to insert a waypoint How to insert a waypoint between waypoints from the electronic chart area 1. Put the cursor anywhere on the route where you want to insert a waypoint. 2. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit]. 3. Put the cursor on the leg where you want to insert a waypoint. 4. Right-click, then click [Insert WPT]. 5. Right-click, then click [Finish]. How to insert a waypoint from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the waypoint to process. Select [Insert after] or [Insert before] as appropriate. A waypoint is added after or before the waypoint selected. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary. 12.4.5 How to delete a waypoint How to delete a waypoint from the electronic chart area Put the cursor on the waypoint to delete. Push the right button to show the contextsensitive menu then select [Edit] followed by [Delete WPT]. How to delete a waypoint from the Waypoints page Open the [Waypoints] page. Right-click the waypoint you want to delete then select [Delete WPT]. 12-9 12. ROUTES 12.4.6 Geometry check of route When you add a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the message "Impossible turn at WPT" may appear (in red). It means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for the ship to sail along a certain leg. Typically it is enough if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page. • Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. • Increase the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. • Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors. Note: If the above-mentioned remedies do not remove the "Impossible turn at WPT" indication, try changing the planned speed. 12.5 SAR Operations The SAR feature facilitates search and rescue operations for MOB. To use the SAR feature, get into the Voyage planning mode then do the following: 1. Click the [Planning] and [Route] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Route Plan] dialog box then click the [SAR] button. 2. Enter your start point. To enter current position, click the [Ship Position] button. (The start point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the start point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown right then click [Set start point].) 3. Enter your ship's speed and turn radius, current UTC date and time. 4. At [Search Point], enter the estimated position of the object to search. (The search point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the search point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown at step 2 then click [Set search point]. 5. Enter drift speed, drift direction, and the UTC date and time of the estimated position. 6. At the [Search Setting] window, select and set the search type, referring to the table on the next page. 12-10 12. ROUTES Search type Options Sample pattern [Expanding square] WPT7 90.00° Start Leg Length WPT3 5 [Direction]: Set the direction to start the search, [Clockwise] or [Anticlockwise]. [Search Pattern Heading]: See the right figure. [Start Leg Length]: Enter the start leg length. [Number of Legs]: Enter the number of legs to use. Starting at the probable location of the target, the search vessels expand outward in concentric squares. 1 90.00° WPT6 90° 2 WPT4 WPT8 WPT2 3 Search Pattern Heading 4 90.00° WPT5 WPT1 [Parallel tracks] Start Point WPT13 Le WPT10 Le WPT9 Le WPT6 WPT5 [Direction]: Select the direction to start the search, [Clockwise] or [Anticlockwise]. [Search Pattern Heading]: See the right figure. [Start Leg Length]: Enter the start leg length. [Track Space]: Enter the length of the short legs in the route. [Number of Legs]: Enter the number of legs to use. The parallel tracks pattern is usually the first pattern used in undertaking a search operation, since it assumes that the object to be searched. 6 Le Le Search Pattern Heading (North ref.) WPT2 WPT1 g3 g2 g4 g5 g6 /6 /6 /6 WPT12 /6 WPT11 /6 WPT8 WPT7 Le WPT4 g1 /6 Sta Le rt L Track ng eg th WPT3 space Start Point 12-11 12. ROUTES Search type Options Sample pattern [Sector search] Search Pattern Heading WPT3 S radearch ius WPT6 Sector #1 WPT9 60° Sector #2 [Direction]: Select the direction to start the search, [Clockwise] or [Anticlockwise]. [Search Pattern Heading]: See the right figure. [Search Radius]: Enter the search radius (in NM). [Number of Sectors]: Enter the number of sectors to use. The sector search is used when the position of the body is known accurately and the search has to be done over a small area. It is normally carried out in the area, where the casualty or the object has been sighted. WPT5 WPT2 WPT8 WPT4 Sector #3 WPT7 WPT1 Start Point 7. Click the [OK] button. The [Route Plan] dialog box appears and the system draws the search and rescue route on the screen according to the search and rescue settings. 8. To follow the route, click the [Exchange to MONIT] button. Note: To monitor the route the following conditions must be met: • The route must have at least two waypoints. • The route must have no impossible turns. • The route must have been checked. 9. To save the route, click the [Save] button and enter a name for the route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. If necessary you can drag waypoints to new position, like with an ordinary route. 12-12 12. ROUTES 12.6 Route Bank The route bank stores all the routes you have created. To show the route bank, in the Voyage planning mode, select [Planning], [Route], [Route Bank] in [Route Plan] dialog box: Route name Date created or modified Route32 AAAAAA Route67 15 Nov 2013 15 Nov 2013 13 Nov 2013 Total no. of waypoints Position of start waypoint Total distance of route Position of final waypoint In the Voyage planning mode, the waypoints of a route can be inserted into the route currently selected. 1. Show the dialog box shown above. 2. Select the route for which you want to copy its waypoint(s) in the active route. For example, select Route2. 3. Click the [Open] button. Route1 Route2 4. At [Insert Position], select where you want to insert waypoints into the active route, [Before] or [After] the waypoint selected in the next step. The [Reset] button restores the route to the original condition. 5. In the left-hand column set the cursor on the waypoint where to insert waypoints from the inactive route. 6. At the right-hand column, select the waypoint(s) to add to the active route. A context-sensitive menu is available by right-clicking [WPT] in the inactive route. The options available are [Select All], [Deselect All] and [Reverse] (reverse the order of the waypoints in the inactive route). 12-13 12. ROUTES 7. Click the [<<] button to insert the waypoint(s) from the inactive route to the active route. In the example below, WPT1 of the inactive route is inserted at the end of the active route, becoming its waypoint 5. Route1 Route2 8. Click the [OK] button to finish. 12.7 Route Optimization 12.7.1 Available route optimization strategies After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box. If no optimization strategy is selected, the optimization is done with "max. speed," defined in ship parameters. Optimization calculates all parameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuvering start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization: [MAX speed]: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be entered, however it is calculated with user-entered ETD and speed limit. [Time table]: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded. The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate speed to use. If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the Max. Speed calculation, the Max. speed -calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table ETA calculation figure. The calculated speed is shown on the [Route Information] box as [Plan Speed]. [MAX profit]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time unit). [MIN cost]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the speed that gives the minimum total cost. You need to set [Cost Parameters] beforehand to use this feature. 12-14 12. ROUTES 12.7.2 How to optimize a route You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box to optimize your route. 1. Click the [Optimize] tab to open the [Optimize] page. 2. At [Type], click the drop-down list to select desired optimization strategy, referring to paragraph 12.7.1 "Available route optimization strategies". 3. Do the following: 1) At the [Set ETD] window, enter starting WPT and date and time of departure. For entry of the date, the [Set date] window, shown right, appears. Click the applicable date in the calendar if you are going to depart during the current month, or click the applicable arrow on the month/year button to select a different date. Click the [OK] button to save the ETA and close the window. 2) At the [Waypoints] window in the [Route Plan] dialog box, enter the maximum speed to use. For the Type [MAX profit], enter [Income] value. If necessary, click the [Edit Cost Parameters] button to enter fuel consumption values. 12-15 12. ROUTES 3) For [Time table], the [Set ETA] window appears. Set the ETA to use for each waypoint. To enter the Time and Date, click the [Date] window to show the [Set date] window. Click the appropriate date. The date entered appears in the [Set ETA] window. 4. Click the [Calculate] button to calculate optimal route. The [Optimized Speed/ETA] dialog box shows the results of the calculation. 5. To apply the information to the route, click the [Apply to Route] button. 6. To save all optimization settings, click the [Save] button. Note that the ETA used in route reports is the first-entered ETA. 12.7.3 How to plan a speed profile A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These values are given while planning a route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in the [Optimize] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box and in the [Waypoints] page you can give planned and max. speed for each leg. The table below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed. WPT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12-16 MIN cost 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 6.0 6.0 4.8 4.8 6.0 4.8 MAX profit 10.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 12.9 8.0 Time table 10.0 15.0 16.2 16.2 15.0 16.2 16.2 16.2 16.2 8.0 MAX speed 10 15 20 20 15 20 20 20 17 8 12. ROUTES 12.8 How to Import Routes 12.8.1 How to import FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data You can import a route created on another FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0. 1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the route data to import in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation message appears. 3. Click the [OK] button. 4. Click the [File Import] tab. 5. Click the [Select file to import] button to select the file to import. 6. Check the data to import, at [Select data to import]. 7. Click the [Import] button. 12.8.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data Routes created at an ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy the routes to a folder in a USB flash memory then follow this procedure. Note that FEA2x05-created routes cannot be imported. 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [Route] buttons to show the [SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box. 4. Select the folder that contains the route(s) to be imported then click the [OK] button. 5. Check the route(s) to import then click the [Import] button. 12-17 12. ROUTES 12.8.3 How to import csv, ASCII format route data 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Manage Data], [Route] and [Route Data Management] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box. 4. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are [FEA2x07], [CSV Position], [ASCII WPT Name Position], [ASCII Full], [CSV Route Sheet], [RTE Format]. 5. Click the [Import] button. 6. Select the file to import then click the [Open] button. 7. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. 12.9 How to Export Route Data 12.9.1 How to export FAR-3xx0 route data You can export route data to share the data with other FCR-2xx9, FMD-3xx0, FAR3xx0 units. 1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation message appears. 3. Click the [OK] button. 4. Click the [File Export] tab. Radar Installation 5. At [Select data to export], check only [Route/User chart]. 6. Click the [Export] button to save the data to the USB flash memory. 12-18 12. ROUTES 12.9.2 How to export route data in FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII format 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. On the InstantAccess bar, click the [Manage Data], [Route] and [Route Data Management] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box. 4. At the drop-down list, select the export format. The choices are [FEA2x07], [CSV Position], [ASCII WPT Name Position], [ASCII Full], [CSV Route Sheet], [RTE Format]. 5. Check the route(s) to export then click the [Export] button. 6. Click the [OK] button. 7. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. 12.10 How to Delete Routes 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [Route] button. 3. Put a checkmark in the check box to the left of the route name. 4. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message appears. 5. Click the [OK] button. 6. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. 12-19 12. ROUTES 12.11 Reports This chart radar generates reports for waypoints in the selected route. If connected to a printer, reports can be printed by clicking the [Print Text] button. Text in reports can be searched with the [Find] button. To generate a report, do the following: 1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [Route] button. Click applicable “report” button. The following dialog box appears. Route32 15 Nov 2013 AAAAAA 15 Nov 2013 13 Nov 2013 Route67 3. Select the appropriate route then click the [Open] button to show the selected report. See the next several pages for examples. 12-20 12. ROUTES WPT table report The WPT report contains the following information: • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Length of waypoint • Distance remaining in route • Position in latitude and longitude • Planned courses and steering methods (RL (RhumbLine), GC (GreatCircle)) • Turning radius • Planned speeds • Estimated times of arrival (ETA) • ETD from waypoint 1 (start point) • ETA to waypoint “x” (final waypoint) • Total length of route • Estimated time required to run route using planned speeds and courses 12-21 12. ROUTES Full WPT report You can generate a full waypoint report for the route selected. The report includes the following for each waypoint. • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Position in latitude and longitude • Planned radius • Channel limit • Planned speed • Planned course • ETA • Steering mode (rhumb line or great circle) to each waypoint • ROT • Margin for channel limit • Speed Max • Leg length • Time used 12-22 12. ROUTES Passage plan report The passage plan report generates waypoint information for each waypoint in the route selected. • Route name • Date of report • Waypoint no. • Position in latitude and longitude • Length • Cumulative length • Planned course • Steering method (RL or GC) • Name of waypoint 12-23 12. ROUTES This page is intentionally left blank. 12-24 13. USER CHARTS 13.1 Introduction User charts are overlays that the user creates to indicate safety-related objects and areas. They can be displayed on both the radar display and the electronic chart. These charts are intended for pointing out safety-related items like position of important navigation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate alerts and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When route or own ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated by the system. See the chapter on chart alerts. A user chart consists of various objects (points, lines, text, symbols, etc.). The maximum number of points per user chart is 200 (a circle is one point, a rectangle is four points). You may link up to five user charts to a route, for a max. of 1,000 user chart points per route. The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based on the ship's actual position. When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar, with a maximum of 80 of the nearest elements displayed. 13.1.1 Objects of user charts Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart. • Tidal: There are two types of tidals, current and predicted. • Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alert calculation and/or display on the radar: • Navigation lines: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Navigation lines are reference lines for coast line. • Coast line: Displayed on both the radar and the chart display. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline. The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format. • Depth contour: Displayed on both the radar and chart display. Depth line shows the chosen depth levels. The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in or S57 format. • Route line: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Route lines are zones for anchoring, traffic separation lines, etc. • Clearing line: A clearing line is used to define a line which a vessel can sail to avoid navigational hazards. A clearing line can be of the NMT (Not More Than) or NLT (Not Less Than) type. Displayed on the chart display only. • Area: The operator can define closed areas, which the system can use to detect safe water areas. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe 13-1 13. USER CHARTS areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available regardless of the type of chart material used. • Circle: The operator can define an area with a circle, which can define a location to avoid. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available regardless of the type of chart material used. • Label: There are two types of labels: point and label. A "point" (i) is mainly used to denote position of objects, such as buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc. Points can be used in chart alert calculation. A "label" provides user-entered text to show on the display. 13.2 How to Create a User Chart You can create and modify a user chart in the Voyage planning mode. To make a complete user chart, do the following: 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Planning] and [User Chart] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the user chart palette and the [User Chart] dialog box. Tidal Area Line Circle Clearing line Label 3. Click the [New] button on the [User Chart] dialog box to create a new chart. 4. Click the desired object (button) on the palette.The [Tidal], [Line], [Clearing line] and [Label] buttons have multiple choices. Right-click the respective button to show a context sensitive menu. The choices available for each object are shown below. Tidal: Current, Predicted Line: Coast, Nav, Route, Depth Clearing line: NMT (Not More Than), NLT (Not Less Than) Label: Label, Point 13-2 13. USER CHARTS 5. Put the cursor on the location to insert the object then push the left button. See the figure below for how to construct lines, areas and circles. For the “Tidal” object, you can set Orientation, Strength and Time from the dialog box. With the “Label” object you can enter text and show that text on the screen. Note: An object can also be put at the center of the screen. Do steps 1-4 in this procedure. On the [User Chart] dialog box, right-click the box to the left of [Object] then select [Add Object] from the pop-up menu. (3) Click (1) Click (2) Click (4) Right-click; select [Finish]. (2) Drag cursor; double-click to set. (1) Click 1) Put cursor where to locate center of circle then click. 2) Drag cursor to set radius; double-click to set. How to create a line How to create a circle (1) Click (2) Click (4) Right-click; select [Finish]. (3) Click How to create an area 6. When you insert an object, the following is done in the [User Chart] dialog box: - Name of the object button appears in the [Object] window - Latitude and longitude position of the object is displayed - Total object count is updated 7. To enter a name for the object click the appropriate location in the [Name] window then use the software keyboard on the Control Unit to enter a name. 8. To show the object on the radar display, click the corresponding box in the [Radar] window to show a checkmark in the box. For the label, line, clearing line, area and circle, click the corresponding box in the [Danger] window to use or don't use the object in chart alert calculation. Show a red checkmark to use the object in chart alert calculation. For the area, circle and line, you can add Notes as shown below. See the description and figure below for a description of Notes. 1) Enter the text for the Notes in the [Description] box. 2) Click the box in the [Notes] window of the [User Chart] dialog box to show a checkmark. 13-3 13. USER CHARTS 3) At the [Range of notes] (shown only for line) input box, enter the distance from the Notes position at which to display the Notes. Note: You cannot select both [Danger] and [Notes] for these symbols; select either [Danger] or [Notes]. What are Notes? "Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to your vessel’s position in the Voyage navigation mode. The system compares Notes position and when own ship is x miles from the Notes it generates a message. Position of own ship when Notes will disappear Your vessel’s track i Location of Notes Notes range setting Position of own ship when Notes will be activated 9. To continue entering the same symbol, click a new location on the screen and do step 3. To enter a different symbol, do steps 3 and 4. 10. After you have entered all necessary objects, click the [Save] button. Note: If the [Save] button is not shown, update the user chart to show the button. 11. The [Save user chart] window appears. Enter a name for the user chart then click the [Save] button. The figure on the next page shows a user chart and the corresponding entries in the [User Chart] dialog box. 13-4 13. USER CHARTS • The Line with the name "Coast" is a coastline. • The Circle has the Notes "Arrival No.1," which means the message "Arrival No.1" will be shown on the screen when the ship is 1 NM from the position of the center of the circle. • The Tidal marks line marks a tidal (current). • The Area has Radar and Danger checked. This means the area is shown on the radar display and is used in chart alert calculation. • The Label with the name "Point No. 1" is a point label and is also shown on the radar display. • The Label with the name "Wreck" is a common label and has Danger checked; it is used in chart alert calculation. CIRCLE E N LI oa (C TIDAL ) st LABEL (Point) LABEL (Label) AREA Note: The following combinations of object and display are not allowed: • Tidal object with Radar, Danger, Notes • Clearing line with Radar, Notes • Label with Notes How to use the Undo feature The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar, use double-click, or the contextsensitive menu. In user chart creation the feature is used with object and text input as follows: Tidal, Circle, Current, Label: Delete last-entered object. Area, Line: Erase last-entered point. For [Area], the area must have at least four points. And for a [Line], there must be at least three points. Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string. Note: The [UNDO] button is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit. 13-5 13. USER CHARTS 13.3 How to Import a User Chart Created with ECDIS FEA-2x07 User charts created at the ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy the user charts to a folder (see chapter 17 in the operator’s manual of the FEA2x07) in a USB flash memory then do as follows. Note that FEA-2x05 created user charts cannot be imported. 1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Activate the Voyage planning mode. 3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [User Chart] buttons to show the [SELECT DIRECTORY] dialog box. USB Flash 04.04.2013 19:23 4. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK] button. User Chart Data Import from legacy ECDIS 5. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button. 13-6 13. USER CHARTS 13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart Do steps 1 and 2 in section 13.2 to show the [User Chart] dialog box then click the [Select] button. Select the user chart to edit then click the [Open] button. Follow the appropriate instructions below. 13.4.1 How to edit objects on the chart area How to move objects Drag and drop the object. How to change corner points in lines and areas Drag point to new location; double-click Drag point to new location; double-click How to change corner point on a line How to change corner point in an area How to insert a corner point on a line or area Put the cursor on the location where to insert a corner point, right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Insert]. 13.4.2 How to edit objects from the User Chart dialog box The latitude and longitude position, object name and description of an object can be edited from the [User Chart] dialog box. 1. Open the [User Chart] dialog box (see steps 1 and 2 in section 13.2). 2. Double click the item to edit and use the scrollwheel to edit. 13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart How to delete an object Right-click the object to show the context-sensitive menu and select [Delete]. How to delete a point on a line Put the cursor on the point to delete then right-click to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Delete Point]. The line is redrawn. 13-7 13. USER CHARTS 13.6 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display User charts can be displayed on the electronic chart. Open the [Mariner] page in the [Symbol Display] menu and check the user chart items to display. Select the degree of transparency for the objects with [Transparent]. Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects. 13.7 How to Delete User Charts 1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation mode. 2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar followed by the [User Chart] button. UserChart1 UserChart2 3. Check the user chart(s) to delete. 4. Click the [Delete] button. 13-8 13. USER CHARTS 13.8 User Chart Reports 1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode. 2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [User Chart] button to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box. 3. Select the appropriate user chart then click the [OK] button to show the selected report. See the next several pages for examples of reports. Full report The full report contains information about each tidal, line, clearing line, area, circle and label in the user chart selected. Check or uncheck the boxes at the top of the display to select the report(s) to display. Check the report(s) to display. 13-9 13. USER CHARTS Tidal report A tidal report provides • Position of the tidal • Type of tidal (current or predicted) • Speed and direction of the tidal • Time of the tidal Line report A line report provides • Line name • Latitude and longitude position of each point on the line 13-10 13. USER CHARTS Clearing line The Clearing line report shows the name and position of clearing lines entered on the chosen user chart selected. Area report An area report provides • Area no. and area name • The latitude and longitude position of each point of the area • The description of the area • "On radar" is shown if the area is shown on the radar overlay. 13-11 13. USER CHARTS Circle report The circle report provides the position and radius of circles drawn on a user chart. Label report A label report provides • Latitude and longitude position of each label • Name of each label • “On radar" is shown if the label is shown on the radar overlay. 13-12 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship's behavior relative to the monitored route. The [Route Information] box displays the data on the ship's position relative to the monitored route. The monitored route consists of the following information, displayed in the electronic chart area: • The route is displayed with red dots. • The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. See chapter 11 for how to set those limits. • Each leg has information about planned speed, shown in the [Route Information] box. • Each leg has information about planned course to steer. Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current date as Approved until and Display date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. See section 9.2 for how to set those dates. 14.1 How to Start Route Monitoring Method 1: InstantAccess bar In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click a route then click the [Open] button. Route32 15 Nov 2013 AAAAAA 15 Nov 2013 13 Nov 2013 Route67 14-1 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES Method 2: Selection from the Route information box Right-click the route name location in the [Route Information] box then select [Select Route] to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Select a route then click the [Open] button. Route32 AAAAAA Route67 15 Nov 2013 15 Nov 2013 13 Nov 2013 Red box indicates detailed information available in larger scale. Chart alert area (warning) Waypoint 14-2 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES About monitoring routes When you select a route for monitoring, the messages shown below appear, on the [Select Route] dialog box or in a message window, when a route cannot be opened for monitoring. • "Impossible turn at waypoint XX" (XX=waypoint no.). Geometry of the route makes it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Modify the route to make the turn possible. • "Unchecked / Check condition differs". The route has not been checked. Check the route, on the [Alert Parameters] page. • "Monitored in the NAVI mode". The route is currently being monitored. • "More than one WPT needed". The route has only one waypoint. Add more waypoints to the route. • "Route monitoring cannot be started. Please check ship’s position and conditions." Click the [OK] button to close the message. Check ship’s position and conditions of the route. If you have small-scale chart(s) on display that have the whole eastern/western (0180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/ western hemisphere is not on the screen. If, in the radar mode, route monitoring is stopped, the alert 691 "RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE", 692 "RM Stop - Disconnect Sensors", or 693 "RM Stop - Other Causes" appears. If this occurs, switch to the Chart for Radar mode. The pop-up shown below appears. Click the OK button. Find the reason why route monitoring was stopped and then restart route monitoring. Route monitoring is temporarily stopped (route is greyed out) and an alert appears when position, speed or heading is lost. To restore route monitoring, change the sensor system from System to Local (from the Sensor Information box), manually enter the lost data, check [Set Drift], then switch to the DR mode. Route data is sent to the radar at the start of route monitoring or when the ship transits a waypoint. If a route is not displayed on the radar, stop then restart monitoring at the radar chart. A route is erased from the radar when route monitoring is stopped or the radar chart is restarted. To redisplay the route, stop then restart monitoring at the radar chart. 14.2 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto) In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Unselect] buttons. Route monitoring is also stopped automatically. See “route monitoring is stopped” in the Troubleshooting table in section 24.5 for details. 14.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display You can specify what parts of the monitored route to display. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Click the [Route] tab. 14-3 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 14.4 How to View Waypoint Information Click the [Route] and [Route INFO] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Route Information] dialog box. Click the [Waypoints] tab to show waypoint information. * * Scroll list horizontally to view items shown in the right figure. No. 1 2 3 4 14-4 Item [To WPT], [GO] button [Distance] [Departure] [Actual Average SPD] Waypoint list [Check ETA] window [WPT], [Distance] [Plan] [Actual] [Off Plan] [SPD Calculation] [Start Calculate] button [Suggested SPD] [Total WPTs] [Total Distance] Description The system selects a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To waypoint is the desired one. The system will automatically advance to a next waypoint when you pass the To waypoint. The default [To WPT] is WPT2. If you desire a different one, select it here and the click the [GO] button. Distance from current position to selected waypoint. The time the route was selected for monitoring. Actual speed The waypoint list provides for each waypoint WPT no., name, latitude and longitude position, ETA, plan speed, bearing and distance to leg, steering mode ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]), radius, channel limit, speed max, and margin. Parameters for checking ETA. The arrow to the left of [Check ETA] collapse or display the [Waypoints] and [User Chart] tabs. Select a WPT to find the distance to that waypoint from current position. The planned ETA to the selected waypoint. The actual ETA to the selected waypoint. The time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final WPT, when different. The indication is prefixed with "-" if earlier than planned; "+" if later than planned. Enter speed and ETA (time and date) to find the speed to use to arrive by the ETA. Click to start calculation. The button label changes to [Stop Calculate]. The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the WPT selected would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table". The total number of waypoints in the route. The total distance of the route. 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 14.5 How to View User Chart Information In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Route] and [Select] buttons on the InstantAccess bar, select a route, click the [Open] button, then click the [User Chart] tab. The [Linked User Chart] list shows all the user charts linked with the monitored route and their contents. Click a user chart name to show the contents of the chart in the [Contents] window. Items with a checkmark are activated. For the [Check ETA] window, see the preceding page. 14.6 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route The monitored route can be transferred to the Voyage planning mode. This is useful when you don't need the route for monitoring but want to edit it. To transfer the monitored route, click the [Route] and [Move to Plan] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Up to five planned routes can be shown on the display. If you try to display another route, the route list appears. Deselect a route in order to transfer the monitored route to the Voyage planning mode. Note: When the monitored route is changed to a planned route, using the [Move to Plan] function, the operating mode changes from the Navigation voyage mode to the Voyage planning mode. 14-5 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 14.7 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route The instant track feature provides a temporary track, consisting of four waypoints, to return to or deviate from the monitored route. Correct data from navigation sensors is essential to this function. There are two instant track modes: [Safe Off Track] and [Back to Track]. [Safe Off Track]: This mode provides a track from the monitored route to a safe location to avoid collision or the like. [Back to Track]. This mode creates a track to follow to return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits. The mode is automatically selected according to whether a monitored route is active or not and the amount of off course. Further, if a monitored route is active while following the instant track route, the instant track mode can be changed manually. Condition Manual mode switching [Safe Off Track] No [Safe Off Track] Yes Mode Neither monitored route nor instant track route active.* • Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* • The absolute value of off track is within the channel limit setting. [Back to Track] • Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* • The absolute value of off track is outside the channel limit setting. Yes * An additional instant track route can continuously be created and monitored while monitoring the instant track route. The parameters for the track (channel limit, turn radius, etc.) can be set on the [Instant Track] page. See section 21.2. 14.7.1 Safe off track mode If it becomes necessary to deviate from the monitored route; for example, to avoid collision, use the [Safe Off Track] mode to create an instant track to a safe location. An instant track can be created without a monitored route. 1. When the monitored route is active, click the [Instant Track] button on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Instant Track] dialog box. The message "Please click a destination." appears on the [Planning] page. Note 1: If a monitored route is active, the [Back to Track] mode can also be selected. Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track mode different from the currently active one can be selected. Click here to show drop down list to select mode. When monitored route is active 2. Click a destination. The location is marked with an orange circle and arrow. The message "Please click a point to decide an angle." appears in the [Instant Track] dialog box. The location must be within 50 NM of current position. 14-6 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 3. Roll the trackball to select the angle of approach to the destination then click. Current position Monitored route T2 WPT2 WPT2 Destination 1 Click destination point . A circle and arrow appear. T3 T4 Instant track waypoints (orange) T1 Instant track (orange) 2 Click a location to set desired angle of approach. Instant track is drawn. The system uses ship position, speed, angle of approach to create an instant track route. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts. During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status] field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T4], are colored orange. The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400). If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from the screen. If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased from the screen. See section 14.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings. To return to the monitored route, click a waypoint on a leg of the route to create an instant track route to use to return to the monitored route. 14.7.2 Back to track mode When the vessel goes off track, the alert "172 Off Track Alarm" appears in the [Alert] box. To create an instant track to return to the monitored route, use the [Back to Track] mode as follows: 1. When the monitored route is active, Click here to show drop click the [Instant Track] button on the down list to select mode. InstantAccess bar to show the [Instant Track] dialog box. The message "Please click a WPT on Leg." appears on the [Planning] page. Note 1: If a monitored route is active, the [Safe Off Track] mode can also be selected. Note 2: If a monitored instant track route is already active, an instant track When monitored route is active mode different from the currently active one can be selected. Further, a completely new instant track route to the original monitored route can be created. 14-7 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 2. Click a leg or a waypoint on the monitored route. The location must be within 50 NM of current position. Monitored route Current position T1 T2 WPT2 WPT2 T3 Click a leg on monitored route. Instant track (orange) Point of return to route Instant track waypoints (orange) The system uses ship position, speed and final waypoint to create a track. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts. During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status] field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" replaces "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T3], are colored orange. The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400). If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from the screen. If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased from the screen. See section 14.7.3 for all the instant track messages and their meanings. 14.7.3 Instant track messages The table below shows all the instant track messages and their meanings. (1) (2) (4) (1) (3) Message (1) Instant Track mode "Back to Track" "Safe Off Track" (2) Check result, error message "Could not create the Track." "Too far destination from own ship." 14-8 Meaning Color Back to track mode Safe off track mode White White The track could not be created. Selected destination is 50 NM or more from current position. Yellow Yellow 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES Message "Checking..." "OK" "NG" "Check error." "Instant Track is expired." "Too many WPTs in monitoring route." (3) User operation message "Please click a destination." "Please click a point to decide an angle." "Please click a WPT on leg." (4) Name of instant track route InstantTrack_XXX (XXX: 001 - 400) 14.7.4 Meaning Checking route. Instant track checked and is suitable to follow. Instant track check failed. Route check error. Route monitor timeout. More than 190 waypoints are in the monitored route. (Instant track cannot be created.) Select a destination in the [Safe Off Track] mode. Set the angle of approach in the [Safe Off Track] mode. Click a waypoint on a leg in the [Back to Track] mode Name of monitored instant track route Color Red Green Red Red Red Red White White White White Instant track details You can see the location and alert type found in an instant track by clicking the [Details] button on the [Planning] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box. 14-9 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 14.7.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route How to monitor an instant track route If the route check results is "OK", click the [Monitor] button on the [Planning] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to start monitoring the instant track route. Click the button before the time remaining counts to zero, otherwise the instant track will be cancelled, followed by the message "Instant Track is expired." After the [Monitor] button is clicked the [Monitoring] page is opened. The [Monitoring] page shows the name of the instant track and the instant track mode. Click the [Monitor] button. The vessel follows the instant track route in the same method as a monitored route, which is grayed out to indicate it is inactive. For the instant track route connected to a monitored route, the previous instant track route is also greyed out to show it is inactive. Any additional instant track routes are erased. To close the [Instant Track] dialog box, click the [Close] button. (The system continues monitoring the instant track route.) The following occurs when sensor data is lost while using the instant track function. 14-10 Monitoring condition Result Instant track route monitoring. • An instant track route under creation is deleted. No route can be created. • The [Stop] button is pushed or the instant track route is followed until its completion. • After the instant track route is completed, an error message appears and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes. No monitored route An instant track route under creation is deleted. Monitored route active After the route is completed, an error message appears and the [Instant Track] dialog box closes. 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES How to stop monitoring an instant track route Click the [Stop] button on the [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to stop monitoring the instant track route. The system returns to monitoring the monitored route and the [Planning] page of the [Instant Track] dialog box opens. For the [Back to Track] mode, the instant track mode is canceled when the vessel returns to the monitored route. The instant track is grayed out to show that is inactive. 14.7.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant track route (safe off track mode only) Do the following to change a monitored route while following an instant track route. 1. While monitoring an instant track route, click the [Original Route] button on the [Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Check [Planned Route] to show a list of planned routes, or check [Instant Track] to show a list of instant track routes. Route32 AAAAAA Route67 15 Nov 2013 15 Nov 2013 13 Nov 2013 2. Select the route to use. The original route or the instant track route currently in use cannot be selected. 3. Click the [Open] button to close the dialog box. The vessel starts following the newly selected route. When an instant track route is completed, the vessel starts following the route selected at step 2. 14-11 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES 14.7.7 Button label and equipment state The label on the button at the position circled in the figure below changes according to the state of the instant track. Instant track state 14-12 Button label Monitoring [Stop] Return to original route after back to track mode [Reset] (Instant track route is erased - another instant track route can be created.) 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS This chapter presents the various navigation tools available with the system. With the exception of the mini conning display and the divider, the tools listed below are in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. • TT/AIS (see chapters 3 and 4) • Parallel index lines • Check area • Range rings • Predictor • Anchor watch • Under keel clearance • Mini conning display • Divider 15.1 How to Access the Nav Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is located at bottom-right position on the screen. Use the page selection buttons to select desired page. Page name Minimize button Page selection buttons [Overlay/NAV Tools] box ([CheckArea] page) 15-1 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.2 Parallel Index (PI) Lines The parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are available and as many as six can be shown. One, two, three or six lines can be shown. (The actual number of lines shown depends on the line interval.) The bearing can be set two ways: with the scrollwheel or dragging the PI line on the screen. 15.2.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines Select the PI line set to activate or deactivate with the [Display] drop-down list. Activate or deactivate the set selected with the [ON/OFF] button. Only one set can be shown. 15.2.2 PI line bearing reference PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or referenced to North (True). Select [True] or [REL]. 15.2.3 Number of PI lines to display The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines as below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval. Select the number of lines to display at [Index Lines]. 15.2.4 PI line mode The PI line mode can be set for parallel (0-degrees) or perpendicular (90-degrees). Select [Parallel] or [Perpendicular] at [Mode]. 15-2 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.2.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval There are two ways to adjust PI line orientation and PI line interval: through the menu and on the screen. How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval from the menu 1. Set the orientation with [Bearing]. 2. Set the line interval with [Distance]. How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval on the screen Adjust orientation: Put cursor on PI line bisecting own ship marker then drag cursor. Adjust interval: Put cursor on any PI line other than the one bisecting own ship marker then drag cursor. How to adjust orientation and interval, multiple PI lines Adjust orientation: Put cursor anywhere on PI line (other than own ship marker) then drag cursor. Adjust interval: Put cursor on own ship mark then drag cursor. How to adjust orientation and interval, single PI line 15.2.6 How to reset the PI lines You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manually. Click the [Reset PI Lines] button to reset the parallel lines. 15-3 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.2.7 How to adjust PI line length You can adjust the forward and backward lengths of a PI line when [Index Lines] is set to 1. 1. Open the MENU and select [NAV Tools], [PI Lines] and [Truncate]. 2. If not already displayed, click the [ON/OFF] button to display the PI line whose length you want to adjust. 3. Click the value in [Forward] and [Backward] columns to adjust their lengths, referring to the illustration below. PI line Adjust the forward length. Adjust the backward length. 4. Click the [Save] button to finish. 15.3 Check Area Check area sets the area ahead and around own ship for which to check for safe navigation. See section 11.2 for how to activate own ship check. 15-4 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.4 Ring The range rings are the concentric set of rings on the chart display. They provide an estimation of the range to an object. You can turn them on or off from the [Ring] page. Range ring The interval between rings changes with the chart scale as shown in the table below. Chart scale 1:1,000 1:2,000 1:5,000 1:10,000 1:20,000 1:50,000 15.5 Ring interval (nm) 0.025 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.5 1.0 Chart scale 1:100,000 1:200,000 1:500,000 1:1,000,000 1:2,000,000 Ring interval (nm) 2.0 4.0 8.0 16.0 20.0 Predictor The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The onscreen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate position at the end of the time interval selected. The predictor is calculated using current speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal bow speed, transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are assumed to be stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state, including manual steering. To activate and set the Predictor, show the [Predictor] page. Turn the display on or off with [Display]. Set the time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 seconds), with [Time]. Movement of predictor (three pieces) 15-5 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS The Predictor is updated every three seconds internally and the status of the predictor is shown with [Status] as shown in the table below. Indication Status OK Speed is suitable (0.5 kn or higher). Not Enough Speed Speed is too low to use the Predictor. Not Available. Reset Filter May Restore. Predictor is not being received. Note: The ship speed must be 0.5 kn or higher. The predictor may not be displayed or may not work properly if the speed is lower than that value. 15.6 Anchor Watch The anchor watch feature checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest. Alarm setting Your ship's position, where you start the anchor watch. : Alarm triggered To set the anchor watch: 1. Select the [Anchor Watch] page. 2. Set the alarm radius (in nautical miles) with [Drag Circle]. 3. Drop the anchor then click the [Drop Anchor] button. 4. Click the [Start Anchor Watch] button to start the anchor watch. If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the corresponding caution is generated. To continue to use the anchor watch, click the [Clear Anchor] button to set the alarm about your current position. To stop the anchor watch, click the [Stop Anchor Watch] button. The caution is not generated even if your ship drifts more than the distance set with [Drag Circle]. If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the Alert 495 “Anchor Watch Setting” appears. 15-6 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.7 UKC (Under Keel Clearance) 15.7.1 UKC overview The UKC is the distance between the deepest point of the vessel's hull and the seabed. The UKC feature continuously checks ship's draught setting (UKC), and actual depth. When the depth gets shallower than the UKC, the Alert 634 "UKC Limit" is generated. And if the current depth is less than the echo alarm setting the echo alarm also is generated. Depth data is required to use the UKC function. Sea surface Draft Under keel clearance (UKC) Distance from keel to seabed Echo alarm setting Seabed Note: The sensor value shown is the depth to the transducer. Convert the value to the distance to the keel. 15.7.2 How to set UKC 1. Select the [UKC] page from the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. 2. Use [Echo Alarm Limit] to set the distance for the echo alarm. To activate the alarm, click the [ON/OFF] button to show [ON]. 3. At [UKC Limit], set ship's UKC limit. To activate the UKC feature, click the [ON/OFF] button to show [ON]. 4. Use [Current Draught] to set your ship's draft. Be sure to change the setting whenever the draft changes. 5. Use [Type] to set the shape of your ship's hull to show on the [UKC] window, [V-shape] or [Concave]. See the figure on the next page. 15-7 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.7.3 UKC window The UKC window provides a visual graphic of the relationship between UKC, draft and current depth. The window can be shown or hidden as desired and located anywhere within the electronic chart area. To show the window, click [Show UKC Window] on the [UKC] page. To move the window, drag and drop. 100.2m V-shape hull presentation 15-8 100.2m Concave hull presentation 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.8 Mini Conning Display The mini conning display, available in the Voyage navigation mode, provides various navigation information and is set during the installation. The display example below shows heading, doppler log speed and rudder angle. To show or hide the mini conning display, click the [Mini Conning] button on the InstantAccess bar. To shift the mini conning display, right-click the mini conning display to show the context-sensitive menu. Click an option: [Left Top], [Left Middle], [Left Bottom], [Right Top], [Right Middle] or [Right Bottom]. 15-9 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.9 Divider The divider, available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes with rhumb line navigation, measures the range, bearing and TTG between points, like using a dividers on a paper chart. Only one divider can be displayed. The divider is neither saved nor shared among chart radar units. 15.9.1 How to use the divider Do as shown below to get the range, bearing and TTG between points. Right-click starting point Select [New Divider] Divider appears. Ship on center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update New Divider 00.00 00.00 Drag circle to next point 00:07 00:07 5.9NM 051.2° 00:00 00:00 00.00 00.00 2.6NM 055.1° TTG between points Range and bearing between points You can also drag from an intermediate point to make another point. 2.75NM 358.6° 2.75NM 087.9° 2.75NM 087.9° Drag 2.83NM 043.8° 2.83NM 043.8° 15-10 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS 15.9.2 Usage characteristics, limitations • The distance between points is shown to the hundredths decimal place up to 100 NM and to the tenths decimal place thereafter. • A maximum of 50 points can be inserted, and the maximum measurable distance between two points is 240.0 NM. • The TTG value is rounded to the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the displayed total TTG may not equal the sum of all the TTGs. • The TTG is measurable to 99:00. If the TTG is higher, the TTG indication is ">99:00". • The ship’s speed must be at least 0.5 kn to calculate TTG. • The divider cannot be used in latitude higher than 85°. 15.9.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider Get into the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode then right-click the screen to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Clear Divider]. Ship on center Clear RADAR Info Object INFO Chart Legend Manual Update Clear Divider 15-11 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS This page is intentionally left blank. 15-12 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.1 CCRS This chart radar employs a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) for the acquisition, processing, storage and distribution of sensor information. The CCRS ensures that all parts of the system uses the same source and values, e.g., speed through water, heading, etc. The illustration below shows the CCRS diagram. Processor Unit Processor Unit CCRS CCRS CCRS SENSOR ADAPTER Sensors The CCRS process NMEA0183 and IEC 61162-1 sentences. No other types of data (video signals, etc.) are processed. Check for validity, legitimacy The system checks received sentences for validity and legitimacy. Validity check: A sentences’s checksum, status (A/V), Mode indicator and setting values are checked. (If checksum error is found, the sentence is disaffirmed. Legitimacy check: The range and accuracy of a sentence is checked.) If the check for both is OK a valid flag results. If either is invalid, the invalid flag is given. Types of CCRS There are two types of CCRS: System and Local. The System CCRS integrates all navigation devices. In the Local CCRS each navigation device operates independently. Representative sensors If the system has multiple like sensors, the CCRS selects the representative sensor. Generally, the system uses common representative sensors; however, independent representative sensors (local representative sensors) can also be used. 16-1 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors The operator can select navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the applicable page in the [System Sensor Setting] and [Local Sensor Setting] menus. To access these menus, right-click the Sensor information, datum box then click [Select Sensor] followed by [Setting]. The descriptions in this section show the sensor menus in the radar mode. The sensor menus in the chart mode mirror those in the radar mode, although the layout is different. Any change made in a sensor menu is reflected to the companion sensor menu, to synchronize the data between the modes. 16.2.1 Sensors menu description [HDG] page (Local Sensor) GYO001 GYO002 Correction [Sensors]: Select the heading sensor to use. [Analog Gyro]: No use. [Manual]: Set heading manually when there is no heading sensor available. (Not shown on IMO type.) [Gyro Correction]: Set correction manually for the heading value. (Not available with the [System Sensor Setting] menu.) 16-2 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS [SPD] page (System Sensor) [Stabilization Mode]: Select the water stabilization mode: Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization, or select [Water] for sea stabilization. [Sensor Type]: Select [GPS] in case of a GPS navigator, or [LOG] for speed log. [Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the [Sensors] list, or click [Manual] to enter speed manually. Use [Manual] when no speed source is available. [Manual]: Input speed manually. Check [Water] in [Stabilization Mode] and deactivate the AIS function to enable entry. [Reference SPD]: Check to use radar as the source for speed and course. (Only available with the Local Sensor Setting and checking [Bottom] in [Stabilization Mode].) [Set Drift]: Check the [Set Drift] checkbox to manually set speed and course of drift. Note that you can select manual drift only if you check [Water] in [Stabilization Mode]. Angle = Difference between heading and COG Spd = Speed component of the drift vector Cse = Course component of the drift vector Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD and HDG) and (set and drift). North cse SOG COG HDG spd SPD an gle SPD: HDG SOG: COG: spd: cse: angle: water speed heading of ship speed over ground course over ground speed of drift course of drift difference between HDG and COG 16-3 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS [POSN] (Position) page The sensor label (here, GPS001, GPS002) indicates the name of the sensor. [Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the [Sensors] list, or click [DR] to enter position manually. When the position source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another position source, then you get the Alert 471 "Position Source Change". [DR]: Check [DR] when no position source is available. 16-4 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS [COG/SOG] page Select the source (GPS receiver) for speed over the ground and course over the ground. 1 GPS001 [Other Sensor] page To show the [Other Sensors] page, open the menu and select [Other Sensor Settings] in the chart mode. [Wind]: Wind (True, Theoretical or Apparent) speed (kn or m/s) and direction are displayed. See section 16.9. [Depth Below Trans]: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may be entered to alert you when the depth is within the value set. [Temperature]: Water surface temperature. [Water Current]: Tide at own ship’s position. 16-5 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.3 Source of Position The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The position sensors have either primary or secondary as input for their calculation. DGPS position sensors are considered more accurate than other position sensors. The latitude and longitude position is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that may be displayed in the position area are as follows: • [DR]: Shown in yellow when position source is dead reckoning. • [DGPS], [GPS]: Name of position source. Position sensor selected as high priority Valid data exists No valid data exists Position sensor selected as low priority Valid data exists Position used by this system No valid data exists Selected Backup dead reckoning If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data, the system immediately generates the Alert 472 "Position Source Change". 16-6 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship The system has three different positions for own ship: System position, Primary position and Secondary position. • System position: CCRP • Primary position: Position generated by position source with highest priority. • Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as 2nd highest priority. The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen as Primary on the [POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen as Secondary on the [POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. Secondary position of own ship is not available as latitude/longitude value for the user. Position sensor selected as Secondary No valid data Valid data exists Position sensor selected as priority lower than Secondary No valid data Valid data exists Secondary position of own ship used by this system Secondary position of own ship is not valid System, primary and secondary positions of your ship may be plotted on the chart radar display with the past tracks feature. You can control their visibility, etc. from the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu, shown in the right figure. In this example, past tracks are plotted using the primary position-fixing equipment. 16-7 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.5 Source of Navigation Data The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG, COG" is speed over the ground and course over the ground, respectively. "SPD" is speed through the water.”Drift” is the difference between speed through the water and speed over ground. Heading used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar display. In the example shown below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to true North. Heading sensor selected as high priority No valid data exists GPS1 Selected Heading sensor selected as low priority No valid data exists Valid data exists Heading used by this system Alert 450 “Heading Sensor Not Available” SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar display. In the example below, COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and this is indicated with the text "GPS*" or "LOG*" (* is the number of sensors). COG/SOG from position sensor COG/SOG No valid data exists calculated from speed log 16-8 Valid data exists Valid data exists SOG/COG used by this system 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS Speed used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar display.The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation. Water Stabilization Mode Selected Manual speed Selected and Manual set drift exists Manual speed + Manual set drift Speed used by this system Selected and no manual set drift exists Not selected LOG (Water speed) Selected and Manual set drift exists Manual speed + Manual set drift Selected and No manual set drift exists No valid data exists LOG (Ground speed) Selected No valid data exists GPS Selected Not selected Bottom Stabilization Mode Selected Reference SPD (local only) Selected Alert related to SOG, COG, speed and heading components It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that the chosen sensors do not have any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning. When no heading source is available, the system generates the Alert 450 "Heading Sensor Not Available." When no speed source is available, the system generates the Alert 453 "SDME Sensor Not Available." When no COG/SOG data is available, the system generates the Alert 279 "COG/SOG Not Available." 16-9 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication When a sensor cannot be used because of some problem, the system automatically switches the sensor. When this occurs the name of the newly selected sensor appears in yellow. GYRO1 GYRO1 LOG BT Speed sensor changed 16.7 Filter Status The ECDIS incorporates a filter that receives raw sensor data, checks sensor integrity and processes multiple sensor data to produce a continuous estimate of ship’s position and motion. By default, the filter uses data from all available sensors for filtering and integrity monitoring. The exception is heading data; only the selected heading device affects the output of the filter, but other heading sensors (including magnetic compasses) are used for integrity monitoring. Sensors may be excluded manually or automatically. An excluded sensor participates in neither integrity monitoring or filtering. The filter automatically excludes a sensor from use if the sensor fails the first level of integrity check (for example, if a sudden jump is detected). If the actual integrity check fails for some reason and the filter is able to identify the faulty sensor, the faulty sensor is automatically excluded. Sensor integrity is determined by: (1) monitoring the statistical accuracy of each sensor independently and analyzing the input values and using the information of the type of sensor, and (2) monitoring the difference between pairs of sensors. The system checks heading, rate of turn, position, COG/SOG and CTW/STW data for integrity, in accordance with INS regulations (IEC-61924-2). The result is either [Passed], [Doubtful], [Failed], [Excluded] or [Not Available]. The integrity check result appears in the following locations: Corr.: Not Available Passed Corr.: Not Available Integrity check result Passed • [Local Sensor Setting] and [System Sensor Setting] menus. The right figure shows the result for the heading sensor GYRO1. • [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Setting] menu. See the next page. 16-10 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS [Passed] (green): Data is available for comparison and data is normal [Doubtful] (yellow): Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal. [Failed] (orange): Data is quite away from predicted value based on a comparison. [Excluded] (orange): Data is greatly changed compared with predicted value. [Not Available] (orange): Sentence status or mode indicator is abnormal. For heading data, If there is only one gyro, the judgement is "Doubtful" when the ship is stopped because there is no COG for comparison. When the ship begins to move, the judgement is changed to "Passed" because there is COG for comparison. The methods of integrity monitoring are outlined in the table below. Sensor Comparison Position • Comparison with other position sensors. • Comparison with dead reckoning position. Heading • Comparison with other heading sensors. • Comparison with a COG sensor (used only if other heading sensors are not available and if COG is high enough). Speed over the ground • Comparison with other SOG sensors. • Comparison with water speed sensors is a secondary option (used only if other SOG sensors are not available). Speed through the water • Comparison with other STW sensors. • Comparison with STW sensors is a secondary option (used only if other STW sensors are not available). Rate of turn • Comparison with other rate of turn sensors. The status and integrity of all sensors can be monitored from the [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. Sensors can also be unselected and the filter reset from this page. The [Status] column indicates sensor status as follows: • [Selected] (sensor selected for use in filter) • [Unselected] (sensor not used in filter) • [Not Available] (no sensor information) • [Excluded] (automatically excluded sensor) The [Integrity] column indicates sensor integrity as either [Passed] (green characters) or [Failed] (red characters). The integrity evaluation is [Doubtful] (yellow characters) when there are no other sensors to compare with. 16-11 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS The [Comparisons] column shows the sensors compared and the integrity evaluation of compared sensors in parentheses. Using the illustration above as an example, SOG/COG data fed from GP0002 is compared with the sensors GP0001 and VD0001. The integrity evaluation for the compared sensors is [Passed]. To unselect a sensor manually, select the sensor from the drop-down list at the bottom left corner of the page, click the [Unselect] button then click the [Save] button. [Unselected] appears in the [Status] column. To reselect an unselected sensor, select the sensor from the drop-down list, click the [Select] button. [Selected] appears in the [Status] column The [Reset Filter] button functions to recover from sensor failure. When the button is operated: • Automatically excluded sensors are re-included. • All data history is erased. • Output values are re-estimated using new data. • Integrity monitoring is restarted using new data. Note: The filter can also be reset from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Filter Reset]. 16.8 Position Alignment The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship's position by using radar echo target and chart material. If position alignment is in use, the Alert 640 "Chart Align: Over 30 Min." is generated every 30 minutes to remind the user to align position. The alert is automatically erased in 10 seconds. Note: This feature is effective with the chart radar unit whose data source for FILT is assigned the highest priority. 16.8.1 How to align position If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly on the chart, there is either position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors. Position may be aligned on the chart radar display by moving own ship position or by moving radar target position. To align position, get into the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Offset] button at the top-right position on the screen, put the cursor on the correct position then click. The amount of offset, in bearing and range, appears to the right the [Offset] button. The latitude and longitude position indication is shown in yellow characters when the position align feature is active. 16-12 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment Click the [Offset] button to cancel the position offset. 16.9 Wind Sensor The chart radar can display and output wind data in the following three formats: Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction. Wind angle reference: Heading North: True wind angle, true wind speed Wind angle reference: True North Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed Wind angle reference: Heading The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data. The wind values are as shown below. Ship information: COG: 60° SOG: 8.7 kn Heading: 45° Wind angle Wind speed Apparent: 345° 10 kn North: 330° 5 kn Theoretical: 285° 5 kn 16-13 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS North Wind Angle (Apparent: 345°) Wind speed (Apparent: 10 kn) Wind from NNW (330°) Apparent Wind Heading True Wind Ship's Speed (SOG: 8.7 kn) Wind Speed (North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn) Wind Angle (Theoretical: 285°) Angle (reference North) Wind Angle (North: 330°) Apparent, north or theoretical wind may be selected from the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. 16.10 Depth Sensor The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the [Other Sensor] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. The content of the [Other Sensor] page depends on sensors connected. In this example there are three transducers (bow, mid and aft) installed. 16-14 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS 130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can get an alert when the measured depth is less than the "Echo Alarm Limit" setting at the [UKC] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The system generates the Alert 485 "Depth Limit". 16-15 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS This page is intentionally left blank. 16-16 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 17.1 AIS Safety Messages You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS. 17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message Note: If you are using the Trackball Control Unit RCU-026, display the software keyboard ([DISP] button, [ cedure. ], [ON] on the InstantAccess bar) before starting this pro- 1. In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Message] dialog box. MMSI of receiver (MMSI or “Broadcast”) MMSI of sender Date received Type of message (Binary, Safety) Status of message (Read, Unread) 17-1 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 2. Click the [New] button. 3. At [Send to], select where to send the message. Select [Broadcast] to send the message to all AISequipped ships within communication range, or select [MMSI] and enter the MMSI of the ship where to send the message. 4. At [Type], select the type of message, [Safety] or [Binary] (routine). 5. At [Channel], select the channel to use to send the message. 6. At [Description], enter the text of your message. The no. of characters available depends on the type of message. Safety message broadcast: 161 characters Binary message broadcast: 156 characters Safety message addressed to MMSI: 156 characters Binary message addressed to MMSI: 151characters 7. Click the [Send] button to send the message. 17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages When an AIS message is received, the Alert 539 "AIS Message Received" appears. Do the following to view the message. How to display the Messages dialog box, view a message 1. Click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] button as appropriate. 3. Click a message to view its contents. WELCOME TO FURUNO 17-2 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete. How to delete a received or sent message 1. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] as appropriate. 2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.) 3. Click the [Delete] button. How to delete received, sent messages permanently 1. Click the [Trash Box] button. 2. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.) 3. Click the [Delete] button. 17.2 Navtex Messages Navtex (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency directprinting service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships. Navtex messages can be received and read in the Voyage navigation mode. 17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages To display a received NAVTEX message, do the following: 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the message to view. The text of the message appears in the [Description] box. 17-3 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES 17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete. How to delete received Navtex messages 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Receive Box] button. 3. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "Date" then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 4. Click the [Delete] button. How to deleted received Navtex messages permanently 1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2. Click the [Trash Box] button. 3. Click the box that is before the date to show a checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "Date" then select [Select All] or [Deselect All] as applicable.) 4. Click the [Delete] button. 17-4 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS Tracked targets and AIS targets can be overlaid on the chart. Only the differences between the radar and chart TT and AIS displays are described here. The data of received radar-tracked targets must have reference to ground. If the data does not meet that criteria, target vectors are not shown and the indications COG and SOG in the TT info data box show [missing]. 18.1 TT Display 18.1.1 TT symbols Refer to paragraph 3.7.1. 18.1.2 TT symbol color and size Do the following to select TT symbol color and size. Note that the color of the AIS symbol is also changed. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Symbol Display] menu. 2. Click the [Targets] tab. 3. Select the color among, green, blue, black, magenta and brown, with the [Color] pull-down list. 4. Select the size from standard or small, with the [TT Size] pull-down list. 18-1 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.1.3 How to display tracked target data Control Unit: Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key. Trackball module: Click the target for which you want to show its data. Title bar TT No. Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA TCPA Bow crossing range Bow crossing time To erase data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button. The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information: • Target's number. Target numbering starts from "01". When a target is erased the number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 200 targets are acquired. • Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship • True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target • CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the closest point and the TT is going away from own ship. • Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT) 18-2 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.1.4 Past position point attributes You can define past position point attributes for tracked targets by points and style. 1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Symbol Display] menu. 2. Click the [Targets] tab. 3. At [TT Points], select the number of points to show. 4. At [Style], select the style for the past position points. The choices are [Points] and [Points and Dots]. 18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter If you are in a congested area the lost target alert may sound against many AIS targets. In this case, you can prevent the alarm from sounding against TT that are beyond a certain range and/or smaller than a specific length. 1. Open the MENU and select [TT/AIS] and [Setting] then click the [Setting.2] tab. 2. In the [TT Lost Target Filter] window, set the maximum range to track a target. [Max Range]: The maximum range at which to track a lost target. A tracked target not within this range is not tracked. 3. Click the [ON/OFF] button to show ON or OFF as appropriate. 18.1.6 TT recording functions Tracked target information is saved to the [Danger Targets] log. See section 19.5. 18-3 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.2 AIS Display 18.2.1 AIS symbols Refer to section 4.3. 18.2.2 Voyage data Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught and crew, on the [Voyage Data] page in the [NAV Status] menu. The data entered here is reflected to the AIS transponder. Note: [Persons], the total number of persons onboard, should be set at the AIS transponder. Some AIS transponders may not accept this input from the radar. 1. Open the MENU then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Voyage Data] tab. 2. Click the [Navigational Status] drop-down list then select your navigational status, from the list below. • • • • • • • [Underway using engine] [At anchor] [Not under command] [Restricted maneuverability] [Constrained by her draught] [Moored] [Aground] • • • • • • • [Engaged in fishing] [Under way sailing] [Reserved for high speed craft] [Reserved for wing in ground] [Reserved for future use] (x3) [AIS-SART (active)] [Not defined] 3. Enter ship's draught (0.0 - 25.5 (m)) at [MAX Draught]. 4. Enter your ETA at [ETA]. Day: two digits Month: Three-character abbreviation Year: Four digits 5. Enter your destination at [Destination], using a maximum of 20 characters. 6. Click the [Save] button to save the settings. 18-4 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets 1. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. (The [Setting.1] page can also be opened from the menu (MENU → [TT/AIS] → [Setting] → [Setting.1].) 2. In the [AIS DISP Filter] window, set each item referring to the description below. • Click the buttons of [Sleeping Class A] and [Sleeping Class B] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show those targets. • Set the maximum range with [Max Range]. Any target beyond the range set here will not be displayed. • Set the ship speed for AIS targets, with [Min Ship Speed]. Any AIS target whose speed is lower than that set here will not be displayed. 3. Click the [Save] button to save settings. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows: AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts. 18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets The AIS target automatic activation feature is turned on or off from the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Set the conditions for automatic activation as shown below. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to get automatic activation of AIS targets. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. 18-5 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets You can sleep all activated targets. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. Click the [Sleep All Targets] button to sleep all activated targets. 18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter You can select what AIS targets to exclude from the AIS lost target alert, on the [Setting.2] page in the [TT/AIS] menu. [Max Range]: Set the max. range at which a target must be to be declared a lost target. [Min Ship Speed]: A tracked target whose speed is slower than set here does not trigger the lost target alarm. [Except Class B]: Exclude class B AIS targets from the AIS lost target alert. 18-6 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.2.7 How to display AIS target data Normal data Put the cursor on an AIS target then push the left button. Title bar “Level of detail” button MMSI Vessel name Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA Scroll buttons* Close button Heading Rate of turn TCPA Bow crossing range Bow crossing time Position Navigation status *: Scroll buttons appear when there are multiple AIS targets. 18-7 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS Expanded data Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Click the [Expand] button (level of detail) on the [AIS Info] box to show expanded AIS data. Title bar MMSI Vessel name Bearing Range Course over ground Speed over ground CPA “Level of detail” button Scroll buttons* Close button Heading Rate of turn TCPA Bow cross range Bow cross time Position Navigation status Position sensor Position sensor accuracy (HIGH, LOW) Call sign IMO No. Length Width Draught Destination ETA AIS version no. Ship & Cargo type Association condition *: Scroll buttons appear when there are multiple AIS targets. 18-8 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS 18.2.8 How to display own ship data You can see own ship's data on the [Own Ship] page in the [NAV Status] menu. Open the menu then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Own Ship] tab. 18.3 MMSI: 457804356 Name: FURUNO Voyager Call Sign: JZ5890312 Type: 0 Description: All ships of this type Length(LOA): 223.2 m Width: 31.8 m Ref Bow: 3.3 m Ref Port: 2.8 m Association An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the chart for radar display. This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship radar antenna). To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the “association” function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the association criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the association method selected. Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS target is lost. All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the radar mode, with the [TT/AIS] setting box (see section 4.14). All settings are mutually shared. 18.3.1 How to select association method Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target, or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the corresponding item on the [TT/AIS] menu. To turn off association, click the location to remove the arrow. < > 18-9 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS Note: You can also select the method by right-clicking the location. Click desired association method. 18.3.2 Association: OFF Association: TT Association: AIS How to set the conditions for association To set the criteria for association, right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay] box, select [Setting] and open the [Setting.2] page. For setting details, see paragraph 4.14.2. 18-10 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS The chart radar records various voyage-related items like movement and position of own ship and dangerous radar targets (from Radar). These items are recorded in the following logs: Event log: Records user events and position events. NAV log: Records entire voyage (i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last, also MOB data), details (position, speed and course every minute), chart usage (information on charts used for display). Target log: Records dangerous TT. Alert log: Records alerts generated by the system. Chart log: Records the install and update history for the ENC and C-MAP charts. 19.1 How to Record User, Position Events 19.1.1 User events A user event is a comment about an event (weather, etc.). You can show user events on the chart area. Open the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu show or hide the events. To record a user event: 1. Get into the Voyage planning mode then click the [Record], [Event Log] and [User Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Record User Event] window. 2. Enter a comment. Click the [OK] button to finish and close the text box. An event marker ( age] log. ) appears at your position and the event is recorded to the [Voy- To view the comment entered for an event, put the cursor on the event then left click to show the [Event Information] window. The window shows the name of the event ([UserEvent]), time and date of entry, latitude and longitude position of the event and comment. Note that the comment can be edited from this window. Edit the comment then click the [OK] button to save. 19-1 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.1.2 Position events The operator may manually save positions to the [Event] log by position or LOP (Line of Position): To record a position, get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then do as follows: 1. Click the [Record], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [Position Event] dialog box. 2. At the list box at the top of the dialog box, select position type. [Manual]: Manual input of ship’s position. Go to step 4. [LOP]: Latitude and longitude position of a fixed object at ship's position. Go to step 5. [Position]: Ship’s position fed from navigator selected. Go to step 3. 3. For [Position], click the [Record] button. Ship’s position fed from navigator selected Selected navigator The position event mark appears at the ship’s position. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Time of entry 1044 DGPS1 Navigator selected Position event mark 19-2 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 4. For [Manual], manually enter position, enter a comment if required, then click the [Record] button. Enter position manually. Enter comment here if required. The position event mark appears at the manual input position. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Time of entry 1044 DGPS1 Navigator selected Position event mark 5. For [LOP], see the description below. Position fixes defined by Line of Position (LOP) A plotted line on which a vessel is located, determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. Two or more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the ship's current position. If the position is based on only two observations, it is an "estimated position" (EP); otherwise it is called a fix. A maximum of 6 observations can be entered to obtain a fix. Basic operation: Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog boxes or they can be selected graphically on the chart. Click on a charted object (beacon, light, buoy etc.). Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes. Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship's current position information. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected (or when the [Add] button is clicked). Click the [Add] box to include the observation in the fix computation. The counter shows "new/1", at the input of the second observation. The word "new" indicates that the observation currently displayed is not yet included in the fix computation, and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the chart. The added observations can be edited or deleted after selecting them at the counter. When at least two measurements are entered, the EP or fix is computed and the coordinates are shown in the top part of the dialog.To show a position symbol on the chart, click the [Record] button. In the case of an EP, the letters EP are shown on the right side of the coordinates. If a valid position estimate cannot be obtained, a message is displayed under the coordinates. This may happen, for example, if the lines / circles have multiple crossings that are far apart, or if two lines are nearly parallel or don't intersect at all. The accuracy limit (estimated standard error) is 1.0 NM. If the estimate is valid, the [Record] box can be clicked to record the current position estimate in the [Voyage] log. Discrepancy between LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may be viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart which is displayed if position event display is on in chart display settings). 19-3 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS Time transfer: If the observations are not simultaneous, they should be transferred to a common time. Transferring is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a position line (or ring) is transferred, the letters TPL are shown beside its timestamp on the chart. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of the dialog. [Transfer to latest] transfers the measurements as if they were all made at the time of the newest measurement. [Continuous transfer] transfers all measurements to real time. [Transfer off] can be used to check where the measurement origins are. The position estimate and the record function follow the same logic, which means that Transfer off shows a position that has no relevance and Transfer to latest sends an old position to the [Voyage] log (timestamp in the log does not match the position). If you are satisfied with the position shown in the latitude and longitude fields, then click the [Record] button to save the position observation to the Voyage log. If you wish you can also enter latitude and longitude values manually. Timeouts: The observations cannot be used long after they were made because dead reckoning is inaccurate. Click the [Record] button to put a position event at the LOP-calculated position. The position is recorded to the [Voyage] log. Time of entry 1044 Accuracy of position EP: Low accuracy DR: High accuracy EP LOP Position event mark How to find position event information You can find information about a position event by putting the cursor on the event mark then left click. The [Event Position] window shows event type (position event), time of entry, event position, name of sensor ([Position] only), comment (automatic for [LOP] and [Position]; user-entered comment* for [Manual]), and position line data ([LOP] only). *Comment cannnot be changed from this window. Position event: Position Position event: Manual 19-4 Position event: LOP 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.2 Details Log The [Details] log contains voyage information, recorded once per minute. • • • • • • • • • • [Date] [Time] [Source]: No. of unit which generated log [Type]: Type of position data • [Auto]: Automatic input of position [Latitude], [Longitude]: Position as output by selected sensor [Align/NM], [Align/°T]: Range, bearing offset, if used [SOG/kn]: Speed over the ground [COG/°T]: Course over the ground [HDG/°T]: Heading [CORR/°T]: Gyro correction value, if used How to view the Details log Click the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Detail] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Export File • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. Input box 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. Find Input text in box and [Find] button appears. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait] prints two pages of data on one page. • To show track for the period selected, click the [Show Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the track. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named DetailsLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19-5 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.3 Voyage Log The [Voyage] log records all voyage-related data of the past three months. Recorded events are: • • • • • • • • • • • [Date]: Date of entry [Time]: TIme of entry [Source]: No. of unit which generated log [Type]: Log entry types • [Auto]: Automatic entry of ship position, in 1 to 4 hr intervals, set by operator. • [Ship]: Logged if speed or course exceed operator-set values. • [MOB]: MOB position, entered with [MOB] button. • [User]: Operator-entered position. The information entered in the [Description] box is logged. • [Posdev]: Operator-entered GPS position or LOP. The information entered in the [Description] box is logged. [Latitude], [Longitude]: Latitude and longitude position [SOG/kn], [COG/°T], [HDG/°T]: Speed over the ground, course over the ground, heading. [CORR/°T]: Offset bearing, if used [Wind/kn], [Wind/°T]: Wind speed and angle [Dist/NM]: Offset distance [Depth/m]: Depth in meters [Description]: The latitude and longitude position and bearing (or distance) of a maximum of three objects are automatically recorded to each log entry. An object whose position accuracy is low is not recorded. If an object has both a bearing and distance, separate entries are made. L/L position, bearing of object (no.1) If desired the description can be edited. Click the applicable Description block to show the [Edit Description] box. Edit the description as required then click the [OK] button. 19-6 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS How to view the Voyage log To open the Voyage log, click the [Record], [NAV Log] and [Voyage] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. Export File • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select printing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait] and [Spread Landscape] print two pages of data on one page. • To show track for the period selected, click the [Show Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the track. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is named VoyageLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19-7 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging The operator can set the conditions for automatic voyage logging. When your speed or course equals the amount set here, an entry is made in the [Voyage] log: • Define the amount of course and speed change which creates a log entry. • Set the interval of logging, regardless of speed and course change. To set the conditions of logging, do as follows: 1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAVI Log] menu. 2. Set desired limits for speed, course and log interval. [Speed]: 1 - 10 kn, 1 kn interval [Course]: 0 - 30°, 1° interval [Log Interval]: 1 - 4 hr, 1 hr interval When your speed or course changes by the amount set here, an entry is made in the [Voyage] log, at the interval selected. 19.4 Chart Usage Log The [Chart Usage] log stores which charts were used in chart alerts. To open the log, click [Record], [NAV Log] and [Chart Usage] on the InstantAccess bar. The following information is recorded in the chart usage log: • Date and time chart was displayed • Chart ID • Center position of display (Lat, Lon) • Chart source • Chart edition • Display scale • Compilation scale • The latest update included to chart • Chart base 19-8 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. 19-9 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.5 Danger Targets Log The [Danger Targets] log stores information about dangerous targets that are received from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are received from an AIS transponder (AIS targets). If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time to CPA), information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are recorded into the danger target log. This data is as follows: • • • • • • • • • • [Date]: Date of entry [Time]: Time of entry [Source]: Unit which generated log [Type]: Type of dangerous target [Latitude], [Longitude]: Latitude and longitude position of dangerous target [SPD/kn]: Speed of dangerous target [CRS/°T]: Course of dangerous target [HDG/°T]: Heading of dangerous target [CPA/NM], [TCPA/min]: CPA and TCPA of dangerous target [Index]: Radar target no. (TT), MMSI (AIS) How to view the danger targets log To open the [Danger Targets] log, click the [Record], [Target Log] and [Danger Target] buttons on the InstantAccess bar. 2013-05-08 2013-05-08 13:55:59 13:53:42 ECD001 ECD001 TT 35°38.164’N TT 35°57.770’N 139°49.842’E 139°49.732’E 15.1 12.1 193.3 200.6 N/A N/A 1.3 1.1 0.7 0.2 • To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Covered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display all logs. • To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button. • To search the log, do as follows: 1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box. 2) Click the input box then enter the text to search. 3) Select the search direction, with the up or down radio button. 4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the screen. 5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the [Cancel] button. • To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. • To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is namedDangerTargetLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv. 19-10 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS 19.5.1 How to set the conditions for logging danger targets The operator may set Closest Point of Arrival (CPA), Time for CPA (TCPA) and Log interval for viewing dangerous TT and AIS targets on the chart radar display. 1. Open the menu and select the [RECORD], [Target Log], [Danger Target] menus. 2. Set how often to record dangerous TTs and AIS targets with [Log interval]. 19-11 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS This page is intentionally left blank. 19-12 20. ALERTS 20.1 What is an Alert? “Alert" is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation generated within the system. Alerts are classified according to priority and category. Alert priority There are three alert priorities: alarm, warning and caution. Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to maintain the safe navigation of the ship. Warning: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention for precautionary reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately hazardous, but may become so. Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the ordinary consideration of the situation or of given information. Alert category An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity or source. Category Description A Category A alerts include alerts indicating • Danger of collision • Danger of grounding B Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under category A. C IAS (Integrated Automation System) generated engine alert 20-1 20. ALERTS 20.2 Alert Box When an alert is generated, the related alert message and alert state icon appear in the [Alert] box, which is at the bottom right corner on the screen. An audible alarm is additionally generated for alarms and warnings. In addition to the alert message and alert state icon, the [Alert] box has the buzzer stop button and provides access to the [Alert List] and [Alert Log]. Alert state icon Buzzer stop button (Click to stop buzzer temporarily.) Alert message (Number and name of alert) Alert List/Alert Log button (Right-click to select [Alert List Window] or [Alert Log Window].) Alert state icon: The state of an alert is shown with an icon. See page 20-4. Alert message: The number and name of all active alerts appear in the message area, with the alert of the highest priority on top always. The color of both the message and the background change according to alert priority and alert state. See the table on the next page. An alert can be acknowledged from the [Alert] box or [Alert List]. An alert remains in the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until it is acknowledged and rectified. See section 20.5. Alert List/Alert Log button: Right-click to select [Alert List Window] or [Alert Log Window]. The background color of the button is light blue when the list or log is open. See sections 20.5 and 20.6 for a description of the list and log. Buzzer stop button: Click to temporarily silence the buzzer, which sounds against alarms and warnings. See page 20-4. 20-2 20. ALERTS Alert message display format Alert indication Priority of alert Alarm 526 TT CPA/TCPA Displayed alternately Alert state - Not acknowledged/Not rectified. OR - Not acknowledged/Rectified. Display state Black characters on red background. Flashing interval • 0.5 s, 0.5 s (Not rectified) • 3 s, 1 s (Rectified) Red characters on gray background. 526 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm Acknowledged/Not rectified. Red characters on gray background. Warning - Not acknowledged/Not rectified. OR Not acknowledged/Rectified. Black characters on yelloworange background. 526 TT CPA/TCPA 008 Fan 2 No Rotati.. Displayed alternately Flashing interval • 0.5 s, 0.5 s (Not rectified) • 3 s, 1 s (Rectified) Yellow-orange characters on gray background. 008 Fan2 No Rotati.. Warning Acknowledged/Not rectified. Yellow-orange characters on gray background. Caution Not rectified. Yellow characters on gray background. Alarm/ Warning Acknowledged/Rectified. No display. Caution Rectified. No display. 008 Fan2 No Rotati.. 362 Wind Sensor 3.. 20-3 20. ALERTS Alert state icons The table shows the icons used to indicate the various alert states for the alarm, warning and caution alerts. Icon Alert priority: Alarm Alert state Icon description Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Red triangle with crossed out black loudspeaker in center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Red triangle with black exclamation point in center of triangle. Not acknowledged/Not rectified, Buzzer temporarily silenced Acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Red triangle with black check mark in center of triangle. The icon flashes 3 s, goes off 1 s, repeats the sequence. Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Yellow-orange circle with crossed out black loudspeaker in center of circle. Flashing every 0.5 s. Yellow-orange circle with black exclamation point in center of circle. Yellow-orange circle with black check mark in center of circle. The icon flashes 3 s, goes off 1 s, repeats the sequence. Alert priority: Warning Not acknowledged/Not rectified, Buzzer temporarily silenced Acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Alert priority: Caution Caution Steadily displayed yellow square with black exclamation point in center of square. Buzzer stop button The color of both the background and the icon change according to alert state. Button state Description No alert generated. The background is gray and the icon is grayed out. An alarm or warning is being acknowledged. The background is gray and the icon is white. Button clicked to silence buzzer temporarily. The background is light-blue and the icon is black. 20-4 20. ALERTS 20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Alarm or Warning When the buzzer for an alarm or warning sounds, you can temporarily silence it by doing one of the following: • Click the buzzer stop button in the [Alert] box. • In the [Alert List], click the [Silence] button. The buzzer is stopped and the alert state changes. An alert message remains in the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until acknowledged and rectified. If an alarm or warning is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, the buzzer sounds again. 20.4 How to Acknowledge an Alarm or Warning When an alarm or warning is generated, the buzzer sounds and the name of the alert appears and flashes in the [Alert] box and [Alert List]. To acknowledge the alert, do one of the following: • Press the ALARM ACK key. • In the [Alert] box or [Alert List], click the unacknowledged alert. After acknowledgement, the buzzer and the flashing for the alert message are stopped and the priority of the alert changes as shown in the table below. The alert message remains on the display until rectified. Priority no. High 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Low Priority of alert Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Caution Alert state Not acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Acknowledged/Not rectified Acknowledged/Not rectified Not rectified Unacknowledged warnings If a warning (Alert 150 "Early Course Change Indication" and 151 "Actual Course Change Indication") is not acknowledged within 30 seconds then the priority changes to alarm. If a warning (except for Alert 150 and 151) is not acknowledged within 60 seconds, the warning is generated again. Category of alert and place of alert acknowledgement The place of alert acknowledgement depends on the category of the alert. Category A B C Where the alert is generated Equipment that generated the alert. Equipment that generated the alert. IAS (Integrated Automation System) generated engine alert Place of alert acknowledgement Equipment that generated the alert. Equipment that generated the alert or AMS. – 20-5 20. ALERTS 20.5 Alert List The [Alert List] displays all active alerts, with unacknowledged alerts at the top, in priority order. To display the list, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the [Alert] box then select [Alert List/Log Window]. The ZDA sentence is required to display the time in the list. Note: The [Alert List] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting. The list shows • Alert no. • Alert text • Source of alert • Time (UTC) alert was generated • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged • Details about the alert selected Filter Alert details Silence buzzer Alert no. Alert text Source Time ACKed Time generated Alert info icon The background color of an unacknowledged alarm is red and flashing and unacknowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is displayed steadily, in red for alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed steadily in yellow. The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view. Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts. To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert info icon at the left side of the window to show the details in the [Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how to handle the alert, etc. An individual alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it. The [Silence] button silences the buzzer. 20-6 20. ALERTS How the alert list is updated after acknowledgement, rectification When you acknowledge an alert, its display method on the [Alert] list changes according to alert category and alert state. Acknowledged and rectified alerts are immediately removed from the list. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Alert priority Alarm Warning Alarm Warning Caution Alarm Warning Caution 20.6 Alert state Not acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Not acknowledged/Not rectified Not acknowledged/Rectified Acknowledged/Not rectified Acknowledged/Not rectified Not rectified Acknowledged/Rectified Acknowledged/Rectified Rectified Display after acknowledgement 5 8 6 9 – – – – – – Display after rectification 2 – 4 – 8 9 10 – – – Alert Log The [Alert] log stores and displays the latest 10,000 alerts. To display the log, rightclick the [Alert List/Alert Log] button then select [Alert List/Log Window]. Note: The [Alert Log] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting. The log shows the following information for each alert: • • • • • Priority of alert (Alarm, Warning, Caution) Category of alert (A, B or C) Alert no. Alert description Source of alert Priority filter • • • • Occurred Time (UTC) ACKed Time (UTC) Rectified Time (UTC) Alert details Category filter Category Alert text Occured time Priority Source Alert no. Alarm Details 20-7 20. ALERTS You can select what type of alerts to display with [Priority Filter] and [Category Filter] at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Alert No.], [Description], [Occurred Time], [ACKed TIime] or [Rectified Time]. Click the corresponding column title to sort. To find detailed information about an alert, select it to show detailed information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search] box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash memory, in .dat format, by clicking the [Export Log] button. 20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line input. The ALR message from the sensor includes information about alerts from the sensor, and is presented though the normal alert system. When you acknowledge an alert, an ACK message is sent to the sensor to do remote acknowledge. This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF. 20.8 List of Alerts Below is a list of all available alerts and their default priorities. The priority of Alerts 620 to 638 can be switched between Caution and Warning on the [Chart Alert] page (see paragraph 11.1.2). No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 20-8 Text Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering LCD Unit Lifetime Over High Temperature Inside Monitor Fan1 No Rotation Fan2 No Rotation Fan3 No Rotation Fan4 No Rotation RS485 Communication Timeout No Signal Sentence Syntax Error Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan3 Rotation Speed Lowering Fan4 Rotation Speed Lowering LCD Unit Lifetime Over High Temperature Inside Monitor Fan1 No Rotation Fan2 No Rotation Fan3 No Rotation Fan4 No Rotation RS485 Communication Timeout No Signal Caution Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution 20. ALERTS No. 026 027 028 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 082 083 084 086 087 088 089 090 094 095 096 097 098 099 150 151 170 171 172 175 176 235 236 237 Text Sentence Syntax Error Main Monitor COM Timeout Sub Monitor COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 1 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 2 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 3 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 4 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 5 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 6 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 7 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 8 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 9 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 10 COM Timeout RCU 1 COM Timeout RCU 2 COM Timeout RCU 3 COM Timeout EC-3000 CPU Temp High EC-3000 GPU Temp High EC-3000 CPU Board Temp High EC-3000 Remote 1 Temp High EC-3000 Remote 2 Temp High EC-3000 CPU Fan Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 Fan1 Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 Fan2 Rotation Speed Lowering EC-3000 CPU Fan No Rotation EC-3000 Fan1 Fan No Rotation EC-3000 Fan2 Fan No Rotation EC-3000 CPUboard 5V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard 3.3V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard 12V Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard Battery Power Error EC-3000 CPUboard Core Power Error Sensor Adapter 11 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 12 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 13 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 14 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 15 COM Timeout Sensor Adapter 16 COM Timeout Early Course Change Indication Actual Course Change Indication Positioning System Failure Crossing Safety Contour Off Track Alarm Different Geodetic Datum System Malfunction Echo Sounder 1 COM Error Echo Sounder 2 COM Error Echo Sounder 3 COM Error Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Alarm Alarm Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution 20-9 20. ALERTS No. 255 256 257 258 259 260 272 273 274 275 277 278 279 280 281 282 284 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 360 361 362 370 20-10 Text Gyro 1 COM Error Gyro 2 COM Error Gyro 3 COM Error Gyro 4 COM Error Gyro 5 COM Error Backup Navigator UTC Time Not Available Depth(Bow) Not Available Depth(Midship) Not Available Depth(Stern) Not Available Wind Speed/Direction Not Available STW Not Available COG/SOG Not Available SDME 1 COM Error SDME 2 COM Error SDME 3 COM Error SOG Not Available EPFS 1 COM Error EPFS 2 COM Error EPFS 3 COM Error EPFS 4 COM Error EPFS 5 COM Error EPFS 6 COM Error EPFS 7 COM Error EPFS 8 COM Error EPFS 9 COM Error Other Sensor 1 COM Error Other Sensor 2 COM Error Other Sensor 3 COM Error Other Sensor 4 COM Error Other Sensor 5 COM Error Other Sensor 6 COM Error Other Sensor 7 COM Error Other Sensor 8 COM Error Other Sensor 9 COM Error Other Sensor 10 COM Error EC-3000 Ch.01 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.02 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.03 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.04 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.05 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.06 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.07 COM Timeout EC-3000 Ch.08 COM Timeout Wind Sensor 1 COM Error Wind Sensor 2 COM Error Wind Sensor 3 COM Error Water Current COM Error Default priority Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Alarm Warning Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Warning Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution 20. ALERTS No. 371 380 390 400 401 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 450 451 453 469 470 472 473 474 475 485 495 500 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 Text Water Temp COM Error AIS COM Error NAVTEX COM Error Network Printer Not Available Local Printer Not Available Other Sensor 11 COM Error Other Sensor 12 COM Error Other Sensor 13 COM Error Other Sensor 14 COM Error Other Sensor 15 COM Error Other Sensor 16 COM Error Other Sensor 17 COM Error Other Sensor 18 COM Error Other Sensor 19 COM Error Other Sensor 20 COM Error Other Sensor 21 COM Error Other Sensor 22 COM Error Other Sensor 23 COM Error Other Sensor 24 COM Error Other Sensor 25 COM Error Other Sensor 26 COM Error Other Sensor 27 COM Error Other Sensor 28 COM Error Other Sensor 29 COM Error Other Sensor 30 COM Error Heading Sensor Not Available Gyro CORR. Source Change SDME Sensor Not Available WGS84 Not Used Datum Change Position Source Change Heading Source Change COG/SOG Source Change CTW/STW Source Change Depth Limit Anchor Watch Error Watch Alert TT System Error TT New Target TT Auto ACQ 95% TT Auto ACQ 100% TT MAN ACQ 95% TT MAN ACQ 100% TT CPA/TCPA TT Lost REF Target Lost AIS New Target AIS Target Display 95% Default priority Caution Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Caution Warning Warning Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Alarm Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Warning Caution Warning Alarm Warning Warning Warning Caution 20-11 20. ALERTS No. 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 539 541 542 543 550 560 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 640 689 690 691 692 693 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 730 20-12 Text AIS Target Display 100% AIS Target Capacity 95% AIS Target Capacity 100% AIS Target Activate 95% AIS Target Activate 100% AIS CPA/TCPA AIS Lost AIS Message Received AIS Message Transmit Error AIS Transmitting No CPA/TCPA for AIS Active AIS-SART/MOB/EPIRB Association User Chart Danger Area Traffic Separation Zone Inshore Traffic Zone Restricted Area Caution Area Offshore Production Area Military Practice Area Seaplane Landing Area Submarine Transit Lane Anchorage Area Marine Farm / Aquaculture PSSA Area Areas to be Avoided Buoy UKC Limit Non-official ENC No Vector Chart Not Up-to-date Permit Expired Chartalign: Over 30 min Drift Comp Error TC Start Timeout RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE RM Stop - No Valid Sensor Data RM Stop - Other Causes No ANT Heading Signal No ANT Azimuth Signal No ANT Trigger Signal No ANT Video Signal No RPU Gyro Signal No ANT Echo Signal RF Unit COM Error Radar Sensor COM Error Radar Sensor SW Version Error EXT Radar STBY Default priority Warning Caution Warning Caution Warning Alarm Warning Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Warning Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution 20. ALERTS No. 740 750 760 770 771 772 773 774 820 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 871 872 873 874 875 881 882 883 891 900 901 902 903 904 950 Text EXT Radar No Signal EXT Radar COM Error Datum Mismatch SPU Error MTR-DRV Error PM Error RF-Converter Error PSU-Control Error NAVTEX Message Received EPFS 1 Sensor Banned EPFS 2 Sensor Banned EPFS 3 Sensor Banned EPFS 4 Sensor Banned EPFS 5 Sensor Banned EPFS 6 Sensor Banned EPFS 7 Sensor Banned EPFS 8 Sensor Banned EPFS 9 Sensor Banned EPFS 10 Sensor Banned SDME 1 Sensor Banned SDME 2 Sensor Banned SDME 3 Sensor Banned Gyro 1 Sensor Banned Gyro 2 Sensor Banned Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Gyro 4 Sensor Banned Gyro 5 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 1 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 2 Sensor Banned ROT Gyro 3 Sensor Banned Water Current Sensor Banned No Filter Source of Position No Filter Source of COG/SOG No Filter Source of CTW/STW No Filter Source of Heading No Filter Source of ROT HBT Timeout Default priority Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Caution Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Caution 20-13 20. ALERTS This page is intentionally left blank. 20-14 21. PARAMETERS 21.1 Ship and Route Parameters The purpose of the ship and route parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship. These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system. They must be maintained carefully. Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters' importance. Open the menu and select [Ship & Route Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the [Ship & Route] page. Set each item referring to the description below. Ship parameters description [MAX Speed]: Maximum speed the ship can do. [MAX Height]: Max. height of ship above sea level. [MAX Draught]: Max. draught of ship. Route parameters description [MAX R.O.T]*: The maximum rate of turn of the ship. Set at installation. [WPT Approach]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point. [WPT Prewarning]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point. [Default Line Radius]: Define the default value of radius between waypoints during automatic route steering. [Default CH Limit]: Define the default value of channel limit. [Default Safety Margin]: Define the default value of extension for channel limits to be checked against selected alerts. * Set at installation and cannot be changed by the operator. 21-1 21. PARAMETERS 21.2 Instant Track Parameters The instant track feature can create, in route monitoring, a simple route in the following situations: • Return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits. • Temporarily deviate from the monitored route (avoid collision, etc.). How to set instant track parameters Set the parameters for the instant track ([MENU] → [General] → [Ship & Route Parameters] → [Instant Track] tab). [Delay before Initiating First Turn]: Set the number of seconds (30 - 600 seconds) to wait before initiating the first turn in the simple route. [Turn Radius]: Set the turning radius (0.02 - 3.00 NM) to use between waypoints (four waypoints) in the simple route. [Channel Limit for Track Control]: Set the channel limit (10 - 1852 m) for the instant track, automatically or manually. The [Auto] setting uses the channel limit set for the monitored route. 21-2 21. PARAMETERS Cost Parameters The cost parameters are used in the optimization calculation. Therefore define these parameters before doing the calculation. Open the menu and select [Cost Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the [Cost Parameters] page. Set each item according to ship’s plan, etc. At the [Cost] window, enter the cost/hour and cost/ton for heavy fuel oil and diesel oil. At the [Fuel Consumption] window, define the fuel consumption figures for up to 12 different speeds. Before entering the data, plot the data on a graph, like the one shown below. Use a second graph if, for example, diesel oil consumption is different from that of heavy fuel oil. Reset the power to effect the settings. FUEL CONSUMPTION 7 6 5 4 TON/h 21.3 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 SHIP’S SPEED (kn) 21-3 21. PARAMETERS This page is intentionally left blank. 21-4 22. SETTINGS MENU The [Settings] menu provides file import, export and maintenance, testing facilities (display, keyboard, self test), customizing, screenshot processing, and CCRP selection. 22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu 1 3 Radar Installation 2 No. Name 1 Description Click the button then select [Settings] to open the [Settings] menu. The message shown below appears. Click the [OK] button to open the [Settings] menu. ([Settings] menu access button) 2 [Settings] menu display area The [Settings] menus appear here. 3 Page selection buttons To open a page, use the page selection buttons to select a page then click the tab of the page required. The color of the border of the page selected is light blue. 22-1 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.2 File Export The [File Export] page lets you export setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps and radar installation to a USB flash memory, in .zip file format. 1 2 3 4 Radar Installation 5 No. Name Description 1 [Setting data] Check to export setting data (radar, chart, conning, common, performance monitor data) and ten user profile data. 2 [Route/User chart] Check to export all routes and user charts. 3 [Radar map] Check to export all radar maps. 4 [Radar Installation] Check to export all setting of radar installation. 5 [Export] button Click the button to open the [SAVE FILE] dialog box. Select the destination to save then click the [Save] button to export all selected objects. Note 1: Item 5 does not appear until a object is selected. Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the exporting. The message "File export finished." appears upon completion of the exporting. Click the [OK] button. 22-2 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.3 File Import The [File Import] page lets you import setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps and radar installation from an external media (USB flash memory, etc.). 1 2 Radar Installation 3 No. 1 2 3 Name [Select file to import] button [Select data to import] Description Click to show the [OPEN FILE] dialog box, where you can select the file to import. Check the data to import, among [Setting data], [Route/User chart] and [Radar map]. Note 1: Execute [User Default] (see section 22.11) before importing [Setting data]. Note 2: [Radar Installation] is available only with the service mode. [Import] button Click to import the objects selected. The following message appears on the display. Note 1: The system automatically restarts if setting data is imported. Note 2: If importing could not be completed, first check if the USB flash memory is properly inserted. If inserted properly, try importing again. Note 3: Items 2 and 3 do not appear until a file is selected. Note 4: The message "Now processing" appears during the importing. The message "File import finished." appears upon completion of the importing. Click the [OK] button. 22-3 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.4 File Maintenance The [File Maintenance] page lets you restore the last-saved route/user chart application and route/user chart system. 1 2 3 No. Name Description 1 [Route/Userchart Application Backup] Click to restore last-saved route/userchart application. 2 [Route/Userchart System Backup] Click to restore last-saved route/userchart system. 3 [Restore] button Click to restore item selected. Note: To back up route data, first check for the chart radar with the most recent route list then do the restore from that chart radar. 22-4 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.5 Self Test The [Self Test] page is mainly for use by the service technician to check the equipment. The chart radar is inoperative during the test. 1 [EC-3000] RADAR Software Version: 0359266-02.xx [Radar Sensor] SPU Software Version: 0359281-01.xx [key1] Software Version: 2450086-01.xx [Dongle Information] Function: ecdis,radar ENC User Permit: ERROR ARCS User Permit: ERROR ARCS PIN: ERROR 3 2 No. Name Description 1 Test results, program numbers The results of the self test and the program numbers. (xx=version number) 2 [Start] button Start the self test. 3 [Stop] button Stop the self test. (Shown during test.) 22-5 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.6 Data Sharing The [Data Sharing] page selects the items to share between the radar and the chart radar. 1 NAV Tools VRM EBL PI Line 2 Display Settings Color Palette Display Brilliance No. 22-6 Name Description 1 [NAV Tools] Check the NAV tools items to share them between the chart and the radar. 2 [Display Settings] Check the display setting items to share between the chart and the radar. 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.7 Customize The [Customize] page lets you set buzzer volume, key beep volume, and scrollwheel rotation direction. 1 2 3 No. Name Description 1 [Wheel rotation] Set the direction of scrollwheel rotation direction. [Normal]: Downward to increase value, upward to decrease value. [Reverse]: Reverse of [Normal]. 2 [Key beep volume] Set the loudness of the key beep that sounds for correct key or mouse button operation. 0: No beep, 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH 3 [Alert sound volume] Set the loudness of the alert buzzer. 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH 22-7 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.8 Display Test The [DIsplay Test] page displays various test patterns to check the FURUNO-supplied monitor for proper display of colors. Click the [Display Test] button to start the test. The buzzer sounds when the display test starts. Left-click to proceed in the numerical order shown below; right-click to proceed in reverse order. (1) (2) (3) (4) Diagonal Gray and black All colors Black (5) (6) (7) (8) White Red Green Blue (9) (10) (11) (12) Gray Red bars Green bars Blue bars (13) (14) (15) (16) Yellow bars Aqua bars Purple bars Gray bars To quit the display test at any time, press the ESC key on the applicable Control Unit. 22-8 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.9 Keyboard Test The [Keyboard Test] page checks the controls and keys on the Radar Control Unit and the ECDIS Control Unit and the trackball module on the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit. 1 6 5 2 7 8 3 4 No. Name 5 Description 1 Common controls Operate the corresponding controls on the Radar Control Unit and chart radar Control Unit. Rotate a control and the window above the control shows the setting value. Push a control and the corresponding location on screen lights in light blue. (The EBL and VRM controls do not have a push function.) 2 InstantAccess knob/key Check the InstantAccess knob and key. 1) Rotate the knob and the setting value appears in the window. 2) Push the knob and the knob lights in light blue. 3) Push the key and the key lights in blue. 3 Keys of the Radar Control Unit Operate each key. The key pressed lights in light blue. 4 Keyboard of the chart radar Control Unit Operate each key. The key pressed lights in light blue. 22-9 22. SETTINGS MENU No. 22-10 Name Description 5 Keys of both the Radar Con- Operate each key. The pressed key lights in trol Unit and chart radar light blue. Control Unit 6 Trackball module Check the trackball module of a Control Unit: 1) Spin the scrollwheel and rotate the trackball. The indication above the operated control shows the setting value. 2) Push each button. The window above a pushed button lights in light blue. 3) Push the scrollwheel. The window above the wheel lights in light blue. 7 [Buzzer ON] button Click the [Buzzer ON] button to sound the buzzer. The buzzer sounds and the button flashes (in red). Click the button again to cancel. 8 [Contact Output] button Click the [Contact Output] button to output the System Failure contact signal from the Processor Unit. Click the button again to cancel. 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.10 Screenshots The [Screenshot] page handles the exporting (to a USB flash memory) and deleting of screenshots from the SSD. 1 2 3 Delete Export 4 5 No. 6 Name 7 Description 1 List List of screenshots taken. Screenshots are automatically assigned a file name consisting of the time and date the screenshot was taken. 2 Check boxes Put a checkmark in the box of the screenshot to process. 3 [Preview] Preview of the screenshot selected. 4 [Delete] button Delete the screenshot(s) selected. 5 [Export] button Export selected screenshot(s) to a USB flash memory. 6 [Apply] button Save comment. 7 [Comment] box Enter comment for screenshot. Put a check in appropriate checkbox then enter comment. 22-11 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.10.1 How to export screenshots You can export screenshots to a USB flash memory as follows: 1. Insert a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit. 2. Open the [Screenshot] page. 3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to export. 4. Click the [Export] button. SAVE FILE USB Flash 04.04.2012 19:23 5. Select the USB flash memory. 6. Click the [OK] button to export the screenshots selected. 7. If the exporting was successful, a window showing the number of files exported appears. Click the [OK] button to finish. 22.10.2 How to delete screenshots 1. Select the [Screenshot] page. 2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to delete. To select all screenshots, right-click the box to the left of the [Date] column then select [Select all]. To clear all check marks, select [Clear all]. 3. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message "Attention: Selected files will be deleted. Do you wish to continue?" appears. 4. Click the [Yes] button to delete the screenshots selected. The message "File deletion succeeded" appears. 5. Click the [OK] button. 22-12 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.11 User Default The [User Default] page restores all default settings for [Radar menu], [Chart menu], [User profile] and [Setting menu]. Click the [Restore User Setting] button. The message "All setting data will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears. Click the [Yes] button to restore default settings and reset the power. If you require the setting data, copy it to a USB flash memory (using the file export feature), BEFORE restoring user defaults. 22-13 22. SETTINGS MENU 22.12 CCRP The [CCRP] page provides for selection of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) and shows the location of various sensors. 1 3 2 No. 22-14 Name Description 1 [CCRP] Select the CCRP to use in the case of multiple CCRPs. 2 [Display Filter] Check the items to show on the ship’s graphic. 3 Ship’s graphic Shows the location of the sensors selected at the [Display Filter]. 23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM 23.1 Installation of the System Special attention of following topics is required to maintain the "Common Reference System." The origin of the common reference system is the conning position on vessel. • The values of the center and conning positions depend on the size and geometry of the ship. • Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of position sensors depend on the location of the antennas of the position sensor. • Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of the radars depend on the location of the radar antennas. 23.2 Accuracy of the System Accuracy depends on the following conditions: z Gyro error referenced to chart orientation z Accuracy of EPFS z Accuracy of radar performance and display (see the specifications at the back of this manual). z Accuracy of setting of CCRP (see section 2.33) The following items must be properly adjusted to meet the above conditions: z Timing (Tx timing of radar echo). The procedure for adjustment is shown in "Timing Adjust" in the Installation Manual. z Heading (Adjustment of radar echo heading). The procedure for adjustment is shown in "Heading Alignment" in the Installation Manual. z Radar ANT position (Center of radar image is the radar antenna position). Radar antenna position is input in the [Common Installation Setting] menu. z Conning position: • The chart radar uses position data fed from a GPS navigator to calculate the latitude and longitude position of the conning position. • GPS antenna position and conning position are entered in the [Common Installation Setting] menu to calculate offset. • The latitude and longitude position displayed at the top-right position on the screen is the latitude and longitude position of the conning position. • The chart datum used by the chart radar is recorded in geodetic datum WGS-84; therefore, the geodetic datum setting on the GPS navigator must be WGS-84. z Gyro data: • Serial format gyro data is fed directly from a gyrocompass, thus adjustment of the heading indication on the chart radar is not necessary. 23-1 23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM • If synchro or stepper gyro data is fed to the chart radar, the heading indication on the chart radar must be adjusted to match that of the gyro. For the adjustment procedure, see section 1.15. z Speed data: • Speed may be input from SDME or GPS. • SDME may be single-axis water speed or dual-axis ground speed. • GPS may be used to input COG/SOG. • Ground speed may also be taken from TT reference target. • Speed is entered from the [Setting] menu. For details, see section 1.14. 23-2 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the troubleshooting procedures, do not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no userserviceable parts inside. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician. WARNING Do not open the equipment. Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment. NOTICE Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or contact spray to coating or plastic parts of the equipment. Those items contain organic solvents that can damage coating and plastic parts, especially plastic connectors. Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit. Post a warning sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced. Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna. A transmitting radar antenna emits electromagnetic waves, which can be harmful, particularly the eyes. Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit. Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast. 24-1 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.1 Maintenance Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below. Maintenance schedule Interval When needed 5 years 24-2 Check point FURUNO-supplied monitor unit and Processor Unit Check and measures Dust or dirt may be removed from a cabinet with a soft cloth. Water-diluted mild detergent may be used if desired. DO NOT use chemical cleaners to clean the display unit; they may remove paint and markings. To clean the LCD, wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning. Also, do not use a degreaser or an antifog solution, as they can strip the coating from the LCD. Filter inside Proces- Have a technician clean the sor Unit filter if it is dusty. See section 24.4. Antenna Unit If the grease dries out the V ring may break, allowing water to leak inside the antenna unit. Remarks Do not use chemical-based cleaners for cleaning. They can remove paint and markings. Have a qualified technician apply the grease oil to the antenna rotary. 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Interval 3 to 6 months 6 months to 1 year 24.2 Check point Cabling Check and measures Check that all cabling is firmly connected and is not damaged. Exposed bolts and Exposed bolts and nuts are nuts of antenna unit subject to corrosion. Further, they may loosen by vibration. Radiator Dust, dirt and salt deposits on the radiator cause signal attenuation, resulting in loss of sensitivity. Wipe radiator with a freshwater-moistened cloth. Terminals, connectors Check that all terminals and connectors on circuit boards are securely fastened. Check that all screws are tightly fastened. Screws on terminal boards in Processor Units Remarks Check that bolts and nuts are not corroded and are securely fastened. If corroded, clean and coat with anticorrosive sealant. The radiator is made of fiberglass reinforced plastic. Therefore, do not used gasoline, benzene and the like to clean the radiator. If the radiator is iced, use a wooden or plastic headed hammer to remove the ice. DO NOT use a steel hammer. Have a qualified technician check terminals and connectors. Have a qualified technician check screws. How to Replace the Fuses The fuse in the Power Supply Unit, Processor Unit, monitor unit and sensor adapter protects those units from overvoltage (overcurrent) and internal fault. If a unit cannot be turned on, check if its fuse has blown. If the fuse has blown, find out the cause before replacing the fuse. If the fuse blows again after replacement, contact your dealer for advice. WARNING Use the proper fuse. Use of a wrong fuse can damage the equipment or cause fire. Unit Power Supply Unit PSU-014 Power Supply Unit PSU-015 Power supply 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Power Supply Unit PSU-016 Power Supply Unit PSU-018 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC Monitor Unit MU-190 Monitor Unit MU-231 Processor Unit EC-3000 100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC 100-115 VAC 220-230 VAC 24 VDC Sensor Adapter MC-3000S Type F1: FGBO 250V 7A PBF F1: FGBO 250V 3A PBF F2: FGBO 250V 7A PBF F1: FGBO 250V 5A PBF F1: FGBO 250V 3A PBF F2: FGBO 250V 7A PBF FGBO 250V 1A PBF FGBO 250V 1.5A PBF FGMB 125V 10A PBF FGMB 250V 5A PBF FGMB 125V 3A PBF Code no. 000-178-084-10 000-155-841-10 000-178-084-10 000-155-840-10 000-155-841-10 000-178-084-10 000-155-828-10 000-155-833-10 000-157-470-10 000-157-570-10 000-157-481-10 24-3 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.3 Trackball Maintenance If the cursor moves abnormally, dust or dirt may be on the trackball. Clean the trackball as shown below. 1. Turn the retaining ring on the trackball module counterclockwise 45° to unlock it. Retaining ring 2. Remove the retaining ring and ball. 3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth. Blow carefully into the ball-cage to dislodge dust and lint. 4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol. 5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers. 6. Re-set the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted reversely. 24.4 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit Have a qualified technician clean the air inlet filter in the Processor Unit when it becomes dusty. Remove the filter and clean it with water and a mild detergent. Rinse the filter, allow it filter to dry then return it to the Processor Unit. Air inlet Filter Processor unit, left side Note 1: Be sure the air inlet is not blocked. A blocked inlet can cause the temperature to rise inside the cabinet, which can lead to malfunction. Note 2: The right side of the Processor Unit has an exhaust vent. Remove dust from the vent as necessary. 24-4 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.5 Troubleshooting The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which to restore normal operation. Radar troubleshooting If… the radar echoes disappear and the alert 727 "Radar Sensor COM Error" appears the alert 750 "EXT Radar COM Error" appears the equipment cannot be turned on the equipment can be turned on but nothing appears on the display key doesn't beep when operated picture not updated or picture freezes. picture does not change even though range is changed. then… check the connection between the EC-3000 and radar sensor. • check the connection between the EC-3000 of this equipment and the EC-3000 in the LAN line. • check the connection between the EC-3000 and radar sensor in the LAN line. • power connector may have loosened. • ship's mains is off. • fuse has blown. • brilliance is too low. • the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F). • key beep is turned off. • If the picture freezes, the buzzer sounds and the Status LED blinks in red. • suspect faulty the RANGE key or video freeze. only two index lines are displayed • range rings are not displayed tracked target is not tracked correctly • • sensitivity is poor • Remedy Reconnect the cable (if loosened) then restart the equipment. Reconnect the cable (if loosened) then restart the equipment. • Check connector. • • • • Check ship's mains. Replace fuse. Adjust brilliance. The heater is warming the EC-3000. The display appears in approx. 10 minutes. • Turn on key beep from the menu. • Restart the equipment. • Hit the RANGE key several times. If nothing happens, restart the equipment. check index line distance set- • Refer to section 2.23.2 for ting. how to adjust index line distance. range rings are hid. • Turn on the range rings. sea clutter etc. are masking • Adjust A/C SEA and A/C tracked target. RAIN to suppress sea and rain clutters. suspect second-trace echo • Reject second-trace echo; or soiled radiator. clean radiator. 24-5 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Chart troubleshooting If… the message "No connection to dongle" appears the message "There is no dongle or an error has occurred in the dongle. The system will automatically shut down." appears monitored route is not displayed planned route is not displayed route monitoring is stopped symbol of user chart cannot be erased position cannot be found S57 chart cannot be displayed past track is not displayed monitored user chart is not displayed on chart display user chart is not displayed on radar display the message "Nearing memory usage limit. Click the Restart button to restart the system to prevent trouble." appears 24-6 then… • dongle is not connected to USB port. Remedy • Connect dongle. • dongle is not connected. • data in the dongle is corrupted. • Connect dongle. • Contact FURUNO for assistance. • route has not been selected. • monitor route has not been selected to be visible above the chart. • route has not been selected. • planned route has not been selected to be visible above the chart. • Alert 691: RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE. Own ship is too far away from the route. • Alert 692: RM Stop - No Valid Sensor Data. Chart radar internal error. • Alert 693: RM Stop - Other Causes. Required data (position, SOG/COG) not found. • two or more symbols may be superimposed on each other. • position sensor(s) is not selected on the [POSN] page. • position sensor is turned off. • sensor cable has loosened. • No ENC chart for area. • Select route to monitor. • Open the [Route] page of the [Symbol Display] menu and check the monitored route parts to show. • Select route as “planned”. • Open [Route] page of [Symbol Display] menu and check the planned route parts to show. • Steer the ship back to the route then restart route monitoring. • • • • • • Request service. • Check sensor connections. • Do the delete action several times. • Check position sensor selections. • Turn on position sensor. • Check cable. • Open S57 chart from [Manage Charts] dialog box • Connect dongle. Dongle not connected. past track is not selected to be • Open [Tracking] page of [Symbol visible. Display] menu and select [Own Ship Past Tracks] to [Primary] or [Secondary] as appropriate. user chart is not selected to be • Open [Mariner] page of [Symbol visible. Display] menu and select parts to show. user chart is not selected in • Select user chart in Voyage naviVoyage navigation mode. gation mode. the memory usage limit for soft- If you need to save your work, click the [Later] button then restart the ware is close to capacity. Perequipment. If you don't need to save formance may be affected. your work, click the [Restart] button. 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING If… the message "Memory usage limit reached. Click the Restart button to restart the system to prevent trouble." appears both the operating mode buttons [RADAR] and [CHART for RADAR] are yellow 24.6 then… Remedy • the memory usage limit for soft- Click the [Restart] button to reset the power. No other operations are availware is reached. Performance able than restart. may be affected. • the memory usage limit for soft- Stop all operations and restart the equipment. ware is close to capacity. Performance may be affected. Consumable Parts The table below lists the consumable parts in the antenna unit, Monitor Units, Processor Unit and Sensor Adapters. Replace the parts before their expected expirations. Consumable parts Part Type Lifetime Remarks Antenna Unit Magnetron Motor FNE1201 5,000 hours MG5436 5,000 hours MG5223F 7,000 hours VGLC22-15N400L4 (S) 10,000 hours VGLC18-10N200L4 (X) 10,000 hours Check number of hours used at TX time. Reset time then adjust the PM gain after replacement (see section 2.32). Monitor Unit BEZEL (19) & MU-190 LCD ASSEMBLY 50,000 hours BEZEL (23) & MU-231 LCD ASSEMBLY 50,000 hours Processor Unit EC-3000 CPU Fan 109R0612G429 8.5 years Power Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years Chassis Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years Sensor Adapter MC-3000S MC-CS Board 24P0114 8.5 years Sensor Adapter MC-3010A MC-ANLG Board 24P0115 7.0 years The expected lifetimes are typical values. Actual lifetime depends on usage and ambient temperature. 24-7 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts The color differentiation checks if the chart radar monitor can distinguish between the various color-coded areas, lines and symbols. 1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar to show the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu. 2. Click [Color diagram] to show the color test diagram. If the colors are correct, the diagonal line will be distinguishable from its surroundings, at any brilliance setting. 24-8 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 24.8 Fallback Arrangements If the top priority sensor (e.g. GPS1) can not be used, this equipment automatically uses the second priority sensor (e.g. GPS2) when the multiple sensors (e.g. GPS1 and GPS2) are installed. When all sensors can not be used, each function is limited as follows: Sensor Heading sensor Speed sensor COG/SOG sensor Position sensor Operation of this equipment • The HDG indication reads "***.*°". • The orientation mode is automatically set for head-up. • TT, AIS, radar map, chart and echo averaging (EAV) are disabled. When LOG(WT) is selected: • The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: GPS(BT) > LOG(BT). • The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and LOG(BT) can not be used. When LOG(BT) is selected: • The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: GPS(BT) > LOG(WT). • The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and LOG(WT) can not be used. When GPS(BT) is selected: • The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: LOG(BT) > LOG(WT). • The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both LOG(BT) and LOG(WT) can not be used. • When the GPS sensor can not be used, the values of COG and SOG are calculated from HDG and LOG(BT). • Additionally when the heading sensor can not be used, the values of SOG is calculated from LOG(BT). The COG indication reads "***.*°". • The POSN indication reads all asterisks. • AIS, radar map and chart are disabled. 24-9 24. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING This page is intentionally left blank. 24-10 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE Radar menu MENU key (press) or MENU bar (click) 1 ECHO 1 CUSTOMIZE ECHO 1 INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3) 2 ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2, 3) 3 ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3) 4 NOISE REJECT (OFF, ON) 5 AUTO SEA (OFF, ON) 6 AUTO RAIN (OFF, ON) 7 VIDEO CONTRAST (1, 2, 3, 4; A, B, C) 8 PULSE 1 0.5 NM (S1, S2) 2 0.75 NM (S1, S2, M1) 3 1.5 NM (S1, S2, M1, M2) 4 3 NM (S2, M1, M2, M3) 5 6 NM (M1, M2, M3, L) 6 12 NM (M1, M2, M3, L) 7 24 NM (M2, M3, L) 1 STC ANT HEIGHT (5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 9 CONDITION 30, 35, 40, 45, more 45 m) 2 LOW LEVEL ECHO (0 to 8, 0) 0 DEFAULT (NO, SAVE, USER, FACTORY) Page 2 1 ACE (OFF, ON) 2 ECHO AREA* (CIRCLE, WIDE) 3 ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, WHT, AMBER*, COLOR*) 4 TRAIL 1 TRAIL MODE (REL, TRUE) 2 TRAIL GRAD (SINGLE, MULTI) *: Not available with IMO or 3 TRAIL COLOR* (GRN, BLU, CYA, PNK, A type. MAG, WHT, YEL) The item numbers enclosed 4 TRAIL LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4) in dashed rectangles are 5 OS TRAIL (OFF, ON) renumbered. 6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS (OFF, ON) 5 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON) 6 PERFORMANCE MON (OFF, ON, GRAPH ONLY) ARC (0, 2, 3, 5, 6) 7 SART (OFF, ON) 8 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2) 9 DUAL RADAR* (OFF, COMBINE) 0 ACE 1 ADJUST (OFF, ON) 2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT (1 to 3, 2) 3 SUPPRESS SECTOR START (000 to 359, 0°) ANGLE (000 to 180, 0°) 2 TT•AIS 1 ACQUISITION ZONE 2 TRIAL MANEUVER 3 TT 1 2 (Continued on next page) 1 AZ STAB (STAB HDG, STAB NORTH) 2 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH) 1 TRIAL MANEUVER (STATIC, DYNAMIC) 2 SPEED RATE 3 TURN RATE 4 TGT DATA* (ACTUAL, TRIAL) 1 TT SELECT When [NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX]: (MANUAL 200, AUTO 50, AUTO 100, AUTO 150, AUTO 200), When [NUMBER OF TT] is [100]: (MANUAL 100, AUTO 25, AUTO 50, AUTO 75, AUTO 100) 2 ALL CANCEL (NO, YES) 3 LOST FILTER MAX RNG (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM)) AP-1 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Continued from previous page) 2 1 4 AIS 5 TT•AIS SYMBOL *1: Not available with IMO type. 6 ASSOCIATION 3 NAV TOOL 1 PI LINE 2 EBL•VRM*3 *2: Not available with IMO or A type. *3: EBL•VRM•CURSOR on IMO and A types. EBL•CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE) additionallly shown on those types. 3 CURSOR 4 OWN SHIP VECTOR *4: WHT is replaced with RED with A and B types. 5 TARGET VECTOR 6 RANGE RING*2 (OFF, ON) 7 BARGE 1 (Continued on next page) AP-2 1 VOYAGE DATA (NAV STATUS, ETA, DESTINATION, DRAUGHT, CREW) 2 STATIC DATA 3 SLEEP ALL TGTS (NO, YES) 4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE 1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 0 NM)) 2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON (0 to 9.9, 1.0 kn)) 3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON) 5 DISP FILTER 1 SLEEPING CLASS A (OFF, ON) 2 SLEEPING CLASS B (OFF, ON) 3 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM)) 4 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON (0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)) 6 LOST FILTER 1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99, 12 NM)) 2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON (0 to 9.9, 1.0 kn)) 3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON) 7 RECEIVED MESSAGES 8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE 1 ADDRESS TYPE (ADDRESSED, BROADCAST) 2 MESSAGE TYPE (SAFETY, BINARY) 3 MMSI No. 4 CHANNEL (A, B, A or B, A and B) Page 2 1 OPEN FILE 2 SAVE FILE 3 EDIT 4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE Page 2 1 AUTO DISP MESSAGE (OFF, ON) 1 SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT, YEL*1) 2 ATON SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT) 3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (0.0 to 720.0, 0.0°/min) 4 TT POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON) 5 AIS POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON) 6 TT PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10) 7 AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10) Page 2 1 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON) 2 AIS BASE STATION (OFF, ON) 3 AIS PHYSICAL ATON (OFF, ON) 4 AIS VIRTUAL ATON (OFF, ON) 1 ASSOCIATION TGT (OFF, AIS, TT) 2 GAP (0.000 to 0.999, 0.050 NM) 3 RANGE (0.000 to 0.999, 0.100 NM) 4 BEARING (00.00 to 99.9, 9.9°) 5 SPEED (0.0 to 9.9, 6.0 kn) 6 COURSE (00.0 to 99.9, 25.0°) 1 PI LINE BEARING (REL, TRUE) 2 SET ALL PI LINE (OFF, 1, 2, 3, 6) 3 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL, PERPENDICULAR) 4 RESET PI LINE 5 RESET ALL PI LINE 6 TRUNCATE PI 1 (to 6) TRUNCATE (OFF, ON) 1 EBL1*2 (REL, TRUE) 2 EBL2*2 (REL, TRUE) 3 VRM1*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd) 4 VRM2*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd) 5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH) 6 VRM TTG (OFF, 1, 2, 1 and 2) 7 VRM OFFSET (OFF, LINK EBL) 1 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE) 2 CURSOR RANGE (NM, SM, km, kyd) 3 CURSOR SIZE (SMALL, LARGE) 1 VECTOR STAB IND (OFF, ON) 2 TIME INCREMENTS (OFF, ON) 3 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE) 4 VECTOR COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT*4) 1 REF TARGET VECTOR (OFF, ON) 1 BARGE MARK (OFF, ON) 2 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH) 3 ARRANGEMENT APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE 1 (Continued from previous page) 4 INFORMATION BOX 1 DISP INFO BOX (OFF, ON) 2 SET NAV DATA 3 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, TT TRACK) 4 TARGET DATA (1 BOX, 2 BOX, 3 BOX#) #: 23-inch monitor 5 MAP•MARK 1 MARK SETTING *1: Not available with IMO or A type. The item numbers enclosed in dashed rectangle are renumbered. 2 RADAR MAP 3 ROUTE 4 EVENT 5 USER CHART 6 CHART DISPLAY 1 OWN TRACK 2 SEL DISPLAY OBJECT *2: Not available with IMO type. 1 2 1 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft) 2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, Auto) 3 DEPTH MARK 4 CURRENT (OFF, ON) 5 WIND (OFF, m/s, kn) 6 WIND STAB (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL) 7 TEMPERATURE (OFF, °C, °F) 1 MAP MARK POSN (CURSOR, OS, LL) 2 MAP MARK L/L 3 MAP MARK COLOR*1 (RED, GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, YEL, WHT) 4 OWN SHIP MARK (MIN, SCALED) 5 ANTENNA MARK (OFF, ON) 6 STERN MARK (OFF, ON) 7 DROP MARK (OFF, ON) 8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE 9 MAP MARK ALL COPY Page 2 1 MAP MARK MANAGE SEL MAP OBJECT (MARK, BUOY, DANGER, COASTLINE, CONTOUR LINE, NAV LINE, PROHIBITED AREA) 1 DISP ROUTE (OFF, ON) 2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT (CHANNEL LIMIT, SAFETY MARGIN, LEG MARKS, WHEEL OVER LINE) 1 DISP EVENT (OFF, ON) 2 SEL EVENT OBJECT (USER EVENT, AUTO EVENT, POS EVENT) 1 DISP USER CHART (OFF, ON) 2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT (LINES, LABELS, TIDALS, AREAS, CIRCLES, CLEARING LINES) 1 DISP OWN TRACK (OFF, ON) 2 OWN TRACK SOURCE (PRIMARY, SECONDARY, SYSTEM) 3 SAVE INTERNAL (30s, 1min, 2min, 3 min, 6min, 15min, DRAW ONLY) 4 DELETE OWN TRACK (NO, RED*2, GRN*2 BLU*2, YEL*2, CYA*2, MAG*2, WHT*2, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL) 5 OWN TRACK COLOR*2 (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT) 1 SAVE TO PERSONAL 2 STANDARD ITEMS (UNKNOWN OBJECT OR PRESENTATION; CHART DATA COVERAGE; LAND FEATURES; WATER AND SEABED FEATURES; TRAFFIC ROUTES; CAUTIONARY AREAS; INFORMATION AREAS; BUOYS AND BEACONS; LIGHTS; FOG SIGNALS; RADARS; SERVICES) 3 OTHER ITEMS (INFORMATION ABOUT CHART DATA; LAND FEATURES; SOUNDINGS; DEPTH CONTOUR LABELS; DEPTH CONTOURS, MAGNETICS, CURRENTS; SEABEDS, PIPELINES, OBSTRUCTIONS; OBSTRUCTIONS WITH SOUNDINGS; LOW ACCURACY; SERVICES AND SMALL CRAFT FACILITIES; SPECIAL AREAS; ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE) 4 IMPORTANT TEXT (CLEARINGS, BEARINGS RADIO CHANNELS) 5 OTHER TEXT (NAMES FOR POSITION REPORT; LIGHT DESCRIPTIONS; SEABED; GEOGRAPHIC NAMES, ETC.; SWEPT DEPTHS, MAGNETICS; BERTH AND ANCHORAGE; LAND ELEVATION) (Continued on next page) AP-3 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Continued from previous page) 2 1 3 SHALLOW CONTOUR (0 to 99, 10 m) 4 SAFETY DEPTH (0 to 99, 30 m) 5 SAFETY CONTOUR (0 to 99, 30 m) 6 DEEP CONTOUR (0 to 99, 50 m) 7 SYMBOLS (SIMPLIFIED, PAPER CHART) 8 DEPTH ZONE (2 COLOR , 4 COLOR) 9 BOUNDARIES (PLAIN, SYMBOLIZED) 0 LIGHT SECTOR (LIMITED, FULL) Page 2 1 SHALLOW PATTERN (NONE, DIAMOND) 2 CHART MONOCHROME (OFF, ON) 3 AREA COLOR (COLOR FILL, GRAY SCALE WATER, NO COLOR) 4 RESET CNT AND DEPTH 7 OWN SHIP INFO 1 SENSOR (SYSTEM, LOCAL) 2 SYSTEM SETTING (HDG, SPD, COG/SOG, POSN) 3 LOCAL SETTING (Same choices as 2 SYSTEM SETTING.) 8 INITIAL SETTING *1: Not available with solid state radar. 1 TUNE INITIALIZE*1 2 PALETTE (DAY-GRY, DAY-BLU, DUSK-GRY, DUSK-BLU, NIGHT-GRY, NIGHT-BLU) 3 BRIGHTNESS 1 CONTROL PANEL 2 CHARACTER (Default setting for all 3 CURSOR brightness items is 15.) 4 ECHO 5 TRAIL 6 HL 7 OS SYMBOL 8 RING 9 BEARING CURSOR Page 2 1 EBL 2 VRM 3 PI LINE 4 TT SYMBOL 5 AIS SYMBOL 6 MARK 7 CHART 4 ALERT 1 WATCH ALERT (OFF, 6MIN, 10MIN, 12MIN, 15MIN, 20MIN) 2 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON, 0.01 to 9.99 NM, 0.01 NM) 3 PRIMARY ALERT (TT NEW TARGET, AIS NEW TARGET, TT LOST, AIS LOST, TT AUTO ACQ 100%, TT MAN ACQ 100%, AIS TGT DISP 100%, AIS TGT CAP 100%, AIS TGT ACT 100%, TT SYSTEM ERROR, NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS, WATCH ALERT, ANCHOR WATCH ERROR) 1 DISP1 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S) 2 DISP2 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S) 3 DISP3 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S) 4 DISP4 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S) 5 STORE INTER-SW (NO, YES) 6 AUTO COURSE UP RESET (OFF, ON (22.5 to 45.0, 22.5°)) 7 TIPS GUIDANCE (OFF, ON) *2: Not available with IMO type. 8 TT SIMULATION MODE 2 1 TX TIME (000000.0 to 999999.9, 000000.0 H) 9 MAGNETRON RESET* 2 PM GAIN ADJ (AUTO, MANUAL: 000 to 255, 0) 0 ICING PREVENTION (OFF, ON) 5 ANT SELECT AP-4 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE Chart menu MENU key (press) or MENU bar (click) General Ship & Route Parameters Navigation Parameter TCS (No use) Cost Parameters Sensor System/Local Select System Sensor Settings Ship & Route MAX Speed (0.8 to 80, 22.1 kn) MAX Height (0.0 to 100, 16.1 m) MAX Draught (0.0 to 100, 20.0 m) Route Parameters MAX ROT (5 to 200, 60°/min) WPT Approach (30 to 60, 30 sec) WPT Prewarning (75 to 198, 90 sec) Default Line Radius (0.1 to 3.0, 0.8 NM) Default CH Limit (10 to 5000, 185 m) Default Safety Margin (0 to 2000, 40 m) Delay before Initiating First Turn (30 to 600, 60 sec) Instant Turn Radius (0.03 to 3.00, 1.00 NM) Track Channel Limit for Trafic Control (Auto, Manual; 10 to 1852 m) Forwarding Distance Cost (Input values for Hour, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil) Fuel Consumption (Input values for Speed, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil) Sensor Type (System Sensor, Local Sensor) HDG SPD COG/ SOG POSN Local Sensor Settings HDG SPD Other Sensor Settings 1 Ship Parameters COG/ SOG POSN Other Sensor Data Source (Sensors) Prim*1, Second*1 Stabilization Mode (Bottom, Water) Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) *1: Display only Data Source (Sensors, Manual) 1 Prim* Data Source (Sensors) Prim*1 Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Prim*1, Second*1 Data Source (Sensors, Analog Gyro (No use), Manual*2, Gyro Correction) *2: Not available Prim*1, Second*1 with IMO type. Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water) Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) Data Source (Sensors, Manual, Reference SPD, Drift) Data Source (Sensors) Data Source (Sensors, Manual) Wind Speed (kn, m/s) Reference (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL) Depth (Values for Bow, Mid and Aft) Below Trans. Temperature (Temperature of water surface) Water Current (Course and speed of water current) Filter Status (Monitor status and integrity of sensors.) (Continued on next page) AP-5 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Continued from previous page) 1 DISP Basic Setting Setting Chart Display *1: All checked *2: All unchecked Symbol Display 1 2 (Continued on next page) AP-6 Symbols (Paper Chart, Simplified) Depths (Two Color, Multi Color) Boundaries (Plain, Symbolized) Lightsectors (Limited, Full) Shallow Pattern (None, Diamond) Shallow Hazard (OFF, ON) TM Reset (20 to 99, 80%) Standard*1 (Checkbox for each of Unknown Object or Presentation; Chart Data Coverage; Standard Land Features; Water and Seabed Features; Traffic Routes; Cautionary Areas; Information Areas; Buoys and Beacons; Lights; Fog Signals; Radar; Services) Other*2 (Checkbox for each of Information about Chart Data; Other Land Features; Soundings; Depth Contour Labels; Depth Contours, Magnetics, Currents; Seabed, Pipelines and Obstructions; Obstructions with Soundings; Service and Small Craft Facilities; Low Accuracy; Special Areas; Additional Information Available; Clearance, Bearings, Radio Channels; Other Text; Names for Position Report; Light Descriptions; Seabed; Swept Depth, Magnetics; Berth and Anchorage; Geographic Names, etc.; Land Elevation) AIO*2 (Checkbox for Temporary Notice; Preliminary Notice; No Information) General Ship Outlines Ship Outlines (ON, OFF) AIS Outlines (ON, OFF) True outlines shown if (Set length and beamwidth.) > limit Own Ship Limit*3 = 3 mm *3: Display only AIS Limit*3 = 3 mm Velocity Vectors Ship Vectors (ON, OFF) Target Vectors (ON, OFF) Style (std ECDIS, Conventional) Time Increments (Checkbox unchecked) Path Predictor (Checkbox unchecked) Radar Antenna (Checkbox unchecked) Tracking CCRP (Checkbox unchecked) Own Ship Primary (Checkbox unchecked) Past Tracks Secondary (Checkbox unchecked) Style (Tick, Point) Length (1-120 min, 1) Labels (0-60 min, 0) Events User Events (Checkbox unchecked) Auto Events (Checkbox unchecked) Positions (Checkbox unchecked) Show (Newer than 12 hours, Newer than 24 hours, Newer than 1 week, Newer than 2 weeks, Newer than 1 month, Newer than 3 months, All) Monitored Channel Limit (Checkbox unchecked) Route Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked) Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked) Wheel Over Line (Checkbox unchecked) Planned Channel Limit (Checkbox unchecked) Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked) Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked) Mariner User Chart Labels (Checkbox unchecked) Lines (Checkbox unchecked) Clearing Lines (Checkbox unchecked) Tidals (Checkbox unchecked) Areas (Checkbox unchecked) Circles (Checkbox unchecked) Transparent (25%, 50%, 75%, No color fill) Targets Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown) AtoN Symbol Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown) TT Size (Standard, Small) AIS ROT TAG Limit (0.0°/min to 720.0°/min, 0.0) TT Label (ON, OFF) AIS Label (ON, OFF) TT Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF) AIS Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF) Past Position TT Points (5, 10) AIS Points (5, 10) Style (Points, Points and dots) AIS Base Station (ON, OFF) AIS Physical AtoN (ON, OFF) AIS Virtual AtoN (ON, OFF) APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE (Continued from previous page) 2 1 RECORD Chart Alert Set WARNING or CAUTION for Safety Contour, Areas To Be Avoided User Chart Danger, Traffic Separation Zone, Inshore Traffic Zone, Restricted Area, Caution Area, Offshore Production Area, Military Practice Area, Seaplane Landing Area, Submarine Transit Lane, Anchorage Area, Marine Farm / Aqua Culture, PSSA Area, UKC Limit, Non-official ENC, No Vector Chart, Not Up-to-date, Permit Expired) Shallow Contour (0-99, 10 m) Safety Depth (0-99, 20 m) Safety Contour (0-99, 30 m) Deep Contour (0-99, 60 m) NAVI Log Voyage Limits Setting.1 AIS DISP Filter Sleep All Targets AIS-CPA Auto Activate AIS Lost Target Filter TT Lost Target Filter Association Target Target Log TT/AIS Setting Speed (0 to 10, 5 kn) Course (0.0 to 30.0, 0.0°) Log Interval (1 to 100, 4 hours) Distance Counter* Odometer *: Display only Trip Meter Danger Target (Log Interval 1 to 100, 1 min) Setting.2 NAV Status NAV Tools PI Lines Sleeping Class A (ON, OFF) Sleeping Class B (ON, OFF) MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM) MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn) MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 0 NM) MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn) Except Class B (ON, OFF) MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM) MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn) Except Class B (ON, OFF) MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM) Gap (0.000 to 0.999 NM, 0.050 NM) Range (0.000 to 0.999 NM, 0.100 NM) Bearing (0.0 to 99.9°, 9.9°) Speed (0.0 to 9.9 kn, 6.0 kn) Course (0.0 to 99.9°, 25.0°) Own Ship (Shows own ship’s MMSI No., Name, Call Sign, Type, Description, Length, Width, Ref Bow, and Ref Port.) Voyage data Navigational Status (Underway using engine, At anchor, Not under command, Restricted maneuverability, Constrained by her draught, Moored, Aground, Engaged in fishing, Under way sailing, Reserved for high speed craft, Reserved for wing in ground, Reserved for future use (x3), AIS-SART (active), Not defined) Persons (0 to 8191, 0) MAX Draught (0.0 to 25.5, 0.0 m) ETA Destination Truncate Setting (Set forward and backward lengths of each PI line.) AP-7 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE Settings menu Settings (Click) File Export Select data to export (Setting data, Route/User chart, Radar map) File Import Select file to import Select data to import (Setting data, Route/User chart, Radar map) File Maintenance Restore the last-saved route/user chart application and route/user chart system Self Test (Check various components of the system.) Data Sharing Customize NAV Tools VRM (Checkbox checked) EBL (Checkbox checked) PI Line (Checkbox checked) Display settings Color Palette (Checkbox checked) Display Brilliance (Checkbox checked) Wheel rotation (Normal, Reverse) Key beep volume (0 to 3, 1) Alert sound volume (1 to 3, 3) Display Test (Display test patterns.) Keyboard Test (Test the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.) Screenshot (Manage screenshots.) User Default (Restore all user default settings.) CCRP AP-8 Select CCRP Display Filter (CCRP, Center of Gravity, Pivot Point, Radar Antenna, GPS Sensor, AIS Transponder, Echo Sounder, SDME Sensor) APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviations Abbreviation A/C ACE ACK ACQ ACT ADJ AIS ALL ALARM ANT Apr ATON Aug AUTO BB BCR BCT BLU BRG BRILL BT CANCEL Caps CAT CCRP CH COG CORRE CPA CPU CSE CU/TM CYA DATA Dec DEMO DISP DIST DR E E Meaning Anti Clutter Automatic Clutter Elimination Acknowledge Acquire Activate Adjustment Automatic Identification System All Alarm Antenna April Aid To Navigation August Automatic Blackbox Bow Cross Range Bow Cross Time Blue Bearing Brilliance Bottom Tracking Cancel Capital (letters) Category Common Consistent Reference Position Channel Course over the ground Correlation Closest Point of Approach Central Processing Unit Course Course-up/True Motion CYAN Data December Demonstration Display Distance Dead Reckoning English East AP-9 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation EAV EBL ENTER ES ESC ETA EXT Feb FILT GAIN GPS GRN GRY GYRO HDG HIDE HL IMO IND INS IR J Jan Jul Jun kyd L L/L LAN LIST LL LO MAG MAN Mar MARK MAX MENU MID min MIN MMSI MOB MODE MON NAV Navtex NM NO. AP-10 Meaning Echo Average Electronic Bearing Line Enter Echo Stretch Escape Estimated Time of Arrival External February Filter Gain Global Positioning System Green Gray Gyrocompass Heading Hide Heading Line International Maritime Organization Indication Integrated Navigation System Interference Rejection Japanese January July June kiloyard Long (pulse length) Latitude/Longitude Local Area Network List Latitude, Longitude Low Magnetic or Magenta Manual March Mark Maximum Menu Middle minute Minimum Maritime Mobile Service Identity Man Overboard Mode Monitor Navigation Navigational Telex Nautical miles Number APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation N Nov Oct OFF OFFSET OS OWN PALETTE PANEL PC PERPENDIC PI POSN PULSE R RAD RAIN RANGE REF Rel RM RNG ROT S S1 (2) SAR SART SEA SEL Sep SM SOG SPD SPEC SSD STAB STBY SW T TARGET TB TCPA TEMP TGT TGT, TGTS TIME TM TRAIL True-G Meaning North November October Off Offset Own Ship Own Palette Panel Illumination Personal Computer Perpendicular Parallel Index (lines) Position Pulse Relative Radius Rain Range Reference Relative Relative Motion Range Rate of Turn South Short1(2) (pulse length) Search And Rescue Search And Rescue Transponder Sea Select September Statute Miles Speed Over the Ground Speed Specification Solid State Drive, Solid State Device Stabilization Stand-by Switch True Target True Bearing Time to Closest Point of Approach Temperature Target Target, Targets Time True Motion Trail True-ground AP-11 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Abbreviation True-S TT TTD TTG TTM TUNE TX UNDO UTC VECT VECTOR VIEW VRM W W/O WHT WOP WPT WT YEL Meaning True-sea Tracked Target or Target Tracking Tracked Target Data Time to go Tracked Target Information Tune Transmit Undo Universal Time, Coordinated Vector Vector View Variable Range Marker West Without White Wheel Over Point Waypoint Water Tracking Yellow Symbols Symbols on Control Unit Symbol Name Power switch Gain Symbols on display Symbol name and description Own ship - true scaled outline This can be displayed when based on user selection either beam width or length is more than 3 mm. Own ship - simplified symbol Own ship - minimized symbol AP-12 Symbol graphic(s) APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Radar antenna position This symbol indicates location of the radar antenna. Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with symbol + in [MARK SETTING] menu. Symbol graphic(s) Own ship heading line This line originates from CCRP or Radar antenna position. CCRP: Consistent Common Reference Point Beam line This line passes through the CCRP or radar antenna position. Stern line Velocity vector - time increments Velocity vector - stabilization indicator Ground stabilization is indicated by double arrowhead and water stabilization is indicated as single arrowhead. Past track System past track is indicated by thick line. Raw sensor primary past track is indicated by thin line. Raw sensor secondary past track is indicated by gray thin line. Radar targets in acquisition state 5 mm in diameter AP-13 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Radar targets in acquisition state - automatically detected Automatically detected target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowledged. Symbol graphic(s) 5 mm in diameter Tracked radar targets 18 3 mm in diameter Tracked radar targets - dangerous targets Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowledged. 18 Reference targets TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display. R4 Sleeping AIS targets Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading unknown). If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display. 18 Sleeping AIS target with neither reported heading nor COG Activated AIS targets Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading unknown). If both heading and COG are unknown the orientation is toward top of display. Activated AIS target with neither reported heading nor COG Sarah J Sarah J Activated AIS targets - true scaled outlines • This can be displayed when based on user selection either beam width or length is more than 3 mm. • AIS outline: ON/OFF Activated AIS targets - dangerous targets Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowledged. Activated AIS target with neither reported heading nor COG Sarah J AP-14 Sarah J APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Activated AIS targets - alternative Symbol graphic(s) Associated targets represented by AIS target symbols Sarah J Sarah J Associated targets represented by radar target symbols 18 Activated AIS targets - heading lines Activated AIS targets - heading lines - turn indicators Velocity vectors Radar target velocity vectors AIS target velocity vectors Sarah J Sarah J Associated target velocity vectors Sarah J Sarah J 18 AP-15 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Target past positions Symbol graphic(s) Radar target past positions AIS target past positions S arah J S arah J Associated target past positions S arah J AIS aid to navigation (ATON) Physical (real) ATON is solid line and virtual ATON is dashed line. An ATON in off position is yellow. AIS search and rescue transmitter -SART AIS SAR vessel AIS base station BS AP-16 S arah J 18 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Selected targets Symbol graphic(s) Selected radar targets Selected AIS targets 5 S arah J 5 S arah J Selected association targets 5 S arah J 5 S arah J 5 18 Selected AIS ATON 5 Selected AIS SART 5 AP-17 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s) Lost targets Lost radar targets Lost target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowledged. Lost AIS targets S arah J S arah J Lost associated targets S arah J LOST AIS ATON Lost AIS SART Radar and AIS target acquisition area AIS SAR aircraft Waypoint Next waypoint Routes Event marker AP-18 S arah J 18 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbol name and description User cursor Symbol graphic(s) Electronic bearing line (EBL) Second example show with range marker. Variable range marker (VRM) Range rings Parallel index lines Trial maneuver Displayed (flashing) during trial maneuver. Simulation mode Displayed (flashing) during TT performance test. Drop mark T S AP-19 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Radar map symbols IMO and A types Category Mark Line Symbol Color* Name Color Name Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy Red Buoy 7 colors Danger Green Buoy 7 colors Danger Red Buoy 7 colors Mark Green Buoy 7 colors Mark Purple Danger 7 colors Mark Purple Danger 7 colors Mark AP-20 Category Mark Symbol YellowOrange YellowOrange YellowOrange Mark 7 colors Mark Mark 7 colors Mark Mark 7 colors Mark Purple Nav Line 7 colors Mark White Coast Line 7 colors Mark Gray Contour Line 7 colors Nav Line Purple Prohibited Area 7 colors Coast Line Purple Cable (Danger) 7 colors Contour Line 7 colors Prohibited Area 7 colors Cable (Danger) 7 colors Line Buoy 7 colors Line Mark 7 colors Line Mark 7 colors Line Mark YellowOrange YellowOrange *Fixed B-type Line Mark Line Mark Line APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS Symbols on operating buttons Symbol Meaning Minimize button (on InstantAccess bar) Access AIS, Navtex functions (chart mode) Display received AIS message (radar mode) Access user profile, common settings Information (show program no., operator's manual) Undo, redo Note: This symbol is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit. Screenshot capture Monitor brilliance (FURUNO monitor only) Color palette selection AP-21 APPENDIX 3 DATA COLOR AND MEANING Indication Sensor color color GRN WHT SYSTEM HDG SPD L/L COG/SOG Display example THS-A GNS-A,D,F,P,R VBW-A VTG-A,D,P HDT VHW GGA-1,2,3,4,5 GLL-A,D and (status: A) RMC-A,D,F,P,R and (status: A) *1 WHT YEL All values in green. DGPS update interval in GGA, GNS sentence is higher than 10 seconds. RAIM error in GBS sentence is longer than 10 m. Position in yellow characters. *2 YEL-ORG YEL-ORG VBW-V VTG-E,M,S RMC-E,M,S or (status: V) GNS-M,S GGA-7,8 GLL-M,S RMC-M,S 12.5kn GPS1 286.0°T 13.1kn GPS1 0.3kn GPS1 30°00.0000'N 020°00.0000'E SPD, COG, SOG and POSN values and pos. source name in red. GRN (***.*) WHT THS-E, GNS-N, GGA-N, GLL-N, M, S, N RMC-N or (status: V) VTG-N *4 *3 GRN THS-A GNS-A,D,F,P,R HDT GGA-1,2,3,4,5 GLL-A,D and (status: A) RMC-A,D,F,P,R and (status: A) *1 DGPS update interval in GGA, YEL WHT GNS sentence is higher than 10 seconds. RAIM error in GBS sentence is longer than 10 m. *2 GNS-M,S YEL-ORG YEL-ORG GGA-7,8 GLL-M,S RMC-M,S GRN THS-E, GNS-N, GGA-N, GLL-N, WHT (***.*) M, S, N RMC-N or (status: V) *3 Manual Manual setting value MANUAL YEL YEL setting (Dead Reckoning) (MAN) value GNS-E (DR) (Type GGA-6 A or B) Correction GLL-E setting RMC-E value (Local setting) LOCAL WHT VBW-A VTG-A,D,P VHW HDG value shown with asterisks. Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. Same as corresponding VBW-V VTG-E,M,S RMC-E,M,S or indication in SYSTEM. (status: V) VTG-N RMC-N Same as corresponding indication in SYSTEM. Manual setting value HDG, SPD and POSN values and "MAN"*5 in yellow characters. *1: Navigational status in RMC, GNS sentence shown in “S” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4). *2: Navigational status in RMC, GNS sentence shown in “C”, “U” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4). *3: Navigational status in RMC, GNS sentence shown in “V” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4). *4: Navigational status in RMC sentence shown in “V” only (IEC 61162-1 ed4). *5: “CORR1” replaces “MAN” in case of heading offset. AP-22 FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR/ARPA FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 ANTENNA RADIATOR Type Slotted waveguide array Beam width and sidelobe attenuation X-band S-band Radiator type XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF SN36CF Length 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 12 ft Horizontal beam width 1.9° 1.23° 0.95° 1.8° Vertical beam width 20° 25° Sidelobe within ±10° -24 dB -28 dB -28 dB -24 dB Sidelobe outside ±10° -30 dB -32 dB -32 dB -30 dB Polarization Horizontal Rotation 24 rpm or 42 rpm (for high speed craft) TRANSCEIVER TX Frequency and modulation X-band (Magnetron) 9410 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N S-band Magnetron radar 3050 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N Solid state radar CH1: 3043.75 MHz (P0N)/ 3063.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N) or CH2: 3053.75 MHz (P0N)/ 3073.75 MHz ±5 MHz (Q0N) Output power FAR-3210/3310 12 kW FAR-3220/3320/3320W 25 kW FAR-3230S/3330S/3330SW 30 kW FAR-3230S-SSD/3330S-SSD 250 W (equivalent to magnetron radar 30 kW) Transmitter Magnetron radar FAR-3210/3310/3220/3320(W)/3230S/3330S(W) Solid state radar FAR-3230S-SSD/3330S-SSD Pulselength, Pulse Repetition Rate and Range scale Magnetron radar: Range scale (NM) PRR Range S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L (Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 3000* 0.07 μs 3000* 0.15 μs 1500 0.3 μs 1200 0.5 μs 1000 0.7 μs 600** 16 24 32 48 72 96 120 1.2 μs 1/2/4/8/16/32/72/120 NM ranges: non-IMO radar only *: 2200 Hz with TT range on 32 NM. **: 500 Hz on 96 NM range. SP - 1 E3616S01C-M FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES Solid state radar: Pulselength of P0N/Q0N Range S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L Range scale (NM) PRR (Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 2400* 0.07/5.0 μs 2000* 0.18/7.5 μs 1500 0.3/12.5 μs 1060 0.5/17.5 μs 1000 0.7/18.3 μs 600 1.2/18.3 μs 72 96 120 1/2/4/8/16/32/72/120 NM ranges: non-IMO radar only *: 1800 Hz (S1) and 1500 Hz (S2) with TT range on 32 NM. 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 PROCESSOR UNIT Minimum range Range discrimination Range accuracy 22 m 26 m 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m, whichever is the greater 3.4 Bearing discrimination 2.1° (XN12CF), 1.5° (XN20CF), 1.2° (XN24CF), 2.0° (SN36CF) 3.5 Bearing accuracy ±1° 3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI) Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 RI (NM) 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 Number of rings 5 5 5 3 4 32 8 4 48 8 6 72 12 6 96 16 6 1.5 0.25 6 2 0.5 4 3 0.5 6 4 1 4 6 1 6 8 2 4 12 2 6 16 4 4 24 4 6 120 20 6 3.7 Warm-up time 3 min. approx. (solid state radar excluded) 3.8 Orientation mode Head-up RM, STAB head-up RM, Course-up RM, North-up RM North-up TM, Stern-up RM 3.9 Stabilization mode 3.10 Target tracking (TT) Ground or sea stabilization Auto or manual acquisition: 200 targets in 32 NM Auto tracking on all acquired targets, Past position: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min 3.11 AIS Capacity: 2000 targets, Past position: 5/10 pts on all activated targets Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min 3.12 Radar map 10 maps, 4,000 pts per map 3.13 Acquisition zone 2 zones 4 4.1 4.2 Color LCD, raster-scan non-interlace, daylight display 4.3 MONITOR UNIT Display Screen size MU-190 MU-231 Brightness 19-inch, 376.32 x 301.06 mm, SXGA (1280 x 1024 pixel) 23.1-inch, 470.40 x 352.80 mm, UXGA (1600 x 1200 pixel) 450 cd/m2 typical (MU-190), 400 cd/m2 typical (MU-231) SP - 2 E3616S01C-M FURUNO FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES 4.4 Effective radar diameter 264.6 mm (MU-190), 335.2 mm (MU-231) 4.5 Visible distance 5 5.1 INTERFACE Processor unit (EC-3000) Serial I/O 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 5 ports) Input ABK, ACK, ACM, ACN, ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDT, MTW, MWV, RMC, THS, VBW, VDM, VDO, VDR, VHW, VTG, ZDA Output ABM, ACK, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, EVE, HBT, OSD, RSD, TLB, TTD, TTM, VSD Digital input 1 channel: contact signal, 100 ohm max. or 24VDC input Alarm output 6 channels: contact signal, load current 250 mA Normal close: 2, Normal open: 2, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1 DVI output 2 ports: DVI-D (DVI 1/2), 1 port: DVI-I or RGB (DVI 3) USB 4 ports (3 ports for control units) LAN 2 ports: Ethernet 1000Base-T for network equipment and sensor adapter Sensor adapter (option) MC-3000S (serial) 8 ports: I/O, IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports MC-3010A (analog) 3 ports: Input, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA MC-3020D (digital-in) 3 ports: relay contact, logics set from program MC-3030D (digital-out) 3 ports: relay contact, normal open and normal close available 5.2 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 1.02 m nominal POWER SUPPLY Power supply unit (w/ antenna and transceiver unit) FAR-3210/3310 (X-band, 12 kW) PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.0-1.0 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz PSU-014 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.4-1.1 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz FAR-3220/3320/3320W (X-band, 25 kW) PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.4-1.2 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz PSU-014 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 3.7-1.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz FAR-3230S/3330S/3330SW (S-band, magnetron) PSU-014 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 3.7-1.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz PSU-015 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 6.4-2.7 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz FAR-3230S-SSD/3330S-SSD (S-band, SSD) PSU-016 (24rpm) 100-230 VAC: 2.8-1.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz PSU-018 (42rpm) 100-230 VAC: 5.6-2.5 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz Processor unit (EC-3000) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 1.5/0.7 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz Monitor unit MU-190 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz MU-231 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz Sensor adapter (option) 24 VDC: 1.4 A (for 11 units), input to MC-3000S, the sources of other sensor adapters are fed from MC-3000S SP - 3 E3616S01C-M FURUNO 6.5 FAR-32x0/33x0 SERIES Switching HUB (option) HUB-3000 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz HUB-100 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 6.6 Transformer (RU-1803, option) 6.7 De-icer (option) 7 7.1 7.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Ambient temperature Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C) Indoor units -15°C to +55°C Relative humidity 95% or less at +40°C Degree of protection Antenna unit IP56 Processor unit IP20 (IP22: option) Sensor adapter IP20 (IP22: option) Transceiver unit IP20 HUB HUB-100: IP20, HUB-3000: IP22 Control/ monitor/ power supply unit IP22 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4 8 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 UNIT COLOR Antenna unit Power supply unit Processor unit Control/ monitor unit Transceiver unit HUB 9 9.1 PERFORMANCE MONITOR PM-32 (X-band) Frequency range 9380 to 9440 MHz Input power +18 dBm to +30 dBm Output power -21 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -41 dBm (1st pulse min. output) Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) PM-52A (S-band, MAG) Frequency range 3040 to 3080 MHz Input power +25 dBm to +40 dBm Output power -38 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -58 dBm (1st pulse min. output) Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) PM-52B (S-band, SSD) Frequency range 3063.75 ±2 MHz Input power +5 dBm to +25 dBm Output power -52 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -72 dBm (1st pulse min. output) Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse) 7.2 7.3 9.2 9.3 440 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz 100-115/220-230 VAC: 2.6/1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz N9.5 N2.5 N2.5 N2.5 N2.5 HUB-100: N3.0, HUB-3000: N2.5 SP - 4 E3616S01C-M INDEX A A/C RAIN control....................................... 2-5 A/C SEA control ........................................ 2-3 ACQ/ACT key............................................ 4-5 Acquisition zone acknowledging alarm for ......................... 3-5 deactivating ............................................. 3-5 sleeping ................................................... 3-5 stabilization ............................................. 3-5 AIO chart cells ................................................ 9-9 chart object information ........................... 9-9 displaying ................................................ 9-8 information to display ............................ 9-10 AIS association ............................................ 4-14 association, conditions for ............ 4-13, 18-9 automatic activation of targets ................ 4-5 automatic target activation (chart mode) ....................................... 18-5 CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 4-10 deleting received and sent safety messages ................................ 17-3 filtering targets......................................... 4-5 filtering targets (chart mode) ................. 18-5 function off............................................... 4-2 hiding....................................................... 4-3 lost target .............................................. 4-11 lost target alert ...................................... 4-11 Lost target alert filter (chart mode) ........ 18-6 lost target filter....................................... 4-12 messages, displaying ............................ 4-17 messages, receiving ............................. 4-16 messages, transmitting ................ 4-15, 4-16 own ship data (chart mode)................... 18-9 past position display .............................. 4-12 pop-up info .............................................. 4-7 received and sent safety messages ....................... 17-2, 17-3 ROT tag limit ......................................... 4-18 scaled symbol ....................................... 4-18 sending safety messages...................... 17-1 showing ................................................... 4-3 sleeping activated targets (chart mode) ....................................... 18-6 sleeping targets ....................................... 4-6 symbol brilliance.................................... 4-10 symbol color .......................................... 4-11 symbols ................................................... 4-3 symbols (chart mode)............................ 18-4 target data (basic) ................................... 4-7 target data (chart mode)............... 18-7, 18-8 target data (expanded) ............................ 4-9 vectors................................................... 4-13 voyage data.................................. 4-14, 18-4 voyage data (chart mode) ..................... 18-4 Alert box ............................... 2-56, 6-10, 20-2 Alert list ................................................... 20-6 Alert log ................................................... 20-7 Alert parameters page............................. 12-6 Alert state icon ........................................ 20-4 Alerts acknowledging ...................................... 20-5 alert list .................................................. 20-6 alert log ................................................. 20-7 alert state icons ..................................... 20-4 buzzer silencing..................................... 20-5 buzzer stop button................................. 20-4 definition ................................................ 20-1 list of ...................................................... 20-8 message format..................................... 20-3 Anchor watch ................................. 2-54, 15-6 Antenna marker....................................... 2-36 Approved until date ................................... 9-5 Area report ............................................ 13-11 Association..................................... 4-13, 18-9 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function..................................................... 2-9 B Barge marker .......................................... 2-35 Basic setting page..................................... 8-3 Bearing measurement chart ...................................................... 6-19 radar, chart radar................................... 2-23 BRILL control ............................................ 1-7 Brilliance AIS symbol ............................................ 4-10 AIS symbol brilliance ............................. 4-10 monitor .................................................... 1-7 screen data ........................................... 2-37 TT symbol................................................ 3-8 Buzzer stop button .................................. 20-4 C CCRP ...................................................... 2-51 CCRP page ........................................... 22-14 CCRS ...................................................... 16-1 Chart alerts introduction............................................ 11-1 objects used in ...................................... 11-3 own ship check...................................... 11-4 route monitoring .................................... 11-7 route planning ....................................... 11-5 Chart cells catalog of............................................... 7-15 deleting.................................................. 7-17 editing.................................................... 7-17 grouping ................................................ 7-16 IN-1 INDEX status......................................................7-18 Chart database (chart radar)....................2-63 Chart database button .............................8-10 CHART DISP button ................................2-60 Chart display indications ..........................1-12 Chart legend C-MAP....................................................10-3 S57...........................................................9-2 Chart objects (chart radar) custom sets of ........................................2-62 CHART ON/OFF button ...........................2-60 Chart radar display indications.................1-11 Chart scale ...............................................6-14 Chart scale indication (chart radar) ..........2-63 Chart synchronization select units to synchronize .....................7-25 synchronization status............................7-26 Chart usage log........................................19-8 Charts approved until date...................................9-4 cell deleting ............................................7-17 cell editing ..............................................7-17 display date ..............................................9-4 Check area page............................ 11-4, 15-4 Check results page ..................................12-8 Circle report ...........................................13-12 Clearing line report.................................13-11 C-MAP charts cartographic services .............................10-1 catalog of chart cells ..............................7-15 chart cell grouping..................................7-16 chart cell status ......................................7-18 chart legend ...........................................10-3 database deletion.....................................7-9 database installation ................................7-6 deleting...................................................7-20 eToken registration ..................................7-6 export list of............................................7-11 install/update history ..............................7-14 license installation ....................................7-8 opening ..................................................7-18 permit status...........................................7-13 subscription services..............................10-2 update file, applying .................................7-9 update file, generating..............................7-9 C-MAP DL charts enabling..................................................7-11 update file, applying ...............................7-10 update file, generating............................7-10 COG/SOG page.......................................16-5 Color differentiation test (S57 charts) ......24-8 Context-sensitive menu EBL, VRM on chart ................................6-20 radar.......................................................1-24 radar, chart radar ...................................1-22 Context-sensitive menus chart .......................................................6-11 Controls......................................................1-1 IN-2 Cost parameters.......................................21-3 Course-up mode ......................................2-18 CPA/TCPA alarm AIS .........................................................4-10 TT...........................................................3-16 Cursor attributes.......................................2-36 Cursor position box chart .......................................................6-16 radar, chart radar ...................................1-25 Customize page .......................................22-7 Customized echo editing.....................................................2-14 restoring to factory default settings ........2-15 restoring to saved settings .....................2-15 selection .................................................2-14 D Danger targets log conditions for logging ...........................19-11 viewing .................................................19-10 Data sharing.............................................22-6 Deep contour .............................................8-1 Depth sensor..........................................16-14 Details log ................................................19-5 Display date ...............................................9-5 Display test page .....................................22-8 Divider activating ..............................................15-10 characteristics ......................................15-11 limitations .............................................15-11 Drop mark bearing reference ...................................2-53 erasing ...................................................2-54 hiding......................................................2-53 inscribing ................................................2-53 showing ..................................................2-53 Dual radar ................................................2-45 Dynamic trial maneuver ...........................3-18 E EBL bearing measurement on chart ..............6-19 bearing measurement on radar, chart radar...........................................2-23 bearing reference on chart .....................6-19 bearing reference on radar, chart radar...........................................2-24 context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-20 hiding on chart........................................6-19 offsetting on radar, chart radar...............2-24 showing on chart ....................................6-19 EBL OFFSET key........................... 2-24, 2-26 EBL, VRM boxes......................................6-10 Echo area.................................................2-58 Echo averaging ..........................................2-8 Echo color ................................................2-58 Echo stretch ...............................................2-7 Echo-referenced speed..............................3-2 INDEX ENC charts AIO display .............................................. 9-8 catalog of chart cells ............................. 7-15 chart cell grouping ................................. 7-16 chart cell status ..................................... 7-18 chart installation ...................................... 7-3 deleting.................................................. 7-20 ENC coverage indication....................... 7-22 ENC list export ...................................... 7-12 ENC permit display ............................... 7-12 export list of ........................................... 7-11 install/update history ............................. 7-14 license backup ...................................... 7-12 license deletion ....................................... 7-5 license installation, automatic ................. 7-2 license installation, manual ..................... 7-3 license restore ....................................... 7-12 manual updates..................................... 7-22 opening ................................................. 7-18 permit status.......................................... 7-13 publishers notes .................................... 7-21 reconverting .......................................... 7-27 F Fallback arrangements............................ 24-9 File export page ...................................... 22-2 Filter status............................................ 16-10 Full user chart report ............................... 13-9 Full WPT report ..................................... 12-22 G GAIN control.............................................. 2-3 General page ............................................ 8-5 H Heading input ................................. 1-28, 6-24 Heading line ............................................ 2-34 Head-up mode ........................................ 2-18 Head-up TB mode................................... 2-18 HL OFF key............................................. 2-34 I INDEX LINE key...................................... 2-31 Indications chart display .......................................... 1-12 chart radar display................................. 1-11 radar display............................................ 1-9 Information box nav data ................................................ 2-39 nav data selection ................................. 2-41 route information ................................... 2-40 Instant access bar chart display ............................................ 6-5 radar, chart radar .................................. 1-15 Instant Track parameters ............................................ 21-2 Instant track back to track .......................................... 14-7 button label.......................................... 14-12 details .................................................... 14-9 messages .............................................. 14-8 monitoring ........................................... 14-10 safe off track.......................................... 14-6 stopping monitoring ............................. 14-11 Interference rejector .................................. 2-7 Interswitch ............................................... 2-42 K Keyboard test page ................................. 22-9 L Label report ........................................... 13-12 Line report ............................................. 13-10 Lost target alert ....................................... 3-17 AIS ........................................................ 4-12 M Magnetron reset ...................................... 2-50 Mains switch.............................................. 1-5 Manual updates deleting update symbols........................ 7-24 inserting new update symbols ............... 7-23 modifying existing update symbols........ 7-24 Mariner page ............................................. 8-8 Mini conning display................................ 15-9 MOB position........................................... 1-29 N Navigation data ....................................... 16-8 Navtex deleting messages ................................ 17-4 receiving messages............................... 17-3 Noise rejector .......................................... 2-11 North marker ........................................... 2-34 North-up mode ........................................ 2-18 Notes on radar, chart radar ..................... 2-64 O odometer resetting .................................. 6-31 Off center display (radar) ........................ 2-27 OFF CENTER key................................... 2-27 Offset EBL origin point............................................. 2-25 usage .................................................... 2-24 Operating mode ...................................... 6-13 Operator?s manual ................................. 1-33 Optimize page .............................. 12-6, 12-15 Other page ................................................ 8-4 Other sensors page................................. 16-5 Overlay/NAV Tools box anchor watch ......................................... 15-6 check area page.................................... 15-4 PI (parallel index) page ......................... 15-1 predictor ................................................ 15-5 ring ........................................................ 15-5 UKC....................................................... 15-7 Overlay/Nav Tools box ............................ 6-10 Own ship functions box ............................. 6-8 Own ship marker ..................................... 2-34 IN-3 INDEX P Palette button .............................................1-6 Parallel index lines activating, deactivating...........................15-2 bearing reference ......................... 2-31, 15-2 displaying ...............................................2-31 erasing ...................................................2-31 interval....................................................15-3 length adjustment......................... 2-32, 15-4 line interval .............................................2-31 line orientation........................................2-31 mode ............................................ 2-32, 15-2 number of lines to display ......................15-2 number to show......................................2-31 orientation ..............................................15-3 resetting ....................................... 2-32, 15-3 Passage plan report ...............................12-23 Past position display AIS .........................................................4-12 TT...........................................................3-13 Performance monitor ...............................2-48 Permanent warning box ...........................6-10 Permanent warnings C-MAP charts.........................................10-4 S57 charts ................................................9-3 Permit status ............................................7-13 PI (parallel index) page ............................15-1 Position alignment..............................................16-12 primary and secondary...........................16-7 source ....................................................16-6 Position events.........................................19-2 Position offset (radar)...............................1-29 POSN page ..............................................16-4 Power switch ..............................................1-5 Predictor...................................................15-5 Presentation library ....................................9-6 Presentation mode chart .......................................................6-15 radar, chart radar ...................................2-17 Primary alert priority (radar) .....................2-57 Printing cell status list..........................................7-20 chart list..................................................7-19 S57 chart object information ....................9-7 Processor Unit EC-3000 ............................1-5 Program nos. ...........................................1-33 Public key (ENC charts) .............................7-1 Publishers notes ......................................7-21 Pulse length changing...................................................2-3 selection ...................................................2-2 R Radar Control Unit RCU-025 .....................1-1 Radar display indications ...........................1-9 Radar map copying individual marks and lines...........5-7 IN-4 copying marks and lines in an area..........5-7 copying marks and lines to another map file ....................................5-8 erasing all marks and lines in a map file ..5-6 erasing individual marks and lines ...........5-5 erasing marks and lines in an area ..........5-5 exporting ..................................................5-9 features on/off ........................................5-13 hiding........................................................5-1 importing ................................................5-10 line entry...................................................5-2 map comment ..........................................5-4 map points used.......................................5-3 mark entry ................................................5-2 radar map no............................................5-4 route display...........................................5-14 showing ....................................................5-1 Rain clutter adjustment automatic..................................................2-5 manual .....................................................2-6 Range and bearing between two targets ..............................................2-26 Range measurement chart .......................................................6-19 radar.......................................................2-20 radar, chart radar ...................................2-20 Range selection .......................................2-20 Range/Presentation mode box.................2-17 Recording chart usage log.......................................19-8 danger targets log ................................19-10 details log ...............................................19-5 position events .......................................19-2 user events.............................................19-1 voyage log..............................................19-6 Reports area ......................................................13-11 circle.....................................................13-12 clearing line ..........................................13-11 full user chart..........................................13-9 Full WPT ..............................................12-22 label......................................................13-12 line........................................................13-10 passage plan........................................12-23 tidal.......................................................13-10 WPT table ............................................12-21 Ring page.................................................15-5 Route bank.............................................12-13 Route information box ................................6-9 Route page ................................................8-8 Routes adding waypoints at end of route ...........12-9 changing waypoint position ....................12-8 creating new...........................................12-2 deleting.................................................12-19 deleting waypoints..................................12-9 exporting FAR-3xx0 data .....................12-18 exporting FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII data...12-19 INDEX full WPT report .................................... 12-22 importing csv, ASCII data.................... 12-18 importing FEA-2x07 data .................... 12-17 importing FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data.. 12-17 inserting waypoint ................................. 12-9 optimizing ............................................ 12-15 overview in planning.............................. 12-1 passage plan report ............................ 12-23 route bank ........................................... 12-13 SAR ..................................................... 12-10 selecting for monitoring ......................... 14-1 selecting route components to display .. 14-3 stopping monitoring ............................... 14-3 switching monitored to planning ............ 14-5 user chart page (route planning) ........... 12-5 user charts information in route monitoring ................................. 14-5 Waypoints page (monitoring) ................ 14-4 waypoints page (route planning) ........... 12-4 WPT table ........................................... 12-21 S S57 charts approved until date.................................. 9-5 chart legend ................................... 9-2, 10-3 chart object information ........................... 9-7 chart update approval ............................. 9-4 display date ............................................. 9-5 permanent warnings................................ 9-3 presentation library.................................. 9-6 symbols used in ...................................... 9-6 Safety contour .................................. 8-1, 11-2 Safety depth .............................................. 8-1 SAR route.............................................. 12-10 SART introduction............................................ 2-55 receiving ................................................ 2-55 Screenshots capturing screen.................................... 1-30 deleting................................................ 22-12 exporting ............................................. 22-12 Screenshots page ................................. 22-11 Sea clutter adjustment automatic................................................. 2-4 manual .................................................... 2-4 Second-trace echoes .............................. 2-16 Self test page .......................................... 22-5 Sensor information box .................... 1-18, 6-8 Sensor information, datum box ............... 1-18 Sensor set (system, local)....................... 1-25 Sensors menu ......................................... 16-2 Set and drift............................................. 3-14 Settings menu ......................................... 1-31 accessing .............................................. 22-1 CCRP .................................................. 22-14 customize page ..................................... 22-7 display test page ................................... 22-8 file export page...................................... 22-2 file import page...................................... 22-3 file maintenance page ........................... 22-4 keyboard test page................................ 22-9 screenshots page ................................ 22-11 self test page ......................................... 22-5 user default page ................................ 22-13 Shallow contour......................................... 8-1 Ship and route parameters...................... 21-1 SPD page................................................ 16-3 Speed input .................................... 1-26, 6-22 Split screen ............................................. 6-21 Standard page........................................... 8-4 Static trial maneuver ............................... 3-18 Status bar chart display ............................................ 6-3 radar, chart radar................................... 1-13 STBY TX button ........................................ 2-1 Stern marker ........................................... 2-34 T TARGET DATA key .................................. 4-7 Target list (TT, AIS) ................................. 3-10 TARGET LIST key .................................. 3-10 Targets page ............................................. 8-9 Tidal report ............................................ 13-10 Time ........................................................ 1-30 Tips ................................................ 1-34, 6-21 Track erasing .................................................. 5-14 setup ..................................................... 5-13 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026................ 1-4 Tracking page ........................................... 8-7 TRAIL key ............................................... 2-29 Trails color ...................................................... 2-30 indications ............................................. 2-28 level of afterglow ................................... 2-30 own ship?s ............................................ 2-30 resetting ................................................ 2-29 suppressing trails around own ship ....... 2-30 trail stabilization in true motion .............. 2-29 trail time................................................. 2-29 true or relative ....................................... 2-28 Trial maneuver dynamic trial .......................................... 3-18 procedure .............................................. 3-19 static trial ............................................... 3-18 terminating ............................................ 3-20 trip meter resetting .................................. 6-31 True motion mode ................................... 2-19 True motion reset .................................... 6-17 TT acquisition zone ............................... 3-4, 3-5 alert list .................................................. 3-21 association ................................. 4-14, 18-10 automatic acquisition............................... 3-3 automatic acquisition zone ...................... 3-4 CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 3-16 data display ............................................. 3-9 hiding....................................................... 3-1 IN-5 INDEX lost target alert .......................................3-17 lost target alert filter (chart mode) ..........18-3 manual acquisition ...................................3-5 past position display...............................3-13 past positions, attributes (chart mode) ...18-3 pop-up info .............................................3-10 showing ....................................................3-1 simulation mode .....................................3-20 static trial maneuver ...............................3-18 symbol brilliance.......................................3-8 symbol color .............................................3-8 symbol color (chart mode)......................18-1 symbol size (chart mode) .......................18-1 symbols ....................................................3-7 symbols (chart mode).............................18-1 target data (chart mode).........................18-2 target list.................................................3-10 terminating a trial maneuver...................3-20 terminating tracking on target...................3-6 trial maneuver ........................................3-18 trial maneuver procedure .......................3-19 vector .....................................................3-13 TUNE button ..............................................2-1 Tuning automatic..................................................2-1 initializing..................................................2-1 manual .....................................................2-2 U UKC page setting.....................................................15-7 UKC window...........................................15-8 UKC window ............................................15-8 Undo .............................................. 12-4, 13-5 User chart page route planning ........................................12-5 User charts area report............................................13-11 circle report ..........................................13-12 clearing line report................................13-11 creating ..................................................13-2 deleting...................................................13-8 deleting objects from ..............................13-7 editing objects on ...................................13-7 full report ................................................13-9 importing ................................................13-6 information in route monitoring...............14-5 label report ...........................................13-12 line report .............................................13-10 notes ......................................................13-4 selecting objects to display ....................13-8 tidal report ............................................13-10 User charts page route monitoring .....................................14-5 User default page...................................22-13 User events ..............................................19-1 User profiles .............................................1-31 IN-6 V VECTOR MODE key................................3-13 VECTOR TIME key ..................................3-13 Vectors own ship .................................................2-35 target ......................................................2-35 Voyage log conditions for logging .............................19-8 viewing ...................................................19-7 VRM context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-20 hiding on chart........................................6-19 range measurement on chart .................6-19 range measurement on radar, chart radar...........................................2-20 showing on chart ....................................6-19 W Watch alert ...............................................2-38 Waypoints page route monitoring .....................................14-4 route planning ........................................12-4 Wind sensor ...........................................16-13 Wiper........................................................2-12 WPT table report .............12-21, 12-22, 12-23 Z Zoom ........................................................2-33
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Create Date : 2014:08:27 11:20:23Z Creator : FrameMaker 7.2 Modify Date : 2014:12:15 13:09:02+09:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Metadata Date : 2014:12:15 13:09:02+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Document ID : uuid:700cc5b5-28dc-4b79-a9aa-424d758e434a Instance ID : uuid:01787c4d-4d03-46c2-afe7-cf7d0c25b7f7 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 463EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools